Loading...
Plans (2) St. Anthony Community Center Project Number: #211280 RECEIVED Mir 2 5 2013 CITY OFTIGARD BUILDING DIVISION PROJECT MANUAL Permit Set Volume 2 Division 21 -33 CITY OF TIGARD Approved [ Conditionally Approved [I See Letter to: ! ,;1,,.; i } [ 1 Permit Number: Ri f Z6 -eva65— Address:j'�5"AU SAA G A�.,,rr Bye-reuz—e-A--Dale: 7 --a —J') Submittal Date: March 18, 2013 Ankrom Moisan 6720 SW Macadam Ave,Suite#100 / Portland,OR 97219 503.245.7100 / www.amaa.com OFFICE COPY ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 00 01 10 PERMIT SET TABLE OF CONTENTS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS Volume 2-Division 21-33 DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 01 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS-DESIGN BUILD 21 05 00 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 21 12 00 STANDPIPES AND FIRE HOSES 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS DIVISION 22-PLUMBING 22 00 00 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 49 PLUMBING SEISMIC RESTRAINT 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 10 05 PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 06 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23- HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 23 05 05 SLEEVES 23 05 10 MOTOR STARTERS 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 93 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 23 PUMPS 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 34 00 HVAC FANS 23 37 00 HVAC AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 23 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS 23 41 00 AIR FILTERS 23 52 39 BOILERS 23 62 00 PACKAGED CONDENSING UNITS 23 73 13 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLERS 23 82 19 FAN COIL UNITS DIVISION 26- ELECTRICAL 26 05 19 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 34 CONDUIT ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 00 01 10 PERMIT SET TABLE OF CONTENTS MARCH 2013 PAGES OF 5 26 05 35 SURFACE RACEWAYS 26 05 37 BOXES 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 09 18 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 27 17 EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 28 13 FUSES 26 28 17 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 18 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 51 00 LIGHTING DIVISION 27-COMMUNICATIONS 27 10 05 LOW-VOLTAGE CABLING PATHWAYS 27 13 43 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA DIVISION 28-ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 31 23 16 EXCAVATION 31 23 23 FILL DIVISION 32- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 17 13 PARKING BUMPERS 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS D i ✓i 's i o n 2 I ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 00 01 PERMIT SET BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS-DESIGN BUILD MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 9 SECTION 21 00 01 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS-DESIGN BUILD PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for all Contractor installed equipment. It applies to all sections included in Division 21. B. Project involves an approximately 18,000 square foot Community Center, including Auditorium, Lobby, Nursery,Serving Kitchen, restroom and ancilary spaces. C. Contractor shall provide complete engineering calculations and design of the fire protection system satisfying the direction and criteria of this specification and all other supporting documents and drawings. 1. Current Design Provided by: PDQ Design Services Mark Aldridge 19150 SW Oak Street Aloha, OR 97007 503-848-5918 pdqfire@comcast.net D. Provide all materials, labor and equipment required to install a complete and fully operational fire protection system as indicated by the contract drawings and this specification. E. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses,fees and taxes applicable to this project as required by law. F. Cooperate with other trades in furnishing material and information required for installation and operation of mechanical items. G. Requirements for the following are included: 1. Related work(other Contract Documents and specification sections)that must be combined with the requirements of this Section. 2. Design performance. 3. Delivery,storage,and handling. 4. Quality assurance and standards. 5. Submittals. 6. Product quality, basic type,and finishes. 7. Equipment identification. 8. Design criteria. 9. Excavation and backfill. 10. Installation. 11. Mounting and shimming. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 00 01 PERMIT SET BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS-DESIGN BUILD MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 9 12. Inspection. 13. Safety considerations. 14. Cleaning,startup,and adjustments. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. This general section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for the project equipment and systems: 1. Division 1 sections included in this Project specifications. 2. The Contract. 3. General and specific mechanical specifications and drawings included in the project. 4. Section 07 90 05-Joint Sealers. 5. Section 22 05 53- Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. "Indicated": Refers to graphic representations, notes or schedules in the Drawings;or to other paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. 1. Terms such as"shown","noted","scheduled", and"specified",are used to notify or help the user to locate reference. Location is not limited. B. "Directed":Terms such as"directed", Requested","authorized","selected","approved", "required",and"permitted"mean directed by Architect/Engineer, approved by Architect/Engineer and similar phrases. C. "Approved":When used in conjunction with Architect/Engineer's action on contract submittals, applications,requests, is limited to Architect/Engineer's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. D. "Regulations":Includes laws,ordinances,statutes and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction,as well as rules,conventions and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of Work. E. "Furnish": Means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations. F. "Install": Describes operations at Project site including actual unloading,temporary storage, unpacking,assembling,erecting, placing,anchoring, supporting, isolating, applying,working to dimension,finishing,curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations. G. "Provide": Means to furnish and install. H. "Installer":A contractor, or another entity engaged by the contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of a lower tier,to perform a particular construction activity including installation,erection,application or similar operations. • AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 00 01 PERMIT SET BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS- DESIGN BUILD MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 9 1. Installers are required to be experienced in operations they are engaged to perform. 2. The term"experience"means having successfully completed a minimum of three previous projects similar in scope and size to this Project and within the time frame indicated in the"Quality Assurance"section of the Specifications. In addition,in means being familiar with special requirements indicated and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. I. "Project Site": Is defined as the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of Project. 1.04 DESIGN PERFORMANCE A. Compliance by the Contractor and/or Vendor with the provisions of this Specification does not relieve him of the responsibilities of furnishing equipment and materials of proper design, mechanically suited to meet operating guarantees at the specified service conditions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:Submit five complete sets of manufacturer's product data in a three ring binder for approval. Literature submitted shall clearly indicate the model number, capacity, rated operating conditions, size,weight,support requirements,electrical power requirements, utility(fuel,air,cooling water,etc.)requirements,and options furnished. Submittals shall include, but are not necessarily limited to the following; 1. Fire Protection: Piping materials;valves;fittings;supports;switches;alarms; backflow devices;sprinkler heads; compressors;fire pumps and the like. Provide minimum 36 x 24 size system layout shop drawings. Provide hydraulic calculations. 2. Calculations: Provide for sizing of all utility services, including fire sprinkler main and all building piping; pumps head and flow sizing for all systems;thermal expansion and seismic restraints;and all other calculations and all other calculations consistent with good engineering practice.Include design criteria used and assumptions made. B. Operation and Maintenance Data:Submit three complete sets of manufacturer's literature bound in a three ring binder for approval. Data shall include installation,start- up, and maintenance instructions, parts lists,and wiring diagrams. C. Substitutions: System design was based upon the equipment and materials listed on the drawings and specifications herein.At contractor's option,another manufacturer's equipment of similar quality,capacity and features may be submitted for prior approval per Section 01 33 00. Prior permission to substitute does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of including this information in the bound submittal packages. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 00 01 PERMIT SET BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS-DESIGN BUILD MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 9 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the latest versions of the following codes,standards and specifications,except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. State of Oregon "IBC". 2. State of Oregon "IMC". 3. State of Oregon "UPC". 4. State of Oregon "IFC". 5. ANSI 831.9"Building Service Piping". 6. SMACNA-"HVAC Duct Construction Standards". 7. NFPA-Sections 54 and 90B. B. Drawings:All drawings are diagrammatic and show general design,arrangement,and extent of the systems. Do not scale drawings for rough-in dimensions, nor use as shop drawings. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work required with a minimum of five years documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Delivery: Deliver to site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Preparation for shipment: 1. Each unit shall be suitably prepared for the shipment specified and for storage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in a manner requiring no disassembly prior to operation. 2. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of the Preparation for Shipment provisions employed with respect to materials and application. 3. One complete set of Installations,Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be packed and shipped with the equipment.This set is in addition to the sets that are to be sent directly to the Owner. C. Handling:Avoid damage. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction requirements for rigging, unloading and transporting units. D. Storage: Inside protected from weather,dirt and construction dust.Where necessary to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable,waterproof wrapping. Cap all pipe ends.Taping pipe ends is not adequate or allowable. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Provide products that are compatible with other portions of the work and provide products with the proper power characteristics and similar adaptations for the • project. B. Arrangement:Arrange ductwork and piping parallel with primary lines of the building construction and with a minimum 7 feet overhead clearance in unfinished equipment AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 00 01 PERMIT SET BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS- DESIGN BUILD MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 9 rooms where possible.Conceal all piping and ductwork where possible unless indicated otherwise. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access for operation and maintenance.Give right-of-way to piping which must be sloped for drainage.Set all equipment level or as recommended by manufacturer. C. Coordination:Where several elements of the work must be sequenced and positioned in order to fit the available space, prepare shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions(at accurate scale)required for installation and submit prior to purchase/fabrication/installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination. 1.09 STANDARDS A. General: Provide all new materials and equipment,identical to apparatus or equipment in successful operation for a minimum of five years. Provide materials of comparable quality omitted here but necessary to complete the work. Maximum allowable variation from stated capacities,minus 5%to plus 10%as approved in each case. B. Governing Standards:The following are typical standards generally referenced in these specifications and identified by their acronym. Federal Specifications(FS),American Society for Testing Materials(ASTM),American National Standards Institute(ANSI), Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Standard Practice(MSS SP-69),Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute(CISPI),Underwriters Laboratory(UL) numbers are given. 1.10 WARRANTIES A. Contractor shall provide a 1-year warranty on all equipment, materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of owner's acceptance. B. Provide five-year warranty on all refrigeration compressors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING A. Manufacturers: 1. Specified Technology Inc.(STI) Model SpecSeal Series 100. 2. Dow Corning Corp. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. International Protective Coating Corp. 5. 3M fire Protection Products. 6. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping:Single or multiple component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds:Single or Multiple component foam compound. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 00 01 PERMIT SET BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS- DESIGN BUILD MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 4 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral or ceramic fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer,covered with sheet stainless steel jacket,joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. 6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows. C. Color:As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.02 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES A. Primer:Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard. 2. Mineral fiber matting. 3. Sheet metal. 4. Plywood. 5. Alumina silicate fire board. C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips,collars,fasteners,temporary stops or dams,and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. D. General: 1. Furnish UL listed products. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. E. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Stamped steel,chrome plated, hinged,split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade,furnish mechanical sealing device to continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION A. Site Examination: Before starting work,carefully examine site and all Contract Drawings. Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project.Verify all indicated elevations, building measurements, rough-in dimensions and equipment locations before proceeding with any work. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 00 01 PERMIT SET BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS- DESIGN BUILD MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 9 B. Utility Locations:All on-site utilities to be new. See civil.Subcontractor is responsible for utility service piping from property line to sprinkler room. C. Discrepancies:Any error,conflict or discrepancy in Specifications and/or existing conditions shall be reported immediately. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made. Under no circumstances shall beams, girders,footings,or columns be cut for mechanical items.Casting of pipes into concrete is prohibited. 3.02 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Fire Suppression: 1. In accordance with NFPA 13. 3.03 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING A. Provide all control devices,and wiring complete from power source indicated on Drawings. B. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and/or specified,are based upon requirements of specific manufacturers which are intended as somewhat typical of several makes which may be approved. Provide all devices necessary for a complete and operable system. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves,fittings, damper actuators, etc.on pipe and duct systems. B. Locating and Positioning Equipment:Observe all Codes and Regulations and good common practice in locating and installing mechanical equipment and material so that completed installation presents the least possible hazard. Maintain recommended clearances for repair and service to all equipment. C. Installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the equipment manufacturer, including special requirements for seismic restraints. D. Equipment Manufacturer's Responsibility and Services: 1. A manufacturer's representative for major equipment and operating systems shall be provided as necessary to assist the Contractor during installation,and to provide written certification that the equipment has been installed as specified and in accordance with the manufacturer's representative. 2. The manufacturer's representative shall provide the initial startup of equipment in the presence of the Owner. a. Provide a pre-start check of all piping,valves,control devices,control panels,and equipment. b. Calibrate and adjust equipment and controls for operation at the specified design and conditions. c. Provide a record of all startup events noting problems and their resolution. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 00 01 PERMIT SET BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS- DESIGN BUILD MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 9 d. Provide a record of all set points for operational controls and devices. 3. Upon the completion of the equipment startup,provide instructional time with the Owner's personnel to review the operations and maintenance manuals and perform each step necessary for startup,shutdown,troubleshooting,and routine maintenance.The instructional time shall be scheduled through the Owner. 4. Upon completion of the inspections,startup,testing,and checkout procedures,the equipment manufacturer shall submit written notice to the Owner that the units are ready for use by the Owner. Provide a certificate of calibration for all equipment. E. Anchorage:Anchor and/or brace all mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork to resist displacement due to seismic action, include snubbers on equipment mounted on spring isolators. 3.05 MOUNTING AND SHIMMING A. Mount equipment as shown on the Drawings.Provisions for mounting special equipment on spring isolators,snubbers, and inertia bases are specified in Division 21. B. Level the equipment by means of 304 stainless steel wedges(stainless steel plates and stainless steel shims)or PVC/poly wedges in areas of extreme corrosive environments. Wedge taper shall not be greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level bearing surface for the equipment.Secure each pair of wedges in their final positions with one tack weld on each side after leveling is complete.Wedging shall be executed in a manner that will prevent a change in level or springing of the Baseplate when the anchor bolts are tightened. 1. Adjust rotating equipment assemblies such that the driving units are properly aligned, plumb and level with the driven units and all interconnecting shafts and couplings. 2. All rotating equipment shall be checked for proper alignment with dial indicators or laser after completion of grouting.The alignment must be within the tolerances required by the equipment manufacturer.The final alignment check shall be witnessed by the Owner. 3.06 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall inspect his work to ensure the installation and workmanship is in accordance with these specifications and acceptable industry standards for the work being done. B. All materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to inspection at any time by the Owner. Contractor shall correct any work, materials,or equipment not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.07 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS A. All equipment shall be installed with suitable access clearances that satisfy OSHA and code requirements for maintenance or removal of replaceable parts and components, AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 00 01 PERMIT SET BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS-DESIGN BUILD MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF 9 and with necessary inions or flanges to perform the maintenance or removal without removing the connecting appurtenances. B. Where equipment requiring periodic maintenance cannot be reached by normal walkways because of interference with ductwork,piping, or other obstructions the Contractor shall notify the Owner and propose an alternate safe means of access.These may include construction of an overhead platform with stairway or ladder ends and safety railings or handholds,or walk-through duct plenums with hinged access doors, or as required to meet OSHA standards for safe maintenance procedures. 3.08 CLEANING, START-UP,AND ADJUSTING A. The Contractors shall be responsible for proper operation of all systems, minor subsystems, and services provided under this section. He shall coordinate start-up procedures,calibration,and system checkout with all project managers.Any system operational problems shall be diagnosed;all correctional procedures shall be initiated as required to bring out the system into compliance with the design,and the problem then shall be rechecked to verify that the system operates normally. B. Thoroughly clean all parts of the installation at the completion of the work.The Contractor shall clean up and remove from the premises all refuse material, crates,and rubbish arising from his work. Remove,clean,and reinstall all filters. Belt-drive tensions and alignments shall be checked.All motors and bearings shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's service manuals prior to equipment start-up. Provide a lubrication schedule for every item of equipment furnished under this section.The schedule shall include the type of lubricant and the application frequency. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 05 00 PERMIT SET FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 7 SECTION 21 05 00 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe,fittings,valves,and connections for sprinkler,standpipe and fire hose,and combination sprinkler and standpipe systems. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 21 12 00-Standpipes and Fire Hoses:Standpipe design. B. Section 21 13 00-Fire Suppression Sprinklers:Sprinkler systems design. C. Section 22 05 53- Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Piping identification. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME(BPV IX)-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section IX-Welding and Brazing Qualifications;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2007. B. ASME B16.1 -Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings:Classes 25, 125,and 250;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2005. C. ASME B16.3-Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998(R2006). D. ASME B16.4-Gray Iron Threaded Fittings;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998(R2006). E. ASME 816.5-Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2009(ANSI/ASME B16.5). F. ASME B16.9-Factory-made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2007. G. ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings,Socket-welding and Threaded;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2009. H. ASME 816.25-Buttwelding Ends;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2007. I. ASTM A 47/A 47M-Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999 (Reapproved 2009). J. ASTM A 53/A 53M-Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc- Coated,Welded and Seamless; 2007. K. ASTM A 135/A 135M -Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Steel Pipe; 2009. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 05 00 PERMIT SET FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 7 L. ASTM A 234/A 234M-Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service;2007. M. ASTM A 795/A 795M-Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use;2008. N. AWWA C110/A21.10-American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 In.Through 48 In.(75 mm Through 1200 mm),for Water and Other Liquids;American Water Works Association; 2008. O. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; American Water Works Association; 2007(ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11). P. AWWA C151/A21.51 -Ductile-Iron Pipe,Centrifugally Cast,for Water;American Water Works Association;2009(ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51). Q. NFPA 13-Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association;2010. R. NFPA 14-Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; National Fire Protection Association;2010. S. UL(FPED)- Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;current edition. T. UL 262-Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. U. UL 312-Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used,jointing methods, supports,floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout,weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections.Shop drawings shall be minimum 36 x 24 size. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements,for additional provisions. 2. Extra Valve Stem Packings:Two for each type and size of valve. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 05 00 PERMIT SET FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 7 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Conform to UL, FM, and Warnock Hersey requirements. D. Valves: Bear UL, FM, and Warnock Hersey label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labelling in place. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13. B. Standpipe and Hose Systems: Conform to NFPA 14. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code. 2.02 BURIED PIPING A. Cast Iron Pipe:AWWA C151/A21.51. 1. Fittings:AWWA C110, standard thickness. 2. Joints:AWWA C111, rubber gasket. 3. Mechanical Couplings:Shaped composition sealing gasket,steel bolts, nuts,and washers. 2.03 ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Steel Pipe:ASTM A 795 Schedule 10,ASTM A 53 Schedule 40,ASTM A 135/A 135M Schedule 10,ASTM A 135/A 135M UL listed light wall type, or ASTM A 795 Schedule 40, black or galvanized. 1. Steel Fittings:ASME 816.9, wrought steel, buttwelded,ASME B16.5, buttweld ends, ASTM A 234/A 234M,wrought carbon steel or alloy steel,ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings, or ASME B16.11,forged steel socket welded and threaded. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 05 00 PERMIT SET FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 7 2. Cast Iron Fittings:ASME B16.1,flanges and flanged fittings and ASME B16.4, threaded fittings. 3. Malleable Iron Fittings:ASME 816.3,threaded fittings and ASTM A 47/A 47M. 4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings:Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C"shaped elastomeric sealing gasket,steel bolts, nuts,and washers;galvanized for galvanized pipe. 5. Mechanical Formed Fittings:Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop and O- ring pocked and 0-ring,uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto pipe. 2.04 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE FITTINGS A. FlexHead Industries flexible sprinkler connections. 2.05 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron or carbon steel,adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over:Carbon steel, adjustable,clevis. C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers:Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches:Cast iron hook. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over:Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp or angle ring. G. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple,floor flange,and concrete pier or steel support. H. Copper Pipe Support:Carbon steel ring, adjustable,copper plated. 2.06 GATE VALVES A. Up to and including 2 inches: 1. Bronze body,bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel,solid wedge or disc,threaded ends. B. Over 2 inches: 1. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre-grooved for mounting tamper switch, handwheel,OS&Y,solid rubber covered bronze or cast iron wedge,flanged ends. C. Over 4 inches: 1. Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with bolted bonnet,solid bronze wedge, flanged ends, iron body indicator post assembly. 2.07 GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVES A. Up to and including 2 inches: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 05 00 PERMIT SET FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 7 1. Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable rubber disc,threaded ends,with backseating capacity repackable under pressure. B. Over 2 inches: 1. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc,flanged ends, renewable seat and disc. 2.08 BALL VALVES A. Up to and including 2 inches: 1. Bronze two piece body, brass, chrome plated bronze,or stainless steel ball,teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops,threaded ends with union. B. Over 2 inches: 1. Cast steel body,chrome plated steel ball,teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle or gear drive handwheel for sizes 10 inches and over,flanged. 2.09 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Cast or Ductile Iron Body 1. Cast or ductile iron,chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat,wafer, lug,or grooved ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device,and internal tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC or external tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. 2.10 CHECK VALVES A. Up to and including 2 inches: 1. Bronze body and swing disc, rubber seat,threaded ends. B. Over 2 inches: 1. Iron body, bronze trim,swing check with rubber disc,renewable disc and seat, flanged ends with automatic ball check. C. 4 inches and Over: 1. Iron body, bronze disc,stainless steel spring, resilient seal,threaded,wafer,or flanged ends. 2.11 DRAIN VALVES A. Ball Valve: 1. Brass with cap and chain,3/4 inch hose thread. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends.Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 05 00 PERMIT SET FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 7 B. Remove scale and foreign material,from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Install standpipe piping, hangers,and supports in accordance with NFPA 14. C. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. D. Install piping to conserve building space,to not interfere with use of space and other work. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions,walls,and floors. G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints,or connected equipment. H. Inserts: 1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. 2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted,drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above 6. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide wedge anchor. I. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 2. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 3. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 4. Support vertical piping at every other floor.Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. �. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 05 00 PERMIT SET FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 7 K. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. L. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings,floors,and walls.Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. M. When installing more than one piping system material,ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. N. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to installation. P. Provide gate, ball,or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service. Q. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. R. The fire sprinkler contractor shall coordinate and provide for the location of all fire sprinkler drain piping and drain receptor piping,whether or not indicated on the contract documents.The routing of low point drains to any location where there is no drain receptor is NOT acceptable. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 12 00 PERMIT SET STANDPIPES AND FIRE HOSES MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 21 12 00 STANDPIPES AND FIRE HOSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Standpipe system. B. Fire department connection. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 21 05 00- Fire Protection Basic Materials and Methods: Fire protection piping. B. Section 21 13 00- Fire Suppression Sprinklers. C. Section 22 05 53-Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. D. Division 26: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 14-Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2010. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting:Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00.-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog sheet for equipment indicating rough-in size,finish,and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate supports,components,accessories,and sizes.Shop drawings shall be minimum 30 x 42 size. 1. Submit shop drawings and product data to Owner's insurance underwriter for approval. 2. Submit proof of approval to Architect. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components. E. Operation Data: Include manufacturer's data. F. Maintenance Data: Include servicing requirements and test schedule. G. Certificates: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of field acceptance tests. H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements,for additional provisions. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 12 00 PERMIT SET STANDPIPES AND FIRE HOSES MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 2 2. Extra Hose Nozzles:One. 3. Extra Hoses:One. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 14. Maintain one copy on site. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years experience approved by manufacturer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store products in shipping packaging until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A. Type: Free standing type with ductile iron pedestal red enamel finish. B. Outlets:Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware;threaded dust cap and chain of matching material and finish. C. Drain:3/4 inch automatic drip,connected to drain. D. Label:"Standpipe-Fire Department Connection". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Standpipes shall recessed in the wall. Fire hose cabinets shall be recessed in teh wall with connections inside the cabinet. B. Install in accordance with NFPA 14. C. Connect standpipe system to water source ahead of domestic water connection. D. Refer to Section 10 40 00 for Fire Hose Cabinets. E. Flush entire system of foreign matter. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Test entire system in accordance with NFPA 14. C. Test shall be witnessed by Fire Marshal. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 13 00 PERMIT SET FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 6 SECTION 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wet-pipe sprinkler system. B. Dry-pipe sprinkler system. C. System design, installation, and certification. D. Fire department connections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 21 05 00- Fire Protection Basic Materials and Methods: Pipe,fittings,and valves. B. Section 21 12 00-Standpipes and Fire Hoses. C. Section 22 05 53- Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. D. Division 26: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ICC-ES AC01 -Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements;2009. B. ICC-ES AC106-Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners(Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements; 2006. C. ICC-ES AC193-Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements;2010. D. ICC-ES AC308-Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2009. E. UL(FPED)- Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers,valves,and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. C. Shop Drawings: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 13 00 PERMIT SET FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 6 1. Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling installation. 2. Indicate hydraulic calculations,detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories.Indicate system controls. 3. Submit shop drawings, product data, and hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction and Fire Marshall for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect/Engineer. 4. Shop drawings shall be minimum 30 x 42 size. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations. E. Manufacturer's Certificate:Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds code requirements. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability,and location and numbers of service depot. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements,for additional provisions. 2. Extra Sprinklers:Type and size matching those installed, in quantity required by referenced NFPA design and installation standard. 3. Sprinkler Wrenches: For each sprinkler type. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of referenced design and installation standard on site. B. Conform to UL requirements. C. Designer Qualifications: Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in Oregon. D. Manufacturer Qualifications:Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. E. Installer Qualifications:Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience approved by manufacturer. F. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear UL label or marking. G. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 13 00 PERMIT SET FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for entire building. B. Occupancy: Residential.Comply with NFPA 13. C. Water Supply: Determine volume and pressure from water flow test data. 1. Revise design when test data available prior to submittals. D. Provide fire department connections where indicated, or as required by Authority Having jurisdiction. E. Storage Cabinet for Spare Sprinklers and Tools:Steel, located adjacent to alarm valve. F. Pipe Hanger Fasteners:Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners,as follows: 1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors:Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01. 3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors:Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors:Complying with ICC-ES AC106. 5. Concrete Adhesive Type Achors:Compying with ICC-ES AC308. 6. Other Types:As required. 7. Manufacturers: a. Powers Fasteners, Inc:www.powers.com. b. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2.02 SPRINKLERS A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Recessed pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate. 1. Manufacturers: a. Grinnell(GEM):www.simplexgrinnell.com. b. Reliable:www.reliablesprinkler.com. c. Victaulic:www.victaulic.com. d. Tyco:www.tyco.com. 2. Response Type:Quick or Standard. 3. Coverage Type:Standard or Extended. 4. Finish:Chrome plated. 5. Escutcheon Plate Finish:Chrome plated. 6. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or Glass bulb type,temperature rated for specific area hazard. B. Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type. 1. Manufacturers: a. Grinnell(GEM)Model"A":www.simplexgrinnell.com. b. Victaulic:www.victaulic.com. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 13 00 PERMIT SET FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 6 c. Tyco:www.tyco.com. d. Reliable:www.reliablesprinkler.com. 2. Response Type:Quick or Standard. 3. Coverage Type:Standard or Extended. 4. Finish: Brass. 5. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or Glass bulb type,temperature rated for specific area hazard. C. Sidewall Type: Recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching push on escutcheon plate. 1. Manufacturers: a. Grinnell(GEM) Model "A", Universal Sidewall:www.simplexgrinnell.com. b. Victaulic:www.victaulic.com. c. Tyco:www.tyco.com. d. Reliable:www.reliablesprinkler.com. 2. Response Type: Quick or Standard. 3. Coverage Type:Standard or Extended. 4. Finish:Chrome plated. 5. Escutcheon Plate Finish:Chrome plated. 6. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or Glass bulb type,temperature rated for specific area hazard. • D. Dry Sprinklers: Recessed pendant type with matching push on estucheon plate. 1. Manufacturers: a. Victaulic:www.victaulic.com. b. Tyco:www.tyco.com. c. Grinnell(BEW):www.simplexgrinnell.com. d. Reliable:www.reliablesprinkler.com. 2. Response Type:Quick or Standard. 3. Coverage Type:Standard or Extended. 4. Finish: Brass. 5. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brass. 6. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or Glass bulb type,temperature rated for specific area hazard. 2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to automatically actuate water motor alarm and electric alarm,with pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim;with test and drain valve. B. Dry Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve:Check type valve with divided seat ring,rubber faced clapper to automatically actuate and electric alarm,with accelerator;with test and drain valve. C. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated red enameled gong with pressure alarm switch. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 13 00 PERMIT SET FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 6 D. Water Flow Switch:Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical,with two contacts; rated 10 amp at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amp at 24 volt DC.Grinnell Model VSR-1. E. Fire Department Connections: 1. Type: Flush mounted wall type with brass finish. 2. Outlets:Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware;threaded dust cap and chain of matching material and finish. 3. Drain:3/4 inch automatic drip, outside or connected to drain. 4. Label: "Sprinkler- Fire Department Connection". F. Supervisory Switches:As manufactured by Grinnell OSYSU-1 or OSYSU-2, Potter-Roemer Figure 6220,or approved equal. 2.04 AIR COMPRESSOR A. Compressor:Single unit,electric motor driven, motor, motor starter,safety valves,check valves,air maintenance device incorporating electric pressure switch and unloader valve. B. Electrical Characteristics: 1. Horsepower: Refer to Division 26. 2. 60 Hz. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard. B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions,or adjacent siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. D. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall. E. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. F. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. G. Center sprinklers in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable,dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements. H. Provide oversize escutcheons on all sprinklers to allow for seismic movement. I. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. j. Hydrostatically test entire system. K. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshal and Architect/Engineer. 3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 21 13 00 PERMIT SET FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 6 3.03 START-UP AND TESTING A. Starting Procedures:Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If no procedures are prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows: 1. Verify that specialty valves,trim,fittings,controls,and accessories have been installed correctly and operate correctly. 2. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete. 3. Check that damaged sprinkler and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified have been replaced with new,correct type of sprinklers. 4. Check that sprinklers are correct type, have correct finish and temperature ratings, and have guards where required for applications. 5. Check that potable water supplies have correct type of backflow preventer. 6. Check that hose valves and fire department connections have threads compatible with local fire department equipment and have correct pressure rating. 7. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler systems with water. 8. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 9. Adjust operating controls and pressure settings. 3.04 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment,specialties,and accessories.Review operating and maintenance information. B. Schedule demonstration with at least 7 days advance notice. END OF SECTION AM-3533 Division 2z ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 10 SECTION 22 00 00 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for all Contractor installed equipment. It applies to all sections included in Division 22.The requirements herein are an expansion upon the requirements of Division 1. B. Provide all materials, labor and equipment required to install complete and fully operational plumbing systems as indicated by the contract drawings and this specification. C. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses,fees and taxes applicable to this project as required by law. D. Cooperate with other trades in furnishing material and information required for installation and operation of mechanical items. E. Requirements for the following are included: 1. Related work(other Contract Documents and specification sections)that must be combined with the requirements of this Section. 2. Design performance. 3. Delivery,storage, and handling. 4. Quality assurance and standards. 5. Submittals. 6. Product quality, basic type,and finishes. 7. Equipment identification. 8. Design criteria. 9. Excavation and backfill. 10. Installation. 11. Mounting and shimming. 12. Inspection. 13. Safety considerations. 14. Cleaning,startup,and adjustments. F. All plumbing design drawings are to be Revit based. G. Design documents and calculations shall be stamped and signed by a mechanical engineer registered in the State of Oregon. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. This general section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for the project equipment and systems: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 10 1. Division 1 sections included in this Project specifications. 2. The Contract. 3. General and specific mechanical specifications and drawings included in the project. 4. Section 07 90 05-Joint Sealers. 5. Section 22 05 53- Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. "Indicated": Refers to graphic representations, notes or schedules in the Drawings;or to other paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. 1. Terms such as"shown","noted","scheduled",and"specified",are used to notify or help the user to locate reference. Location is not limited. B. "Directed":Terms such as"directed", Requested","authorized","selected","approved", "required",and"permitted"mean directed by Architect/Engineer,approved by Architect/Engineer and similar phrases. C. "Approved":When used in conjunction with Architect/Engineer's action on contract submittals, applications, requests, is limited to Architect/Engineer's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. D. "Regulations": Includes laws, ordinances, statutes and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction,as well as rules,conventions and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of Work. E. "Furnish": Means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations. F. "Install": Describes operations at Project site including actual unloading,temporary storage, unpacking,assembling, erecting, placing,anchoring,supporting, isolating, applying,working to dimension,finishing,curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations. G. "Provide": Means to furnish and install. H. "Installer":A contractor,or another entity engaged by the contractor,either as an employee, subcontractor,or contractor of a lower tier,to perform a particular construction activity including installation,erection,application or similar operations. 1. Installers are required to be experienced in operations they are engaged to perform. 2. The term"experience"means having successfully completed a minimum of three previous projects similar in scope and size to this Project and within the time frame indicated in the"Quality Assurance"section of the Specifications. In addition, in means being familiar with special requirements indicated and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 10 I. "Project Site": Is defined as the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of Project. 1.04 DESIGN PERFORMANCE A. Compliance by the Contractor and/or Vendor with the provisions of this Specification does not relieve him of the responsibilities of furnishing equipment and materials of proper design, mechanically suited to meet operating guarantees at the specified service conditions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:Submit five complete sets of manufacturer's product data in a three ring binder for approval. Literature submitted shall clearly indicate the model number, capacity, rated operating conditions, noise levels,size,weight, support requirements, rough-in data and dimensions,electrical power requirements,wiring diagrams, utility (fuel,air, cooling water, etc.)requirements,and options furnished.Submittals shall include, but are not necessarily limited to the following; 1. Plumbing: Piping and insulation; Plumbing fixtures, including trim; insulation; valves; hangers and supports; isolators;water heaters; and the like. 2. Calculations: Provide for sizing of thermal expansion and seismic restraints;and all other calculations consistent with good engineering practice. Include design criteria used and assumptions made. B. Operation and Maintenance Data:Submit three complete sets of manufacturer's literature bound in a three ring binder for approval. Data shall include installation,start- up,and maintenance instructions, parts lists,and wiring diagrams. C. Substitutions:System design was based upon the equipment and materials listed on the drawings and specifications herein.At contractor's option,another manufacturer's equipment of similar quality,capacity and features may be submitted for prior approval per Section 01 60 00. Prior permission to substitute does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of including this information in the bound submittal packages. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards:Comply with the provisions of the following codes,standards and specifications,except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. State of Oregon"IBC" 2. State of Oregon "IMC" 3. State of Oregon "UPC" 4. State of Oregon"IFC" 5. ANSI/ASHRAE 90-"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings....' 6. ANSI/ASHRAE 62-"Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality." 7. NEBB-"Procedural Standard for Testing,Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems." AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 10 8. ANSI 831.9"Building Service Piping". 9. SMACNA-"HVAC Duct Construction Standards". 10. NFPA-Sections 13, 54 and 90B. B. Drawings:All drawings are diagrammatic and show general design,arrangement,and extent of the systems. Do not scale drawings for rough-in dimensions, nor use as shop drawings. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work required with a minimum of five years documented experience. D. Contractor shall furnish and install all work in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and instructions. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Delivery: Deliver to site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Preparation for shipment: 1. Each unit shall be suitably prepared for the shipment specified and for storage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in a manner requiring no disassembly prior to operation. 2. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of the Preparation for Shipment provisions employed with respect to materials and application. 3. One complete set of Installations,Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be packed and shipped with the equipment.This set is in addition to the sets that are to be sent directly to the Owner. C. Handling:Avoid damage. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction requirements for rigging, unloading and transporting units. D. Storage: Inside protected from weather, dirt and construction dust.Where necessary to store outside,elevate well above grade and enclose with durable,waterproof wrapping. Cap all pipe ends.Taping pipe ends is not adequate or allowable. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the work and provide products with the proper power characteristics and similar adaptations for the project. B. Arrangement:Arrange piping parallel with primary lines of the building construction and with a minimum 7 feet overhead clearance in unfinished equipment rooms where possible.Conceal all piping and ductwork where possible unless indicated otherwise. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access for operation and maintenance. Give right-of-way to piping which must be sloped for drainage. Set all equipment level or as recommended by manufacturer. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 10 C. Coordination:Where several elements of the work must be sequenced and positioned in order to fit the available space, prepare shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions(at accurate scale)required for installation and submit prior to purchase/fabrication/installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination. 1.09 STANDARDS A. General: Provide all new materials and equipment, identical to apparatus or equipment in successful operation for a minimum of five years. Provide materials of comparable quality omitted here but necessary to complete the work. Maximum allowable variation from stated capacities, minus 5%to plus 10%as approved in each case. B. Governing Standards:The following are typical standards generally referenced in these specifications and identified by their acronym. Federal Specifications(FS),American Society for Testing Materials(ASTM),American National Standards Institute(ANSI), Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry,Standard Practice(MSS SP-69), Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute(CISPI), Underwriters Laboratory(UL) numbers are given. 1.10 WARRANTIES A. Contractor shall provide a 1 year warranty on all equipment, materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of owner's acceptance. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide two sets of faucet service kits. PART 2 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION A. Site Examination: Before starting work, carefully examine site and all Contract Drawings. Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project.Verify all indicated elevations, building measurements, rough-in dimensions and equipment locations before proceeding with any work. B. Utility Locations:The location of all utilities,wires, conduits, pipes,ducts,or other service facilities are shown in a general way only on the drawings and in some instances are taken from existing drawings.Ascertain whether any additional facilities other than those shown on the plans may be present and determine the exact location and elevations of all utilities prior to commencing installation. C. Discrepancies:Any error, conflict or discrepancy in Drawings,Specifications and/or existing conditions shall be reported immediately. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made.Should rearrangement or re- routing of piping or ductwork be necessary, provide for approval the simplest layout possible for that particular portion of the work.Under no circumstances shall beams, AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 10 girders,footings or columns be cut for mechanical items.Casting of pipes into concrete is prohibited unless so shown on Drawings. D. The Contractor shall cooperate with others to avoid interferences and delays in the construction work. E. Interference as a result of poor coordination or lack of cooperation with other trades shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. 3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1. B. Protection: During cutting and patching, protect adjacent installations. Provide temporary barriers to prevent the spread of dust and dirt outside of the immediate work area. C. Repair: Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials to match the existing. D. Inspection: Upon written direction from the Architect, uncover and restore work to provide for observation of concealed work. 3.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation:Section 31 23 16. B. Fill:Section 31 23 23. C. General: Perform all necessary excavation and backfill required for the installation of mechanical work.Any piping or other work damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. D. Water: Keep all excavations free of standing water. Excavations damaged or softened by water or frost shall be re-excavated and filled back to original level with approved material at the Contractor's expense. E. Test: During the progress of the work for compacted fill,the Owner reserves the right to request compaction tests made under the direction of a testing laboratory. F. Trench Excavation: Excavate trenches to the necessary depth and width,removing rocks, unstable soil(silt, peat,etc.)roots and stumps.Width of trench shall be adequate for proper installation of piping or conduit. G. Foundation and Bedding: 1. Proper preparation of foundation, placement of foundation material where required,and placement of bedding material shall precede the installation of the pipe.This shall include leveling of the trench bottom as well as placement and compaction of required bedding material to a uniform grade so that piping rests upon a continuous and uniform bedding. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 10 2. Where excavation has been made below the required grade,the Contractor shall provide, place and compact suitable bedding material to restore the proper grade elevation. H. Backfilling: Upon acceptance of installed piping systems,trenches shall be backfilled in lifts. Backfill material shall be placed and compacted in lifts not to exceed 6 inches in depth to a height of 1 inch above the top of trench. Backfill shall be placed to obtain contact with the entire periphery of the pipe without disturbing pipe placement. I. Compaction:One of the following methods or combination thereof shall be required; 1) Mechanical Tamper or Vibratory Compactor. Compaction shall be sufficient to attain 95% of maximum density at optimum moisture content.Water"puddling"or"washing"is prohibited. J. Bedding/Backfill Material:Where native material has been removed, necessary foundation material consisting of 3/4 inch minus crushed rock or fill sand shall be placed and compacted to form a firm base of the required thickness. Backfill material shall be the same. Follow the pipe manufacturer's installation instructions when specified materials are specifically prohibited. 3.04 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL A. All removed equipment is the property of the Contractor unless indicated otherwise. Disconnect and remove all such equipment from the property. Cap all piping in walls, below floors,and/or above ceilings in finished rooms. B. Where equipment is to be reused, reconnect piping,wiring and/or controls to allow this equipment to function as it had prior to this renovation unless indicated otherwise. 3.05 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING A. Provide all motor starters, control devices,and wiring complete from power source indicated on Drawings. B. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and/or specifications,are based upon requirements of specific manufacturers which are intended as somewhat typical of several makes which may be approved. Provide all field wiring and/or devices necessary for a complete and operable system controls for the actual selected equipment/system. 3.06 INSTALLATION A. Locating and Positioning Equipment:Observe all Codes and Regulations and good common practice in locating and installing mechanical equipment and material so that completed installation presents the least possible hazard.Maintain recommended clearances for repair and service to all equipment. B. Anchorage:Anchor and/or brace all mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork to resist displacement due to seismic action, include snubbers on equipment mounted on spring isolators. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 10 C. Where mounting heights or locations are not identified, install systems,equipment and materials to provide maximum headroom. D. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves,fittings,damper actuators,etc.on pipe and duct systems. E. Install systems,materials and equipment giving right of way to systems required to be installed at a specific slope or operation by gravity. F. Provide condensate drain piping to over nearest floor drain for all coils,furnaces, boilers, domestic water heaters and the likes. G. Flush clean and disinfect domestic water system. H. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with stops, reducers,and escutcheons. I. Installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the equipment manufacturer, including special requirements for seismic restraints. J. Equipment Manufacturer's Responsibility and Services: 1. A manufacturer's representative for major equipment and operating systems shall be provided as necessary to assist the Contractor during installation,and to provide written certification that the equipment has been installed as specified and in accordance with the manufacturer's representative. 2. The manufacturer's representative shall provide the initial startup of equipment in the presence of the Owner. a. Provide a pre-start check of all piping,valves,control devices,control panels,and equipment. b. Calibrate and adjust equipment and controls for operation at the specified design and conditions. c. Provide a record of all startup events noting problems and their resolution. d. Provide a record of all set points for operational controls and devices. 3. Upon the completion of the equipment startup, provide instructional time with the Owner's personnel to review the operations and maintenance manuals and perform each step necessary for startup,shutdown,troubleshooting,and routine maintenance.The instructional time shall be scheduled through the Owner. 4. Upon completion of the inspections,startup,testing, and checkout procedures,the equipment manufacturer shall submit written notice to the Owner that the units are ready for use by the Owner. Provide a certificate of calibration for all equipment. 3.07 MOUNTING AND SHIMMING A. Mount equipment as shown on the Drawings. B. Level the equipment by means of 304 stainless steel wedges(stainless steel plates and stainless steel shims)or PVC/poly wedges in areas of extreme corrosive environments. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF 10 Wedge taper shall not be greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level bearing surface for the equipment. Secure each pair of wedges in their final positions with one tack weld on each side after leveling is complete.Wedging shall be executed in a manner that will prevent a change in level or springing of the Baseplate when the anchor bolts are tightened. 1. Adjust rotating equipment assemblies such that the driving units are properly aligned, plumb and level with the driven units and all interconnecting shafts and couplings. 2. All rotating equipment shall be checked for proper alignment with dial indicators or laser after completion of grouting.The alignment must be within the tolerances required by the equipment manufacturer.The final alignment check shall be witnessed by the Owner. 3.08 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall inspect his work to ensure the installation and workmanship is in accordance with these specifications and acceptable industry standards for the work being done. B. All materials,equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to inspection at any time by the Owner.Contractor shall correct any work, materials, or equipment not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.09 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS A. All equipment shall be installed with suitable access clearances that satisfy OSHA and code requirements for maintenance or removal of replaceable parts and components, and with necessary inions or flanges to perform the maintenance or removal without removing the connecting appurtenances. B. Where equipment requiring periodic maintenance cannot be reached by normal walkways because of interference with ductwork, piping, or other obstructions the Contractor shall notify the Owner and propose an alternate safe means of access.These may include construction of an overhead platform with stairway or ladder ends and safety railings or handholds,or walk-through duct plenums with hinged access doors,or as required to meet OSHA standards for safe maintenance procedures. 3.10 CLEANING,START-UP,AND ADJUSTING A. The Contractors shall be responsible for proper operation of all systems, minor subsystems,and services provided under this section, He shall coordinate start-up procedures, calibration, and system checkout with all project managers.Any system operational problems shall be diagnosed; all correctional procedures shall be initiated as required to bring out the system into compliance with the design,and the problem then shall be rechecked to verify that the system operates normally. B. Thoroughly clean all parts of the installation at the completion of the work.The Contractor shall clean up and remove from the premises all refuse material, crates,and AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 PAGE 10 OF 10 rubbish arising from his work. Remove, clean,and reinstall all filters. Belt-drive tensions and alignments shall be checked.All motors and bearings shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's service manuals prior to equipment start-up. Provide a lubrication schedule for every item of equipment furnished under this section.The schedule shall include the type of lubricant and the application frequency. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 05 19 PERMIT SET METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 4 SECTION 22 0519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL • 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps. B. Thermometers and thermometer wells. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 10 05-Plumbing Piping. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME B40.100-Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2005. B. ASTM El -Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers;2007. C. AWWA M6-Water Meters--Selection, Installation,Testing,and Maintenance;American Water Works Association; 1999. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data:Provide list that indicates use,operating range,total range and location for manufactured components. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation. D. Operation and Maintenance Data:Section 01 70 00. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.for additional provisions. 2. Supply two bottles of red gage oil for static pressure gages. 3. Supply two pressure gages with pulsation damper and two dial thermometers. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in,taps,supports and test plugs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRESSURE GAGES A. Manufacturers: 1. Weksler; Model 401:www.weksler-gauges.com. 2. Trerice; Model 700 Series:www.trerice.com. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 05 19 PERMIT SET METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 4 3. Ametek(U.S.Gauge); Model Series 540:www.ametekusg.com. 4. Other approved manufacturers:Ashcroft, Marshalltown,Weiss. 5. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Pressure Gages:ASME 640.100,drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket,with front recalibration adjustment, black scale on white background. 1. Case:Steel with brass bourdon tube. 2. Size:4-1/2 inch diameter. 3. Mid-Scale Accuracy:One percent. 4. Scale: Psi and KPa. 2.02 PRESSURE GAGE TAPPINGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Weksler:www.weksler-gauges.com. 2. Trerice:www.trerice.com. 3. Ametek(U.S. Gauge):www.ametekusg.com. 4. Other approved manufacturers:Ashcroft, Marshalltown,Weiss. 5. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Gage Cock:Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 150 psi. C. Ball Valve: Brass 1/4 inch NPT cock,for 200 psi. Lever handle. 1. Product:Al 2 manufactured by Weksler, or approved equal. D. Needle Valve: Brass, 1/4 inch NPT for minimum 300 psi. 1. Product: BBV4 manufactured by Weksler,or approved equal. E. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch NPT connections. 1. Product:WG41/WG42 manufactured by Weksler,or approved equal. F. Syphon:Steel, Schedule 40, 1/4 inch NPT angle or straight pattern. 1. Product:A031 manufactured by Weksler,or approved equal. 2.03 DIAL THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp; Model 5AA:www.wekslerglass.com. 2. Trerice; Model B8560:www.trerice.com. 3. Ametek(U.S.Gauge); Model Series 6000:www.ametekusg.com. 4. Other approved manufacturers:Ashcroft,Marshalltown,Weiss. 5. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Thermometers-Adjustable Angle: Dial type bimetallic actuated;ASTM El;stainless steel case,adjustable angle with front recalibration,silicone fluid damping,white with black markings and black pointer, hermetically sealed lens,stainless steel stem. 1. Size: 5 inch diameter dial. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 05 19 PERMIT SET METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 4 2. Lens:Clear glass,fully gasketed. 3. Accuracy:1 percent. 4. Calibration: Degrees F and Degrees C. 2.04 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required,and with cap and chain. B. Flange:3 inch outside diameter reversible flange,designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts,with brass perforated stem. 2.05 TEST PLUGS A. Test Plug: 1/4 inch or 1/2 inch brass or stainless steel fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F. B. Test Plug: 1/4 inch or 1/2 inch brass or stainless steel fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with Nordel core for temperatures up to 350 degrees F. C. Test Plug: 1/4 inch or 1/2 inch brass or stainless steel fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with Viton core for temperatures up to 400 degrees F. D. Test Kit:Carrying case,internally padded and fitted containing two 3-1/2 inch diameter pressure gages,two gage adapters with 1/8 inch probes,two 1 inch dial thermometers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install positive displacement meters with isolating valves on inlet and outlet to AWWA M6. Provide full line size valved bypass with globe valve for liquid service meters. C. Provide one pressure gage per pump,installing taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump. Pipe to gage. D. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide ball valve or needle valve to isolate each gage. Extend nipples to allow clearance from insulation. E. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inch for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from insulation. F. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments. G. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 05 19 PERMIT SET METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 4 H. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical. I. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses,and calibrate to zero. J. Locate test plugs adjacent to pressure gages and pressure gage taps. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 05 49 PERMIT SET PLUMBING SEISMIC RESTRAINT MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 5 SECTION 22 05 49 PLUMBING SEISMIC RESTRAINT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Seismic restraint of equipment and piping. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 00 00- Basic Plumbing Requirements. B. Section 22 07 19- Plumbing Piping Insulation. C. Section 22 10 05- Plumbing Piping. D. Section 22 30 00- Plumbing Equipment. E. Section 22 40 00- Plumbing Fixtures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Seismic Restraints: 1. The Anchorage and/or seismic restraint of permanent equipment and associated systems listed below shall be designed to resist the total design seismic forces prescribed in the latest edition of the International Building Code. a. All floor or roof-mounted equipment weighing 400 lbs or greater. b. All suspended or wall-mounted equipment weighing 20 lbs or greater. c. All vibration-isolated equipment weighing 20 lbs or greater. d. All gas piping systems throughout the building. e. All piping 1 1/4 inches nominal diameter and larger located in boiler, mechanical equipment and refrigeration mechanical rooms. f. All piping 21/2 inches nominal diameter and larger. g. Pipes,electrical conduit and ducts supported by a trapeze where none of those elements would individually require bracing, require bracing when the combined operating weight of all elements supported by the trapeze is 10 lbs/ft or greater. B. All calculations shall be in accordance with Chapter 16 of the latest edition of the International Building Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00: 1. All anchorage and seismic restraints shall be designed and stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the state of the project location. Design shall include: a. Number,size and location of anchors for floor or roof-mounted equipment. For curb-mounted equipment,provide design of attachment of both the AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 05 49 PERMIT SET PLUMBING SEISMIC RESTRAINT MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 5 unit to the curb and the curb to the structure. In addition, provide calculations or test data verifying the curb can accept the seismic loads. b. Number,size and location of seismic restraint devices and anchors for vibration-isolated and suspended equipment. Provide calculations or test data verifying the horizontal and vertical ratings of the seismic restraint devices. c. Number,size and location of braces and anchors for suspended piping and ductwork on shop drawings. In addition: 1) The contractor must select a single seismic restraint system pre- designed to meet the requirements of the latest edition of the International Building Code such as the 1999 Mason Industries Seismic Restraint Guidelines for Suspended Piping, Ductwork and Electrical Systems. 2) Details or designs from separate seismic restraint guidelines are not acceptable. Installations not addressed by the selected system must be designed, detailed and submitted along with the shop drawings. 3) Maximum seismic loads shall be indicated on drawings at each brace location. Drawings shall bear the stamp and signature of the registered professional engineer licensed in the state of the project location who designed the layout of the braces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Amber Booth. B. Mason Industries, Inc. C. Kinetics Corporation. D. Vibrex. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.02 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. General Requirements: 1. Seismic restraints shall be provided for all equipment, both supported and suspended, piping and ductwork as listed above. 2. Bracing of piping and ductwork shall be in accordance with provisions set forth in SMACNA seismic restraint manual. 3. Structural requirements for restraints,including their attachment to building structure,shall be reviewed and approved by the structural engineer. 4. Attachments to supported or suspended equipment must be coordinated with the equipment manufacturer. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 05 49 PERMIT SET PLUMBING SEISMIC RESTRAINT MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 5 B. Supported Equipment Products: 1. Seismic restraints shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by shock absorbent neoprene materials compounded to bridge bearing specifications as previously noted in paragraph 1.03. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and be a minimum 3/4-inch thick.Snubbers shall be manufactured with an air gap between hard and resilient material of not less than 1/8-inch, nor more than 1/4- inch.Type 1 -Seismic Snubbers:All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene. Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1/4 inch thick.A minimum air gap of 1/8 inch shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable to allow inspection of internal clearances. The snubber shall be designed to accept horizontal and vertical seismic loads as defined in Section 1.03.B. Mason Type Z-1225 or Z-1011. 2. Each snubber shall be capable of restraint in all three mutually orthogonal directions.Type 2-Seismic Sway Braces-Seismic sway braces shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables or steel angles/channels. Cables braces shall be designed to resist seismic tension loads and steel braces shall be designed to resist both tension and compression loads with a minimum safety factor of 2. Brace end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle. Do not mix cable and steel braces to brace the same system or equipment.Steel angles,when required,shall be clamped to the threaded hanger rods at the seismic sway brace locations utilizing a minimum of two ductile iron clamps.Sway braces shall be designed to accept horizontal and vertical seismic loads as defined in Section 1.03.B. Mason Type SCB,SSB,SRC and UC. 3. Submittals shall include load versus deflection curves up to 1/2-inch on the x,y and z planes. 4. Mason Model Z-1011 C. Bracing of Pipes: 1. Provide seismic bracing of all piping as detailed below.(Exception: Piping suspended by individual hangers 12 inches or less in length,as measured from the top of the pipe to the bottom of the support where the hanger is attached, need not be braced). a. Brace all gas piping. b. Brace all piping located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment rooms,and refrigeration mechanical rooms that is 1-1/4-inch nominal diameter and larger. c. Brace all pipes 2-1/2-inch nominal diameter and larger. 2. For all gas piping,as specified in 1(a)the bracing details,schedules, and notes may be used,except that transverse bracing shall be at 20 feet maximum,and longitudinal bracing shall be at 40 feet maximum. 3. Seismic braces for pipes on trapeze hangers may be used. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 05 49 PERMIT SET PLUMBING SEISMIC RESTRAINT MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 5 4. Provide flexibility in joints where pipes pass through building seismic joints or expansion joints or where rigidly supported pipes connect to equipment with vibration isolators. For threaded piping,the flexibility may be provided by the installation of swing joints. 5. Cast iron pipe of all types,glass pipe,and any other pipe jointed with a shield and clamp assembly,where the top of the pipe is 12 inches or more from the supporting structure,shall be braced on each side of a change in direction of 90 degrees or more. Riser joints shall be braced or stabilized between floors. 6. Vertical risers shall be laterally supported with a riser clamp at each floor.For buildings greater than six stories high,all risers shall be engineered individually. D. Suspended Equipment and Piping: 1. Cable Method:The seismic restraint shall consist of a combination of stranded steel aircraft cable and the specified vibration isolation hanger with an added nut and neoprene and steelwasher.The cable resists lateral and downward motion. The modified vibration hanger resists upward motion. 2. Cable attachment details, cable size,and the neoprene and steel washers shall be sized by the manufacturer and are to be indicated in the Shop Drawings. 3. Provide detailed Shop Drawings for approval in sufficient time to allow structural attachment work to be incorporated into the normal work sequence. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. General: 1. Install and adjust seismic restraints so that the equipment, piping,and ductwork supports are not degraded by the restraints. 2. Restraints must not short circuit vibration isolation systems or transmit objectionable vibration or noise. B. Supported Equipment: 1. Each vibration isolation frame for supported equipment shall have a minimum of four seismic snubbers mounted as close as possible to the vibration isolators and/or the frame extremities. 2. Care must be taken so that a minimum 1/8-inch air gap in the seismic restraint snubber is preserved on all sides in order that the vibration isolation potential of the isolator is not compromised.This requires that the final snubber adjustment be completed after the vibration isolators are properly installed and the installation approved. C. Bracing of Pipes: 1. Branch lines may not be used to brace main lines. 2. Transverse bracing shall be at 40 feet maximum except where a lesser spacing is indicated in the SMACNA tables for bracing of pipes. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 05 49 PERMIT SET PLUMBING SEISMIC RESTRAINT MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 5 3. Longitudinal bracing shall be at 80 feet maximum except where a lesser spacing is indicated in the tables.In pipes where thermal expansion is a consideration,an anchor point may be used as the specified longitudinal brace provided that it has a capacity equal to or greater than a longitudinal brace.The longitudinal braces and connections must be capable of resisting the additional force induced by expansion and contraction. 4. A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of the building or to two dissimilar building systems that may respond differently during an earthquake. 5. Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as longitudinal bracing for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the bracing is installed within 24 inches of the elbow or tee. D. Suspended Equipment and Piping Cable Method: 1. Cables shall be adjusted to a degree of slackness approved by the Structural Engineer. 2. Uplift and downward restraint nuts and washers for the Type HST hangers shall be adjusted so that there is a minimum 1/4-inch clearance. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 05 53 PERMIT SET IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Pipe Markers. D. Lockout devices. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 90 00- Painting and Coating:Identification painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A13.1 -Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2007. B. ASTM D709-Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001 (Reapproved 2007). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements;for submittal procedures. B. List:Submit list of wording,symbols, letter size,and color coding for mechanical identification. C. Chart and Schedule:Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location,function,and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:Indicate special procedures,and installation. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Brady Corporation:www.bradycorp.com. B. Safety Sign Company:www.safetysignco.com. C. Seton Identification Products:www.seton.com/aec. D. Substitutions:Not permitted. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 05 53 PERMIT SET IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 3 2.02 NAMEPLATES A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: Black. 2. Letter Height:1/2 inch. 3. Background Color:Yellow. 4. Plastic:Conform to ASTM D709. 2.03 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color.Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters;tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. C. Valve Tag Chart:Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame. 2.04 PIPE MARKERS A. Comply with ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated,flexible,semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible,vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 2.05 LOCKOUT DEVICES A. Lockout Hasps: 1. Manufacturers: a. Anodized aluminum or reinforced nylon hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches. B. Valve Lockout Devices: 1. Steel device preventing access to valve operator, accepting lock shackle. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 05 53 PERMIT SET IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 3 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners,or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00. D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade,directly above buried pipe. G. Identify pumps, heat transfer equipment,tanks,and water treatment devices with 8 x 4 inch plastic nameplates or 2 inch stencil painting.Small devices,such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags. H. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. I. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. J. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags. K. Identify piping,concealed or exposed,with plastic pipe markers or stencilled painting. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service,flow direction,and pressure.Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops,adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure,and at each obstruction. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 07 19 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 5 SECTION 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00- Firestopping. B. Section 09 90 00- Painting and Coating: Painting insulation jacket. C. Section 2210 05- Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C177-Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2010. B. ASTM C195-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007. C. ASTM C449-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement;2007. D. ASTM C534/C534M-Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form;2008. E. ASTM C547-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2007e1. F. ASTM C795-Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel;2008. G. ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010b. H. ASTM E96/E96M-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description,thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service,and locations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 07 19 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 5 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications:Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications:Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.02 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Insulation; Model "Pipe Insulation ASJ-SSL":www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation; Model"Micro-Lok":www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp:www.owenscorning.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation:www.certainteed.com. 5. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Insulation:ASTM C547; rigid molded,noncombustible. 1. 'K'value:ASTM C177,0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption:0.2 percent by volume. C. Insulation:ASTM C547;semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1. 'K'value:ASTM C177,0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature:650 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption:0.2 percent by volume. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket:White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches. E. Tie Wire:0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 07 19 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 5 1. Compatible with insulation. G. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. H. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Cloth: Untreated;9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic,compatible with insulation, black color. I. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic,compatible with insulation,black color. J. Outdoor Breather Mastic: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic,compatible with insulation, black color. K. Insulating Cement: 1. ASTM C449/C449M. 2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Manufacturer: 1. Armacell International; Model "Armaflex II":www.armacell.com. 2. Halstead; Model"Insul-Tube". 3. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534 Grade 1; use molded tubular material wherever possible. 1. Minimum Service Temperature:-40 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature:220 degrees F. 3. Connection:Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. 2.04 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic. 1. Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville Corporation; Model"Zeston 2000":www.jm.com. b. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature:0 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c. Moisture Vapor Permeability:0.002 perm inch, maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. d. Thickness:20 mil. e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. 3. Covering Adhesive Mastic: a. Compatible with insulation. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 07 19 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry,with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings,valves,unions,flanges,strainers,flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets,factory-applied or field-applied.Secure with self- sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive.Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings,joints,and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less,do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment,but bevel and seal ends of insulation. G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets,with or without vapor barrier,factory-applied or field- applied.Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive.Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings,joints,and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. H. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields:Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long,of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers,and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions,and interruptions.At fire separations,refer to Section 07 84 00. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 07 19 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 5 J. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces(less than 10 feet above finished floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply: a. Glass Fiber,Rigid, Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range:Under 2 inch. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 3) Pipe Size Range:Over 2 inch. 4) Thickness: 1-1/2 inch. 2. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation: a. Glass Fiber, Rigid, Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range:All sizes. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Domestic Cold Water: a. Glass Fiber, Rigid, Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range:1 inch and under. 2) Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3) Pipe Size Range:Over 1 inch. 4) Thickness: 1 inch. 4. Roof Drain Bodies: Flexible Duct Wrap with multi-purpose,foil-scrim-kraft jacket. Use tie-wire to secure in place. Minimum thickness: 1 inch. 5. Roof Drainage Within 10 Feet of the Exterior: a. Glass Fiber, Rigid, Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range:All sizes. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 6. Roof Drainage Run Horizontal at Roof Level: a. Glass Fiber, Rigid, Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range:All sizes. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 15 SECTION 22 10 05 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings,valves,and connections for piping systems. 1. Sanitary sewer. 2. Domestic water. 3. Storm water. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 31 00-Access Doors and Panels. B. Section 22 05 16-Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping. C. Section 22 05 49- Plumbing Seismic Restraint. D. Section 22 05 53- Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. E. Section 22 0719-Plumbing Piping Insulation. F. Division 26- Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z21.22-American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems; 1999,and addenda A&B(R2004). B. ASME B16.18-Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2001 (R2005)(ANSI B16.18). C. ASME 816.22-Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005). D. ASME B31.9- Building Services Piping;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008(ANSI/ASME B31.9). E. ASME(BPV IV)-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section IV- Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. F. ASME(BPV IX)-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section IX-Welding and Brazing Qualifications;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. G. ASTM B32-Standard Specification for Solder Metal;2008. H. ASTM B42-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2002. I. ASTM B88-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 15 J. ASTM D2564-Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2004(Reapproved 2009). K. ASTM D2665-Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Drain,Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2009. L. ASTM D2729-Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Sewer Pipe and Fittings;2003. M. ASTM D2855-Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Pipe and Fittings; 1996(Reapproved 2002). N. ASTM D3034-Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Sewer Pipe and Fittings;2008. O. AWS A5.8/A5.8M -Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding;American Welding Society;2004 and errata. P. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains;American Water Works Association;2005 (ANSI/AWWA C651). Q. CISPI 301 -Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute;2005. R. CISPI 310-Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,Waste,and Vent Piping Applications;Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2004 S. ICC-ES AC01 -Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements;2009. T. ICC-ES AC106-Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners(Screw Anchors)in Masonry Elements;2006. U. ICC-ES AC193-Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements;2010. V. MSS SP-71 -Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry,Inc.; 2005. W. MSS SP-80- Bronze Gate, Globe,Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2008. X. MSS SP-85-Cast Iron Globe&Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.;2002. Y. MSS SP-89- Pipe Hangers and Supports- Fabrication and Installation Practices; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.;2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 15 B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials,pipe fittings,valves,and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with all applicable local codes and standards. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME(BPV IX). D. Identify pipe with marking including size,ASTM material classification,ASTM specification, water pressure rating. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable plumbing code. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers,completing sections of the work,and isolating parts of completed system.Store pipe on sleepers,a minimum of 4 inches above surrounding grade,at all times. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe:CISPI 301, hubless. 1. Fittings:Cast iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies. Mission Heavyweight, Husky 4000, Clamp-All 120 system, or approved. B. PVC Pipe:ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints:Solvent welded,with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe:CISPI 301, hubless,service weight. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 15 1. Fittings:Cast iron. 2. Joints:CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. B. PVC Pipe:ASTM D2729. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints:Solvent welded,with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.03 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Pipe:ASTM B 88,Type K annealed. 1. Fittings:ASME B16.18,cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints:AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze. B. PEX Tube:ASTM F 876,SDR 9. 1. Fittings:ASTM F 877, brass insert type with metal bands or brass or plastic compression type matching tube dimensions. 2. Manifold:ASTM F 877, multi-outlet,corrosion resistant metal assembly with corrosion resistant metal valve for each outlet. 2.04 WATER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tube:ASTM B88(ASTM B88M),Type L(B), Drawn(H). 1. Fittings:ASME B16.18,cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22,wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints:ASTM B32,alloy Sn95 solder. B. PEX Tube:ASTM F 876,SDR 9. 1. Fittings:ASTM F 877, brass insert type with metal bands or brass or plastic compression type matching tube dimensions. 2. Manifold:ASTM F 877, multi-outlet,corrosion resistant metal assembly with corrosion resistant metal valve for each outlet. C. Stainless Steel Piping: 1. Viega ProPress, 316 stainless steel,fittings conforming to ASTM B88 and ANSI 816.22. 2.05 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless,service weight. 1. Fittings:Cast iron. 2. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. Mission Heavyweight, Husky 4000, Clamp-All 120 system,or approved. 2.06 STORM WATER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless,service weight. 1. Fittings:Cast iron. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 15 2. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. B. PVC Pipe:ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints:Solvent welded,with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.07 FLANGES, UNIONS,AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe:Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: 1. Ferrous pipe:Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges;preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric Connections: Bronze threaded nipple, minimum 3 inches long,with impervious isolation liner.Victaulic"Clearflow". 2.08 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Tolco Inc. 2. Anvil. 3. Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite. 4. Michigan Hanger Company, Inc. 5. PHD Manufacturing Co. 6. Superstrut. 7. Unistrut. 8. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Plumbing Piping-Drain,Waste,and Vent: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron,adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over:Carbon steel,adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers:Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches:Cast iron hook. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over:Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical Support:Steel riser clamp. 8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple,floor flange,and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Copper Pipe Support:Carbon steel ring,adjustable, copper plated. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 15 C. Plumbing Piping-Water: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over:Carbon steel,adjustable,clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches:Carbon steel,adjustable,clevis. 5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over:Adjustable steel yoke,cast iron pipe roll, double hanger. 6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers:Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods. 7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over:Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll. 8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches:Cast iron hook. 9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over:Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over:Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll. 11. Vertical Support:Steel riser clamp. a. Isolate riser clamp from structure by use of Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite #274 or#278 riser pad or Owner-approved equivalent. 12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe:Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut,nipple,floor flange,and concrete pier or steel support. 13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches:Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut,nipple,floor flange,and concrete pier or steel support. 14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over:Adjustable cast iron pipe roll and stand,steel screws,and concrete pier or steel support. 15. Copper Pipe Support:Carbon steel ring,adjustable, copper plated. 16. Use non-metallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. 17. For vertical midspan support of piping 4 inches and under, use Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite Stout Bracket in conjunction with Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite Stout Clamp or industry standard two-hole pipe clamp(MSS Type 26). 18. Secondary Pipe Positioning and Supports: a. Makeshift,field-devised methods of plumbing pipe support,such as the use of scrap framing materials,are not allowed.Support and positioning of piping shall be by means of engineered methods that comply with IAPMO PS 42-96.These are to be Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite support systems or approved equal. D. Hanger Fasteners:Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners,as follows: 1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors:Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors:Complying with ICC-ES AC01. 3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors:Complying with ICC-ES AC193. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 15 4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors:Complying with ICC-ES AC106. 5. Concrete Adhesive Type Achors:Compying with ICC-ES AC308. 6. Other Types:As required. 7. Manufacturers: a. Powers Fasteners, Inc:www.powers.com. b. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.09 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel,threaded both ends,threaded on one end, or continuous threaded. 2.10 INSERTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Anvil Fig.281. 2. PHD Fig 951. 3. Michigan Hanger Model 355EG. 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Inserts: Carbon steel case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment,top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.11 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing:26 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Metal Counterflashing:22 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing:5 lb./sq.ft.sheet lead 2. Soundproofing: 1 Ib./sq.ft.sheet lead. D. Flexible Flashing: 1.85 inch thick sheet butyl;compatible with roofing. E. Caps:Steel,22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. 2.12 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams,Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors:Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel. D. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork:Galvanized steel or wood. E. Sealant:Acrylic; refer to Section 07 90 05. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 15 2.13 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc. Model Series LS. 2. NMP Corporation. 3. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type,consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve,connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. 2.14 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturers: 1. Unistrut Model Series P1000. 2. Superstrut Model Series 1200. 3. Michigan Hanger"0-Strut"Model A-12. 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Product Description:Galvanized 12 gage thick steel.With holes 1-1/2 inches on center. 2.15 FIRESTOPPING A. Manufacturers: 1. Specified Technology Inc.(STI)Model SpecSeal Series 100. 2. Dow Corning Corp. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. International Protective Coating Corp. 5. 3M fire Protection Products. 6. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping:Single or multiple component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds:Single or Multiple component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping:Composite of mineral or ceramic fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer,covered with sheet stainless steel jacket,joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. 6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF 15 7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows. C. Color:As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.16 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES A. Primer:Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard. 2. Mineral fiber matting. 3. Sheet metal. 4. Plywood or particle board. 5. Alumina silicate fire board. C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips,collars,fasteners,temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. D. General: 1. Furnish UL listed products. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. E. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged,split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade,furnish mechanical sealing device to continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve. 2.17 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hammond Valve Co.; Model IB640:www.hammondvalve.com. 2. Nibco, Inc.; Model T-111:www.nibco.com. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company; Model 148:www.miIwaukeevalve.com. 4. Stockham; Model B-100:www.stockham.com. 5. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Up To and Including 3 Inches: 1. MSS SP-80, Class 150, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem,threaded bonnet, handwheel, inside screw,solid wedge disc,solder or threaded ends. 2.18 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hammond Valve Co.; Model 8501:www.hammondvalve.com. 2. Nibco, Inc.; Model T-FP-600:www.nibco.com. 3. Watts; Model FBV-1:www.watts.com. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 10 OF 15 4. Stockham; Model 5216-BR-R-T:www.stockham.com. 5. Apollo; Model 70-100:www.conbraco.com. 6. Milwaukee Valve Company; Model BA-125:www.milwaukeevalve.com. 7. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Up to and including 3 inches: 1. MSS SP 110, Class 150,600 WOG, bronze,two piece body,chrome plated brass ball, full port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle solder or threaded ends. 2.19 FLOW CONTROLS A. Manufacturers: 1. ITT Bell&Gossett:www.bellgossett.com. 2. Griswold Controls:www.griswoldcontrols.com. 3. Taco, Inc:www.taco-hvac.com. 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Construction: Class 125, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet, blowdown/backflush drain. C. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating,over operating pressure range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 3.5 psi. 2.20 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hammond Valve; Model 18940:www.hammondvalve.com. 2. Nibco, Inc.; Model T-413:www.nibco.com. 3. Stockham; Model B-320:www.stockham.com. 4. Milwaukee Valve Company; Model F-2974:www.milwaukeevalve.com. 5. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Up to 3 Inches: 1. MSS SP-80,Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder or threaded ends. C. Over 3 Inches: 1. MSS SP-71, Class 125, iron body, bronze fitted, renewable disc seal and seat, flanged ends. 2.21 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hammond Valve; Model IR9354:www.hammondvalve.com. 2. Nibco, Inc.; Model F-910:www.nibco.com. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company; Model Series 1800:www.milwaukeevalve.com. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 11 OF 15 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Class 125,globe style, iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc,seals, lug style ends. 2.22 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts Regulator Company:www.wattsregulator.com. 2. Cash-Acme:www.cashacme.com. 3. Zurn/Wilkins:www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Up to 2 Inches: 1. MSS SP-80, bronze body,stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts,fabric reinforced diaphragm,strainer,threaded single union ends. C. Over 2 Inches: 1. MSS SP-85,cast iron body, bronze fitted,elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flanged. 2.23 RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: a. Watts Regulator Company:www.wattsregulator.com. b. Cash-Acme:www.cashacme.com. c. Zurn/Wilkins:www.zurn.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2. AGA 221.22 certified, bronze body,teflon seat,steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated. B. Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: a. Watts Regulator Company:www.wattsregulator.com. b. Cash-Acme:www.cashacme.com. c. Zurn/Wilkins:www.zurn.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body,teflon seat,stainless steel stem and springs, automatic,direct pressure actuated,temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity ASME(BPV IV)certified and labelled. 2.24 STRAINERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts Regulator Company:www.wattsregulator.com. 2. Hammond Valve:www.hammondvalve.com. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company:www.milwaukeevalve.com. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH2013 PAGE12OF15 4. Apollo:www.conbraco.com. 5. Stockham:www.stockham.com. 6. Nibco, Inc.:www.nibco.com. 7. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Size 2 inch and Under: 1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP,Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2. Class 150,threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP,Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. C. Size 1-1/2 inch to 4 inch: 1. Class 125,flanged iron body,Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen. D. Size 5 inch and Larger: 1. Class 125,flanged iron body, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade,dry,and not over-excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt,on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space,and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints,or connected equipment. Refer to Section 22 05 16. G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 07 19. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 13 OF 15 H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08 31 00. I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 2 ft of cover. J. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing,scrape, brush clean,and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. L. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. M. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe,fittings,supports,and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00. N. Excavate in accordance with 31 20 00. O. Backfill in accordance with 31 20 00. P. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. Q. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. R. Install water piping to ASME B31.9. S. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. T. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions,walls and floors. U. Inserts: 1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. 2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. For pipe runs of 1 inch or less and ran high and tight to the structure, use Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite#121 or#125 Series Brackets in conjunction with Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite#260 or#400 Series Inserts or approved equal. 6. Where inserts are omitted,drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. V. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9 and MSS SP-89. 2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 14 OF 15 5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 6. Support vertical piping at every other floor.Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation,provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping or sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping. 9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 90 00. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts,and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. 10. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation. 11. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. 12. Support of pipe tubing and equipment is to be accomplished by means of engineered products specific to each application. Makeshift field devised methods will not be allowed. 3.04 APPLICATION A. ABS shall be used for vent piping and pumped waste only.All other waste piping shall be cast iron. B. PEX piping shall be used as apartment branch piping only. PEX piping shall not serve more than one fixture.All other domestic water piping shall be copper. C. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. D. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system.Solder adapters to pipe. E. Install gate, ball, or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. F. Install globe,ball, or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass,or manual flow control services. G. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment. H. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps. I. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. J. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated. 3.05 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work,verify system is complete,flushed and clean. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 05 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 15 OF 15 B. Ensure pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali(caustic soda or soda ash)or acid(hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant,free chlorine in liquid, powder,tablet or gas form,throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing,from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.06 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow preventer and water meter with by-pass valves, pressure reducing valve,and sand strainer. 1. Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced concrete bridge. Calk enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material.Anchor service main inside to concrete wall. 2. Provide 18 gage galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 6 inch above floor and 6 feet minimum below grade. Size for minimum of 2 inches of loose batt insulation stuffing. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 06 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 6 SECTION 22 10 06 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof and floor drains. B. Cleanouts. C. Hose bibbs. D. Hydrants. E. Backflow preventers. F. Water hammer arrestors. G. Thermostatic mixing valves. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 11 40 00 Food Service Submittals.Article 1.0- Rough Opening Drawing. B. Section 22 10 05-Plumbing'Piping. C. Section 22 30 00- Plumbing Equipment. D. Section 22 40 00-Plumbing Fixtures. E. Division 26- Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A112.6.3- Floor and Trench Drains;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2007). B. ASME A112.6.4-Roof, Deck,and Balcony Drains;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2003. C. ASSE 1011 -Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers;American Society of Sanitary Engineering;2004(ANSI/ASSE 1011). D. ASSE 1019-Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant Automatic Draining Type; American Society of Sanitary Engineering;2004,and Errata 2005(ANSI/ASSE 1019). E. PDI-WH 201 -Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute; 2006. ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data:Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes,and finishes. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 06 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 6 C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions,weights,and placement of openings and holes. D. Certificates:Certify that grease and oil interceptors meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment,cleanouts, backflow preventers, and water hammer arrestors. G. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors. H. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists,exploded assembly views. I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements,for additional provisions. 2. Extra Loose Keys for Outside Hose Bibbs:Two. 3. Extra Hose End Vacuum Breakers for Hose Bibbs:Two. 4. Containers:Two. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DRAINS A. Roof Drain(RD-1)and Overflow Drain(OD-1): 1. Manufacturers: a. Zurn Industries, Inc:www.zurn.com. 2. Roof Drain w/Dual Outlet 3".Zurn Model:Z164-31P-AR. 3. Roof Drain w/Dual Outlet 4".Zurn Model:Z164-41P-AR. B. Downspout Nozzles(ON-1): 1. Manufacturers: a. Zurn Industries, Inc:www.zurn.com. b. Zurn Downspout Nozzle BRNZ Body 3".Zurn Model:Z199ZANB. c. Zurn Downspout Nozzle BRNZ Body 4".Zurn Model:Z199ZANB. C. Floor Drain(FD-1): 1. Manufacturers: a. Zurn Industries, Inc:www.zurn.com. b. Zurn Drain Adaptor w/Clamp 2"ABS.Zurn Model:JP2280. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 06 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 6 D. Floor Drain(FD-2): 1. Manufacturers: a. Zurn Industries, Inc:www.zurn.com. b. Zurn Nickel Floor Drain Cover 4".Zurn Model:JP2280-R4. E. Floor Sink(FS-1): 1. Manufacturers: a. Ceco. b. 12 x 12 x 6 Floor Sink 2"NH WHT. Ceco Model:906-2NH-20. c. Ceco Dome Floor Drain.Ceco Model:902. d. Ceco Floor Sink Full Top Grate.Ceco Model:900. 2.02 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R.Smith Manufacturing Company:www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Watts Regulator Company:www.watts.com. 3. Wade:www.wadedrains.com. 4. Zurn Industries, Inc:www.zurn.com. 5. Sioux Chief Finish Line:www.siouxchief.com. 6. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas(CO-1): 1. Manufacturers: a. Jay R.Smith Manufacturing Company; Model 4250:www.jayrsmith.com. b. Sioux Chief; Model 834-DNR:www.siouxchief.com. c. Zurn:www.zurn.com 2. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover. C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas(CO-2): 1. Manufacturers: a. Jay R.Smith Manufacturing Company; Model 4020:www.jayrsmith.com. b. Sioux Chief; Model 834-DNR:www.siouxchief.com. c. Zurn:www.zurn.com 2. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange,threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. D. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas(CO-3): 1. Manufacturers: a. Jay R.Smith Manufacturing Company; Model 4472:www.jayrsmith.com. b. Sioux Chief; Model 873:www.siouxchief.com. c. Zurn:www.zurn.com 2. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 06 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 6 2.03 HYDRANTS: A. Manufacturers: 1. Zurn Industries, Inc:www.zurn.com. B. Wall Hydrants(H-1): 1. Manufacturers: a. Zurn Industries, Inc; Model Z-1320-CL:wall hydrant w/lock 6-8"wall. www.zurn.com. 2.04 HOSE BIBBS:(HB-2) A. Manufacturers: 1. Zurn Industries, Inc:www.zurn.com. B. Interior Hose Bibbs: 1. Manufacturers: a. Zurn Industries, Inc; Model Z1341-BFP-P12:Zurn Wall Hose Bibb w/Vac Brkr.www.zurn.com. 2.05 WASHING MACHINE BOXES AND VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Guy Gray:www.ipscorp.com/plumbing/guygray. 2. Specialty Products:www.lspproducts.com. 3. Sioux Chief:www.siouxchief.com. 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Description: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass long shank valves with wheel handles, socket for 2 inch waste,slip in finishing cover. 2.06 REFRIGERATOR VALVE AND RECESSED BOX A. Description: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass valves with wheel handle,slip in finishing cover. 2.07 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Febco:www.febcoonline.com. 2. Watts Regulator Company:www.watts.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc:www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: 1. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs;two independently operating, spring loaded check valves;diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves;third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves,strainer,and four test cocks. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 06 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 6 2.08 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; Model Hydrotol:www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Zurn Industries, Inc:www.zurn.com. 3. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.:www.ppcinc.net. 4. Sioux Chief:www.siouxchief.com. 5. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Water Hammer Arrestors: 1. Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range-100 to 300 degrees F and maximum 250 psi working pressure. 2.09 MIXING VALVES A. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Symmons Industries, Inc.:www.symmons.com. b. Powers:www.powerscontrols.com. c. Leonard Valve Company:www.leonardvalve.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2. Valve:Chrome plated cast brass body,stainless steel or copper alloy bellows, integral temperature adjustment. 3. Capacity:As indicated on the Drawing Schedule. 4. Accessories: a. Check valve on inlets. b. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet. c. Stem thermometer on outlet. d. Strainer stop checks on inlets. 5. Cabinet: 16 gage enameled steel,for surface mounting with keyed lock. B. Pressure Balanced Mixing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: • a. Powers:www.powerscontrols.com. b. Leonard Valve Company:www.leonardvalve.com. c. Symmons Industries, Inc.:www.symmons.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body,stainless steel cylinder, integral temperature adjustment. 3. Capacity:As indicated on the Drawing Schedule. 4. Accessories: a. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet. b. Stem thermometer on outlet. c. Strainer stop checks on inlets. d. Cabinet: 16 gage enameled steel,for surface mounting with keyed lock. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 10 06 PERMIT SET PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 6 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. E. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines,janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems,flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs. F. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to lavatories,sinks,and washing machine outlets. G. Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures(each washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 3/4 inch minimum, and minimum 18 inches long. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 30 00 PERMIT SET PLUMBING EQUIPMENT MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 5 SECTION 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water heaters. B. Pumps. 1. Circulators. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 26: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z21.10.1 -Gas Water Heaters-Volume I-Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings 11 of 75,000 Btu per Hour or Less;2009. B. ANSI Z21.10.3-Gas Water Heaters-Volume III-Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings Above 75,000 Btu per Hour,Circulating and Instantaneous Water Heaters;2008. C. ASME(BPV VIII, 1)- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section VIII, Division 1 -Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2007. D. UL 174-Standard for Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Indicate pump type,capacity, power requirements. 3. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate heat exchanger dimensions,size of tappings,and performance data. 2. Indicate dimensions of tanks,tank lining methods, anchors,attachments, lifting points,tappings,and drains. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 30 00 PERMIT SET PLUMBING EQUIPMENT MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 5 E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance,and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability,and service depot location and telephone number. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements,for additional provisions. 2. Extra Pump Seals:Two of each type and size. 3. Extra Water Softener Salt:Two bags of 50 pounds each. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications:Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section,with minimum three years of documented experience and with service facilities within 100 miles of project. B. Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number,and rating/capacity identified by permanently attached label. C. Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation,are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.06 CERTIFICATIONS A. Water Heaters: NSF approved. B. Gas Water Heaters:Certified by CSA International to ANSI Z21.10.1 or ANSI Z21.10.3, as applicable, in addition to requirements specified elsewhere. C. Electric Water Heaters: UL listed and labeled to UL 174. D. Water Tanks:ASME labeled,to ASME(BPV VIII,1). E. Products.Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters,water storage tanks, packaged water heating systems, in-line circulator, submersible sump pumps,sump pumps, and sewage ejectors. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 30 00 PERMIT SET PLUMBING EQUIPMENT MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 5 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HIGH EFFICIENCY GAS FIRED WATER HEATER A. Manufacturers: 1. A.O.Smith Water Products Co; Model XHE"Cyclone":www.hotwater.com. 2. Bradford-White; Model EF"eForce":www.bradfordwhite.com. 3. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Type:Automatic,natural gas-fired,vertical storage. C. Capacity: 1. As calculated. 2. Certification:ANSI Z21.10.3. D. Tank:Glass lined welded steel ASME labelled; multiple flue passages,4 inch diameter inspection port,thermally insulated with minimum 3 inches foam,encased in corrosion- resistant steel jacket;baked-on enamel finish;floor shield and legs. E. Accessories: Provide NSF approved stand for kitchen applications and the following: 1. Water Connections:Brass. 2. Dip tube: Brass. 3. Drain Valve. 4. Anode: Magnesium. 5. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve:ASME labelled. F. Approval:By AGA as automatic storage water heater and for operation at 180 degrees F. G. Controls:Automatic water thermostat with temperature range adjustable from 120 to 180 degrees F.Automatic reset high temperature limiting thermostat factory set at 140 degrees F,gas pressure regulator,turbulent jet sealed combustion burner with direct venting with PVC or CPVC piping, electronic ignition, 100 percent safety shut-off pilot and thermocouple,automatic flue damper and draft hood. 2.02 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Type: Factory-assembled and wired,electric,vertical storage. B. Performance: 1. As indicated on Drawings. C. Electrical Characteristics: 1. Refer to Division 26. D. Tank:Glass lined welded steel;4 inch diameter inspection port,thermally insulated with minimum 3 inches glass fiber or polyurethane encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 30 00 PERMIT SET PLUMBING EQUIPMENT MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 5 E. Controls:Automatic immersion water thermostat; externally adjustable temperature range from 60 to 180 degrees F,flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, high temperature limit thermostat. F. Accessories: 1. Water connections: Brass. 2. Dip tube: Brass. 3. Drain Valve. 4. Anode: Magnesium. 5. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve:ASME labelled. G. Heating Elements: Flange-mounted immersion elements; individual elements sheathed with lncoloy corrosion-resistant metal alloy, rated less than 75 watts per square inch. 2.03 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE EXPANSION TANKS A. Manufacturers: 1. Amtrol Inc:www.amtrol.com. 2. ITT Bell&Gossett:www.bellgossett.com. 3. Taco, Inc:www.taco-hvac.com. 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Construction:Welded steel,tested and stamped in accordance with ASME(BPV VIII, 1); supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig,with flexible EPDM diaphragm sealed into tank,and steel legs or saddles. C. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting,tank drain; precharge to 12 psig. 2.04 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc:www.armstrongpumps.com. 2. ITT Bell &Gossett:www.bellgossett.com. 3. Taco, Inc.:www.taco-hvac.com. 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure,with stainless steel rotor assembly. C. Impeller: Bronze. D. Shaft:Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings. E. Seal:Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat. F. Drive: Flexible coupling. G. Performance: 1. As calculated. 2. Electrical Characteristics: a. Refer to Division 26. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 30 00 PERMIT SET PLUMBING EQUIPMENT MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code,and complying with conditions of certification, if any. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping,gas venting,and electrical work to achieve operating system. C. Pumps: 1. Ensure shaft length allows sump pumps to be located minimum 24 inches below lowest invert into sump pit and minimum 6 inches clearance from bottom of sump pit. 2. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. 3. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check valve and balancing valve on discharge. 4. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers.Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. 5. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation,are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 6. Align and verify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 40 00 PERMIT SET PLUMBING FIXTURES MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 6 SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water closets. B. Urinals. C. Lavatories. D. Drinking fountains. E. Service sinks. F. Sinks. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 90 05-Joint Sealers:Seal fixtures to walls and floors. B. Section 22 05 53- Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. C. Section 22 10 05-Plumbing Piping. D. Section 22 10 06- Plumbing Piping Specialties. E. Section 22 30 00- Plumbing Equipment. F. Division 26-Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. B. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2005. C. ASME A112.19.2-Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2008. D. ASME A112.19.3-Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures(Designed for Residential Use);The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures,sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes,trim, and finishes. C. Samples: Submit two lavatory supply fittings. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 40 00 PERMIT SET PLUMBING FIXTURES MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 6 D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures. E. Manufacturer's Certificate:Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. G. Waterless Urinals:Submit recommended frequency of maintenance and parts replacement, methods of cleaning,sources of replacement supplies and parts. H. Warranty:Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00- Execution and Closeout Requirements:Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data:Submit fixture,trim, exploded view and replacement parts lists. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Manufacturer Qualifications:Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section,with minimum three years of documented experience,and with service facilities within 100 miles of project. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection:Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements:Pre-installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements:Product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 01 70 00- Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 40 00 PERMIT SET PLUMBING FIXTURES MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSET(FLOOR MOUNT):WC-1 A. Manufacturers: 1. Toto. B. Bowl:Comm Flushometer Toilet EB white.Toto Model:CT705EN#01. C. Exposed Flush Valve: Closet Manual Flush Valve 1.2.Toto Model:TMT1 LN32#CP. D. Seat:Comm seat of L/CRV EB white.Toto Model:SC534#01. 2.02 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSET(FLOOR MOUNT,ACCESSIBLE):WC-2 A. Manufacturers: 1. Toto. B. Bowl: Comm Flushometer toilet ADA height.Toto Model:CT705ELN. C. Exposed Flush Valve: Closet manual flush valve 1.2.Toto Model:TMT1 LN32#CP. D. Seat:Comm seat of L/CVR EB white.Toto Model:SC534#01. 2.03 TANK TYPE WATER CLOSETS:WC-3 A. Bowl: Mansfield Kindergarden Toilet Bowl. Model:5326. B. Tank: Mainsfield Kindergarden Tank Wh. Model:4320. 2.04 WALL HUNG URINALS(ACCESSIBLE): UR-1,2 A. Toto. B. Urinal:Comm Urinal 1.0 GPF,3/4"SPD WH.Toto Model: UT447E#01. 2.05 LAVATORIES(ACCESSIBLE):LV-1 A. Manufacturers: 1. Toto. 2. Substitutions:Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. SR Lay 20 x 17 1H WHT.Toto Model: LT401#01. C. Faucet: 1. Grohe Concetto 1H LAV FCT L/DRN CP. Grohe Model:34.271.001. D. Accessories: 1. Grohe Option Grid Strainer CP.Grohe Model:28.951.000. 2.06 LAVATORIES(ACCESSIBLE):LV-2 A. Manufacturers: 1. Toto. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 40 00 PERMIT SET PLUMBING FIXTURES MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 6 2. Grohe. 3. Substitutions:Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Totl 21x18 Wall Mount ADA LAV 1H WHT.Toto Model: LT307#01. C. Faucet: 1. Grohe Concetto 1H LAV FCT L/DRN CUP.Grohe Model:34.271.001. D. Accessories: 1. Grohe Option Grid Strainer CP. Grohe Model:28.951.000. 2.07 DRINKING FOUNTAINS(ACCESSIBLE): DF-1 A. Manufacturers: 1. Elkay. 2. Substitutions:Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Fountain: Elkay BF WM ADA Water Cooler. Elkay Model: EZS8-L. 2.08 SERVICE SINK: MS-1 A. Manufacturers: 1. Zurn. 2. Swan. B. Swan FBRGLS MOP SNK 24x24 3" DRN WH.Swan Model: MS-2424-010. C. Swan 3"to 2"Adapter for Mop Sink.Swan Model: MS-2410. D. Zurn Mop/Service Sink.Zurn Model: M841 M1. E. Substitutions:Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2.09 SINKS(SINGLE COMPARTMENT):S-1 A. Manufacturers: 1. Elkay, Model Series"Lustertone". B. ASME A112.19.3,22"x 17"x 7 1/2"outside dimensions, 18 gage thick,Type 304 stainless steel,self-rimming and undercoated,with 1-1/2 inch chrome brass drain 3-1/2 inch crumb cup and tailpiece, ledge back drilled for trim. C. Trim:Grohe Eurosmart. Model:31.133.001 1 H. D. Accessories:Chrome plated 17 gage brass offset P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon, brass stem screwdriver stop, rigid supplies,chrome plated soft copper supplies. 2.10 SINKS( DOUBLE COMPARTMENT):S-2 A. Manufacturers: 1. Elkay, Model Series"Lustertone". AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 40 00 PERMIT SET PLUMBING FIXTURES MARCH 2013 PAGES OF 6 B. ASME A112.19.3,21"x 33"x 8"outside dimensions, 18 gage thick,Type 304 stainless steel, • self-rimming and undercoated,with 1-1/2 inch chrome brass drain 3-1/2 inch crumb cup and tailpiece, ledge back drilled for trim. C. Trim:Grohe Eurosmart. Model:31.133.001 1H. D. Accessories:Chrome plated 17 gage brass offset P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon,brass stem screwdriver stop, rigid supplies, chrome plated soft copper supplies. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements:Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. D. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with all applicable codes. B. Install each fixture with trap,easily removable for servicing and cleaning. C. Provide chrome plated rigid supplies to fixtures with screwdriver stops, reducers,and escutcheons. D. Install components level and plumb. E. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. F. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07 90 05,color to match fixture. G. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended to hold fixture in place. H. For ADA accessible water closets,install flush valve with handle to wide side. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Review millwork shop drawings.Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 22 40 00 PERMIT SET PLUMBING FIXTURES MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 6 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Section 01 70 00- Execution and Closeout Requirements:Testing,adjusting,and balancing. B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise,or overflow. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations. B. Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel. C. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. Fixture Heights: Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated. 1. Water Closet: a. Standard: 15 inches to top of bowl rim. b. Accessible: 18 inches to top of seat. 2. Water Closet Flush Valves: a. Standard: 11 inches min. above bowl rim. b. Recessed: 10 inches min. above bowl rim. 3. Urinal: a. Standard: 22 inches to top of bowl rim. b. Accessible: 17 inches to top of bowl rim. 4. Lavatory: a. Standard:31 inches to top of basin rim. b. Accessible:34 inches to top of basin rim. 5. Drinking Fountain: a. Child:30 inches to top of basin rim. b. Standard Adult:40 inches to top of basin rim. c. Accessible:36 inches to top of spout. END OF SECTION AM-3533 D 2,3 St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 Page 1 OF 9 SECTION 23 00 00 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Bidding, General and Supplementary of this project manual and specific sections as noted apply to the work specified in Mechanical Division 15 which encompasses Sections 23 00 00 through 23 81 26.This Section 23 00 00 applies to all sections of Mechanical Division 23. B. The performance of this contract is on a design build basis. Perform all design, produce construction and record documents and accomplish all construction required herein and on approved designs in compliance with applicable state and local building codes. 1. The architectural scope drawings are included as a general guide to duct routing and size constraints.Exact size of ductwork is to be determined by the contractor in conjunction with the building architectural,structural and other trade constraints. 2. Provide supplemental data to governmental agencies having jurisdiction over the work as requested by the agencies.The design,drawings and supplemental information are to be adequate to obtain all permits and miscellaneous approvals required to complete the project construction. C. This specification notes the general equipment,systems and quality level of the project HVAC construction.The contractor's signing engineer is responsible for building code compliance,the design of life/safety code complying building mechanical systems and systems designed to maintain adequate ventilation levels in the various building spaces and occupancies. D. Design Drawings: 1. Perform design and prepare documents required to provide all HVAC and process systems specified herein and shown on the drawings as required by applicable codes to obtain building occupancy.The documents show equipment,capacities and air volumes to be utilized.Refer to the equipment matrix in the documents for owner furnished equipment. Coordinate required ventilation levels with occupancies detailed on the architectural and mechanical drawings.Provide transfer air between spaces as required to provide adequate air for exhaust fan operation within specified fan operating parameters. 2. Submit drawings to the architect for review.Provide supplemental data as requested by the architect or governmental agencies in support of the design documents. 3. The drawings must provide complete information as to the characteristics and location of the I-WAG equipment and systems. 4. The design must be supervised and final design drawings stamped by an engineer licensed in the State of Oregon employed by the contractor. 5. Coordinate the time of mechanical submittals with the-general contractor and the building project schedule. 6. Provide supplementary information to the governing agencies as required for State of Oregon mechanical energy compliance forms in support of the mechanical equipment and systems to be installed in this project. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 Page 2 OF 9 7. All systems provided must be completed and suitable for the intended building usage and occupancy. 8. Coordinate the design and construction work with the building architectural elements, structure and systems installed by other contractors.Field verifies site conditions as required for new systems design. 1.2 SCOPE A. It is the intent of these specifications and the accompanying drawings to describe complete and functional mechanical systems. B. Furnish and install all material,labor and equipment in accordance with these documents. C. Include all incidental items and work not specifically noted or specified but required by good practice in a complete system. D. Provide all miscellaneous seismic restraints and equipment mounting details as required by applicable codes for the HVAC systems. E. The architectural scope drawings and these design build specifications are complementary.What is called for in one shall be called for in both. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. . B. Indicated: 1. The term"indicated"is a cross reference to details,notes,or schedules on the drawings, other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications,and similar means of recording requirements in the Contract Documents. 2. Where terms such as"shown,""noted,""scheduled,"and"specified"are used instead of "indicated,"it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate the cross reference,and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted. C. Directed,Requested,Etc.:Where not otherwise explained,terms such as"directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected,""approved," "required,""accepted,"and"permitted"mean"directed by the Engineer,""requested by the Engineer,"etc.However,no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. D. Site or Project Site:The space available to the Contractor for the performance of the work,either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing the work as part of the project.The extent of the project site is shown on the Mechanical drawings and is not identical with the description of the land upon which the project is to be built. E. Approved: 1. Where used in conjunction with the Architect's response to submittals,requests, applications,inquiries,reports and claims by the Contractor,the meaning of the term "approved"will be held to the limitations of the Architect's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 Page 3 OF 9 2. In no case will"approval"by the Architect be interpreted as a release of the interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Provide:The term"provide"means to furnish and install,complete and ready for the intended use. 1.4 STANDARDS AND CODES A.Provide all equipment and material and perform all work in accordance with all local,state and national codes and regulations. B.For work on this project,comply with appropriate standards published by the following: 1. Air Diffusion Council ADC 2. American Gas Association AGA 3. Air Movement and Control Association AMCA 4. American National Standards Institute ANSI 5. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute AM 6. Acoustical Society of America ASA 7. American Society of Heating,Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning ASHRAE 8. American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASME 9. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM 10. Multnomah County,Oregon 11. National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEBB 12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA 13. National Fire Protection Association NFPA 14. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'National Association SMACNA 15. Underwriters'Laboratories UL 16. International Building Code(w/State of Oregon Amendments) IBC 17. 2004 Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code UMC C. HVAC 1.Acoustical requirements for mechanically generated noise: General building areas: 35 maximum NC. a. Lobbies/Corridors: 35 Maximum NC. b. Conference: 30 Maximum NC. 2.All equipment and systems to conform to the State of Oregon Energy Code requirements. 1.5 APPROVAL OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Manufacturer's trade names,catalog numbers and material specifications used in this specification are intended to establish the quality of equipment or materials expected. Materials and manufacturers not listed require approval prior to the bid date. B. Approval of substitute equipment or materials will be based upon performance, quality and other factors deemed important by the Architect.The Contractor will be responsible for making all changes in this and other associated work required as a result of the substitution. Additional or modified structural calculations and roof penetrations required to accommodate the substitution will be the responsibility of the contractor. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 Page 4 OF 9 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Transmit five sets of submittals to the Architect for review.The submittals shall be bound in three-ring binders,have major topic tabs and an index.In order to expedite approval of certain items,it is not necessary to transmit complete submittals initially.The initial transmittal will include the binder,expected tabs and an index indicating which items are included,the date each is transmitted,and which items are yet to be transmitted.Future transmittals shall include a revised index. B. Furnish performance data and technical information on all materials and equipment to be used on the project.Include shop drawings with the submittals where necessary to determine clearance,where the Contractor proposes alternate equipment or material arrangements,and when requested by the Architect. C. Items transmitted for approval must be received in the Architects'office within 45 days of contract award.The Architect prior to installation must approve all material and equipment. D. Review of submittals or shop drawings by the Architect does not relieve the Contractor from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless specific approval has been requested for a given deviation. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain the highest standards of workmanship throughout the project. B. Use the latest editions of applicable and specifically referenced standards. A. Inspect all material and equipment upon arrival at the site and return any which is not in new condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION A. Cooperate with other trades to assure that construction proceeds in an orderly and timely manner.Contract cost increases due to improperly sequenced work with other trades will not be allowed. B. Study the new and existing architectural,structural,electrical,shop and any specialty drawings as appropriate and specifications to determine required coordination. C. Prepare detailed shop drawings where necessary to assure proper fit and necessary clearance. D. Refer to electrical drawings to verify voltage and phase of mechanical equipment. 3.2 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. Obtain all required permits and pay for all fees and connection charges. B. Schedule any required inspections. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 Page 5 OF 9 3.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Furnish all materials and equipment in new condition,free from defects and of size,make, type and quality specified.Installation shall be in a neat and workmanlike manner. B. When two or more items of the same kind,type or class are required,use items of a single manufacturer. 3.4 MEASUREMENTS A. Take all measurements from reference datums established by the mechanical contractor. 3.5 DELIVERY,HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Receive all material and equipment at the jobsite or shop. B. Use proper and sufficient equipment to handle all products employed in the project. C. Where storage of material or equipment is necessary,it shall be a clean and weatherproof area. Seal any openings and cover the product to assure that there will be no corrosion or foreign matter introduced.Assure that it will be in new condition when placed in service. 3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION,BRACING AND SUPPORT A. Install all equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise indicated. B. The contractor is responsible to determine the means and Methods of equipment installation and support.Seismic restraints for mechanical equipment and piping shall bear the seal and signature of a structural engineer registered in the state of Oregon,and shall be submitted to the architect prior to fabrication.Calculations are to be included for all connections to the structure, considering localized effects. Seismic design criteria for mechanical components shall be in conformance with the 2004 Oregon Structural Specialty Code,Section 1621 "Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical Component Seismic Design Requirements" C. Maintain a copy of the manufacturer's installation instructions at the jobsite for all equipment. 3.7 SLEEVES AND INSERTS A. Provide sleeves at all locations where piping and ductwork passes through building construction. B. Sleeves for interior walls and floors shall be 22 gauge galvanized or heavier as required. Sleeves for exterior walls shall be cast iron,wall thickness as required. 1. Wall sleeves shall be installed in all exterior walls and all interior masonry or fire- rated walls in a manner that preserves the fire-rated or watertight integrity of the wall. 2. Interior wall sleeves for un-insulated pipe shall allow minimum 1/4-inch clearance all around pipe for pipe movement. Allow 1-inch clearance around pipe at building expansion joints. Interior wall sleeves for insulated piping shall be selected to encompass the pipe and insulation and allow minimum 1/4-inch clearance around insulation for pipe movement.Allow I-inch clearance around pipe and insulation at building expansion joints. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 Page 6 OF 9 3. Floor sleeves shall extend 1/2-inch above the floor and shall be sealed watertight. 4. Floor sleeves shall be oversized to allow lt2-inch minimum space all around pipe or pipe and insulation where applicable.Seal space between pipe and sleeve with Dow Corning Fire Stop System,3M brand CP25 or approved equal. Sealant must be between pipe and sleeve. Sealant between insulation and sleeve is not acceptable. Install fire stop materials in complete accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and in compliance to applicable UL listings. C. Seal space between pipe and sleeve with Dow Corning Fire Stop System,3M Brand CP25 or approved equal where piping penetrates firewall or floors. Sealant must be between pipe and sleeve;sealant between insulation and sleeve is not acceptable. Install fire stop materials in complete accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and in compliance to applicable UL listings. 3.8 FLOOR,WALL AND CEILING PLATES A. Provide escutcheon plates where all exposed piping and ductwork passes through finished walls,floors and ceilings,including accessible cabinet spaces. B. Floor plates: deep recessed,cast brass,chrome plated. C. Wall and ceiling plates:spun aluminum,chrome plated. D. Secure plates to pipe or structure.Plates shall not penetrate insulation vapor barriers.Size plates to sufficiently cover pipe sleeves and openings in finish materials. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect all work,material and equipment from loss or damage until the Owner accepts the project. B. As the work progresses,keep all equipment covered and cap all ducts and piping that may temporarily be left unconnected. C. Notify all other trades of any required precautions necessary to protect the work. 3.10 ACCESSIBILITY A. Provide convenient access by location or access panel to all equipment requiring periodic service. 3.11 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Materials and work to be provided as a part of this Mechanical Division 15000 are: 1. Equipment control wiring. 2. Interlock wiring. 3. Motor starters. B. Wherever possible,provide all interconnect wiring within or on a piece of equipment with the equipment unless shown or specified otherwise.An electrician licensed to perform this type of work shall perform all field wiring. 3.12 RELATED WORK St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 Page 7 OF 9 A. The following work and materials are specified elsewhere: B. Pipe chases,equipment pads and foundations,trenches,painting,air louvers,louvered penthouse and access panels except as otherwise specified in this division. 1. Framed openings,wood grounds and nailing strips,masonry,concrete and other architectural and structural elements. C. The following work and materials are specified in Electrical Specification Divisions: 1. Power wiring. 2. Disconnect switches. 3. Furnishing and installation of disconnect switches. 4. Installation of magnetic starters. 3.13 CLEANING A. Maintain premises and public properties free from accumulations of waste,debris and rubbish during construction. B. Clean all mechanical equipment of dust,grease,iron cuttings,unnecessary stamps or shipping labels,etc. C. Touch up factory-painted surfaces,as necessary,with paint of matching color. 3.14 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain one set of construction drawings at the jobsite for the sole purpose of recording work of the mechanical contract,as actually installed.Upon request,the Architect will make the original tracings available to the mechanical contractor for printing the drawings. The Contractor shall pay the reproduction costs. B. Record all piping and ductwork by dimensions from gridlines,below grade,above floor, etc. C. Show location of all access panels,cleanouts,rough in for future,etc. D. Make record drawings available to the Architect for review or reproduction during construction.The Architect will pay any printing costs. E. Deliver record drawings to the Architect promptly upon completion of the project.3.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: A. Submit five copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the Architect for approval before project completion.Bind the instruction books with three-ring 8-112"x 11"side binders with plastic covers.Include an index and tabs for major systems and equipment.Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include the following: B. Directories: 1. Supplier Directory:Alphabetical list of principal subcontractors and suppliers of equipment giving names,addresses and telephone numbers. 2. Equipment Directory: List of equipment installed such as fans, air supply units, pumps, St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 Page 8 OF 9 heating and cooling equipment, plumbing fixtures, etc., giving drawing reference numbers, location,area served,manufacturer with model number and supplier. C. Manufacturer's Literature: 1. Show name,address and phone number of the nearest service facility authorized by the manufacturer. 2. Include illustrations,diagrams,and instructions for installation,startup, operation,inspections,maintenance,parts list,data sheets and other necessary materials. 3. Include complete electrical,schematic and connection diagrams for each equipment item. 4. Include the name,address and phone number of contractor(s)who furnished and who installed equipment and systems. 5. Where the literature covers more than one model,check off neatly in ink correct model number and data for the model number including all specified options. In those instances where the equipment,its mode of control,or both,is job assembled for special functions,then provide written operating and maintenance instructions prepared by the assembler on 8-112"x 11" sheets. D. Maintenance Instructions: 1. Where instructions for maintenance are not included in the manufacturer's literature, provide supplemental data to enable proper maintenance of the equipment installed. 2. Include specific lubrication methods and recommended frequencies along with procedures and precautions for inspection and routine service. E. Copy of Written Guarantee. F. Recommended Spare Parts Stock. 3.16 OWNER MEETING A. Schedule a meeting between the Contractor's representative and the Owner for the purpose of reviewing operation and maintenance of the building mechanical systems. The Contractor's representative shall be well qualified and knowledgeable of the systems in this facility. B. • The meeting shall be scheduled to allow the Owner and appropriate subcontractors and equipment suppliers to attend. C. The meeting shall be scheduled promptly upon completion of the project and approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. D. The Contractor shall review the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and record drawings in detail with the Owner. 3.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut work as required for installation and patch to match original conditions as directed and approved by Architect.Do not cut structural portion without Architect's-approval. B. When masonry construction must be penetrated,provide a steel pipe sleeve in opening and grout in place in a neat manner.Leave grout surface to match existing finish. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 00 00 PERMIT SET BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS MARCH 2013 Page 9 OF 9 C. Prior to cutting any existing work,locate all concealed utilities to eliminate any possible service interruption or damage. 3.18 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS IN FIRE-RATED WALL/FLOOR ASSEMBLIES A. Contractors shall provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to accommodate the through penetrating items. All voids between sleeve or core-drilled hole and pipe passing through,shall be fire stopped to meet the requirements of ASTM E-814. B. Fire stop penetrations in accordance with the U.L. listed assemblies provided by the manufacturers of the products used. 3.19 CHANGE ORDERS A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied with a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials cost without exception. B. Contractor's estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be made available to the Architect.Labor must be separated and allocated for each item of work. 3.20 VERIFICATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify field conditions and measurements prior to the manufacture or order of materials and equipment. B. Produce shop drawings with details as required to verify proper installation of materials& equipment in conformance with applicable codes and the manufacturer's requirements. END OF SECTION St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 05 05 PERMIT SET SLEEVES MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 23 05 05 SLEEVES PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Work Included: 1. Providing of sleeves at all locations where piping and ductwork passes through building construction. 2. Providing of inserts where needed to support piping,ductwork,equipment,etc. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Basic HVAC Requirements,Section 23 00 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Sleeves:Proset Systems or approved substitution. B. Inserts:M-Co.,Grinnell,Super-Strut or approved substitution. 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Sleeves for interior walls and floors shall be"Fire stop Penetrator"model to meet floor rating. B. Sleeves for exterior walls shall be cast iron,wall thickness as required. C. Inserts shall be as required for the purpose. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Wall sleeves shall be installed in all exterior walls and all interior masonry or fire-rated walls in a manner that preserves the fire-rated or watertight integrity of the wall. B. Interior wall sleeves for un-insulated pipe shall allow minimum 1/4-inch clearance all around pipe for pipe movement.Allow 1-inch clearance around pipe at building expansion joints. C. Interior wall sleeves for insulated piping shall be selected to encompass the pipe and insulation and allow minimum 1/4-inch clearance around insulation for pipe movement.Allow 1-inch clearance around pipe and insulation at building expansion joints. D. Seal space between pipe and sleeve with Proset System Caulk,or approved equal where piping penetrates firewall or floors. Sealant must be between pipe and sleeve;sealant between insulation and sleeve is not acceptable. Install fire stop materials in complete accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and in compliance to applicable UL listings. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 05 05 PERMIT SET SLEEVES MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 2 E. Floor sleeves shall extend 1/2-inch above the floor and shall be sealed watertight. F. Install inserts in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 05 10 PERMIT SET MOTOR STARTERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 23 05 10 MOTOR STARTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work included: Providing motor starters as specified. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Basic HVAC Requirements,Section 23 00 00. B. HVAC Fans,Section 23 3400. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 23 05 00. B. Submittals shall include manufacturer's catalog or technical data substantiating performance required. 1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Provide O&M data in accordance with Section 23 05 00. B. O&M data shall include: 1. Manufacturer's literature. 2. Maintenance instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Same as switchgear,except packaged equipment with motor starters factory installed. 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish starters with overload and under voltage protection for each leg. B. Furnish overloads of the ambient compensation type. C. Coordinate with control contractor to provide required coil voltage and number and type of auxiliary contacts. D. Provide hand-off-automatic switch on cover of starter enclosure. E. Provide control transformers with starters to produce 120V control power as required.Each control transformer shall be fused. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 05 10 PERMIT SET MOTOR STARTERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Furnish motor starters(either integral or as a separate item)for all mechanical equipment required to properly operate the equipment as specified. B. Installation of starters is specified under the Electrical Division. C. Provide additional properly sized overloads as required. END OF SECTION St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 05 29 PERMIT SET HANGERS AND SUPPORTS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work included: Providing of all required hangers and supports for ductwork and equipment. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Basic HVAC Requirements,Section 23 0000. B. HVAC Ducts and Casings,Section 23 31 13. C. Air Duct Accessories, Section 23 33 00. D. HVAC Fans, Section 23 34 00 E. Rooftop Packaged Air Conditioners,Section 23 75 00 F. Split System Air Conditioners,Section 23 81 26. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 15010. B. Submittals shall include: 1. Manufacturer's technical literature for all products used indicating service for each type of hanger. 2. Submit literature or describe duct-supporting method. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. M-CO,Grinnell,Super Strut.M-CO used for selection. 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Upper Attachments:Attachment to wood structures where weights permit shall be Figure 325 or 328. B. Structural Attachments:Provide all necessary structural attachments such as concrete anchors, beam clamps,hanger flanges and brackets.Hangers shall not be suspended from other piping, equipment,etc. St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 05 29 PERMIT SET HANGERS AND SUPPORTS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 2 C. Miscellaneous items such as hanger rod,rod couplings,turnbuckles,etc.shall be standard figure numbers of the same manufacturer as the attachments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide hangers and supports in accordance with the instructions furnished by the manufacturers of these devices. Support ductwork as required by the UMC and per SMACNA recommendations. B. Provide additional structural members where required to support ductwork. C. Provide hangers and support devices in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's instructions for all equipment. D. The contractor is responsible to determine the means and methods of equipment installation and support. Seismic restraint details required by the governing jurisdiction for mechanical equipment shall bear the seal and signature of a structural engineer registered in the state of Oregon,and shall be submitted to the architect prior to fabrication.Calculations are to be included for all connections to the structure,considering localized effects. Seismic design criteria for mechanical components shall be in conformance with the 2004 Oregon Structural Specialty Code,Section 1621 "Architectural,Mechanical and Electrical Component Seismic Design Requirements".Costs for seismic calculations are to be included in the bid price. E. Provide 1" spring isolators on all supply and exhaust fans suspended from structure. F. Provide flexible duct connections between all fans and connecting ductwork. G. Provide supplementary drawings and calculations as required by governing code jurisdictions noting seismic support data/calculations as required for permit purposes. END OF SECTION St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 05 53 PERMIT SET IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work included:Providing of all required identification systems for equipment. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Basic HVAC Requirements,Section 23 0000. B. HVAC Fans,Section 23 34 00 C. Rooftop Packaged Air Conditioners,Section 23 75 00 D. Split System Air Conditioners,Section 23 81 26. E. Unit Heaters,Section 23 82 39: 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 15010. B. Submittals shall include a list of proposed equipment tags. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. W. H.Brady Co.,Seton or equal. 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Equipment Identification:Equipment identification tags shall be three-ply,white center,black face plastic plates with 112"high letters for major and 1/4"high letters for minor equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide each piece of building common area and general building equipment with a manufacturer's standard nameplate indicating manufacturer's name,model number,capacities and • characteristics.Labeling of residential equipment with the exception of the manufacturer's standard nameplate data is not required. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 05 53 PERMIT SET IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 2 B. In addition,provide each piece of equipment with a plastic tag indicating its designation on this project(such as RTU-1).Mount this tag with screws,where possible,in a clearly visible location. END OF SECTION St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 05 93 PERMIT SET TESTING,ADJUSTING, BALANCING FOR HVAC MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included:Providing system balance work for building HVAC systems 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Basic HVAC Requirements,Section 23 00 00. B. HVAC Fans,Section 23 34 00 C. Rooftop Packaged Air Conditioners,Section 23 75 00 D. Split System Air Conditioners,Section 23 81 26. E 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Firm and personnel experience for approval prior to bid. 1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Provide O&M data in accordance with Section 15010. B. O&M data shall include copies of system balance data 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contract with Northwest Engineering Services,Neudorfer Engineering,Professional Air Balance, Air Balancing Specialty or Accurate Air Balance,Pacific Coast Air balance to perform the system balance work on this project. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Conduct the systems balance work in accordance with standard procedures and recognized practices outlined by ASHRAE and Associated Air Balance Council.Record all actual equipment nameplate,drive and operating data at the site. B. After all adjustments are made,check the space for noise,vibration and drafts and eliminate if possible. C. Document any problems or operating difficulties that could not be rectified. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 05 93 PERMIT SET TESTING,ADJUSTING, BALANCING FOR HVAC MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 3 D. Upon completion of balancing work,submit one copy of final report to Engineer for approval. Make corrections as requested. Submit four(4)copies of final report to the contractor for inclusion in the O&M manuals Engineer. E. Provide sets of marked balancing drawings showing air opening numbers that correspond to the numbering system in the balancing logs with the final reports. 3.2 EXECUTION A. Split System Air Conditioning System: 1. Assure that air filters are clean,if not new,prior to beginning air balance work. 2. Adjust fan speed and measure design airflow available from the unit distributed to the building floors. 3. Include the following in the logs: a. Air conditioning unit capacity at 100%outside air and minimum outside air. b. Static pressure at design airflow. c. Actual motor voltage,amperage,RPM and overload heater sizes,as well as nameplate data. B. Packaged Rooftop Units: 2. Assure that air filters are clean,if not new,prior to beginning air balance work. 3. Adjust fan drives/VFD's to obtain fan speed required for air volumes.Speed shall be set to the minimum to provide required air volume at furthest run without excessive'static pressure.Provide sheave changes as required to achieve desired fan speed. 4. Adjust minimum outside air volume to that shown on the plans. 5. Include the following in the logs: a. Supply,return and outside air volumes. b. Supply air temperatures on full heating and full cooling. c. Static pressure drops across fan,filters and coil. d. Total pressure drops for supply and return system. e. Fan speed or RPM. f. Actual motor voltage,amperage,RPM and overload heater sizes. C.Exhaust Fans: 1. Adjust drive(as available)on fans to obtain fan speed required for air volumes. Speed shall be set to the minimum required to provide air volume without excessive static pressure. 2. Include the following in the logs: a. Individual exhaust CFM. b. Actual motor voltage,amperage,RPM and overload heater sizes,as well as nameplate data. D. Air Distribution System: 1. Adjust air volumes at diffusers and grilles. 2. Adjust diffusers and grilles for proper direction and throw. 3. Log all readings taken. 4. Mark final position of all balancing dampers. 3.3 CONTROLS AND SEQUENCE COMMISSIONING A. Cycle the system controls through the entire range of functions and verify proper operation and sequencing of heating/cooling,thermostat operation,etc. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 05 93 PERMIT SET TESTING,ADJUSTING, BALANCING FOR HVAC MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 3 B. Provide written verification in the balance logs that the equipment controls and sequencing appears to be correct and functioning properly at the time of performance of the system test and balance work. END OF SECTION St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 07 00 PERMIT SET HVAC INSULATION MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work included: Providing of all required insulation for ductwork. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Basic HVAC Requirements,Section 23 00 00. B. HVAC Ducts and Casings,Section 23 31 00. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 23 00 00. B. Submittals shall include: 1. Data to show compliance with flame and smoke rating. 2. Manufacturer's catalog or technical data showing performance,dimensions,materials of construction and recommended methods of installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Insulation materials and accessories such as adhesives,cement,etc. shall have composite fire and smoke hard ratings,as tested by procedures indicated in NFPA 255 and U.L.723,not to exceed a flame spread index of 25 and a smoke developed index of 50.Products or their shipping cartons shall have identification of the flame spread and smoke developed index. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Schuller,Knauf,Owens-Corning,Certain-teed,or approved substitution. Schuller used as basis of selection. 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Duct Insulation: Schuller Microlite 1.5-inch thick,0.75 lb./cu.Ft.density fiberglass duct insulation with FSKL jacket and a minimum installed R-value=3.9(1-1/2 inch/ 1-inch installed.) B. Duct Lining: Manville Linacoustic 1.5-3.0 lb./cu. ft.made of glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin with a minimum installed R-value=4.0(1-inch.) St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 07 00 PERMIT SET HVAC INSULATION MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION(INSULATION) A. Rectangular supply air ductwork and plenums-Internally lined,Refer to specification section 23 33 53. B. Rectangular and round return air and round concealed supply air ductwork-Externally insulated with fiberglass insulation unless specified or noted otherwise. C. Round exposed supply air ductwork—Un-insulated. D. Insulation levels must meet minimum state energy code standards. E. In addition to items listed above,provide lined ductwork where indicated or specified in the contract documents. 3.2 INSTALLATION(LINER) A. Apply internal insulation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and SMACNA "Duct Liner Application Standard."Apply internal insulation to flat sheet metal with continuous coverage of adhesive.Use adhesive on all butt edges.Install weld pins and clips on internal insulation 15"on center and no more than 2"maximum from any cut or exposed edge. B. Application: 1. Rectangular supply air ductwork and plenums-Internally lined,Refer to specification section 23 33 53. 2. Rectangular and round return air and round concealed supply air ductwork-Externally insulated with fiberglass insulation unless specified or noted otherwise. 3. Round exposed supply air ductwork—Uninsulated. C.Insulation levels must meet minimum state energy code standards. D.In addition to items listed above,provide lined ductwork where indicated or specified in the contract documents. E.Coat all raw duct liner edges within the ductwork.No uncoated fiberglass is allowed within the ductwork. END OF SECTION St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 13 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 13 SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special duty valves, and specialties for the following: 1. Heating hot water piping. 2. Refrigerant piping. 3. Makeup-water piping. 4. Condensate drain piping. 5. Air vent piping. 6. Safety valve inlet and outlet piping. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Pressure seal fittings. 2. Valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated orifice balancing valves and automatic flow control valves. 3. Air control devices. 4. Hydronic specialties. B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,Division 1. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 13 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 13 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L or M as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. B. Annealed Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88,Type K. C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306,Type DWV. D.Wrought Copper Fittings: ASME B 16.22. E. Wrought Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. 2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,black steel with plain ends;type,grade,and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. B. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. C. Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. D. Malleable Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. E. Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face,and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. F. Wrought Cast and Forged Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5,including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group,end connections,and facings: 1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3.Facings: Raised face. G. Grooved Mechanical Joint Fittings and Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following pr approved equal: a. Anvil International,Inc. b. Victaulic Company of America. 2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, E,or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 13 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 13 couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. 3. Couplings: Ductile or malleable iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure responsive design;with nuts,bolts,locking pin,locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21,nonmetallic,flat,asbestos free, 1/8 inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face,Class 125,cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b.Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face,Class 250,cast-iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1,carbon steel,unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. D. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder joint, plain,or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid,pressure,and temperature. C. Dielectric Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. Calpico,Inc. b. Lochinvar Corporation. 2. Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 2.5 VALVES A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section"General-Duty Valves." St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 13 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 13 B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section"Direct Digital Control(DDC)System." C. Bronze,Calibrated Orifice,Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. Armstrong Pumps,Inc. b. Bell&Gossett Domestic Pump;a division of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. g. Tour&Andersson;available through Victaulic Company of America 2. Body: Bronze,globe type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 4. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. Include graduated scale. 5. Handle Style: Lever,with memory stop to retain set position. 6. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. D. Diaphragm Operated,Pressure Reducing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. Amtrol,Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps,Inc. c. Bell&Gossett Domestic Pump;a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Industries,Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company,Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.;a division of Watts Water Technologies,Inc. 2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM 0-rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Low inlet-pressure check valve. 8. Inlet Strainer: Removable without system shutdown. 9.Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. E. Diaphragm Operated Safety Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: - St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 13 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 13 a. Amtrol,Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps,Inc. c. Bell&Gossett Domestic Pump;a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Industries,Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company,Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.;a division of Watts Water Technologies,Inc. 2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM 0-rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Wetted,Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber. 8. Inlet Strainer: Removable without system shutdown. 9.Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. F.Automatic Flow Control Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls. 2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 3.Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel,tamper proof,self cleaning,and removable. 4.Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve. 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification,valve number,and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. 7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations. 8.Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F. 2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following or approved equal: I. Amtrol,Inc. 2.Armstrong Pumps,Inc. 3.Bell&Gossett Domestic Pump;a division of ITT Industries. 4.Taco. B. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 13 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 13 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5.Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. C. Automatic Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. D. Expansion Tanks: 1. Tank: Welded steel,rated for 125 psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,Division 1. 2. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and stainless steel ball check, 100 gal. unit only; sized for compression-tank diameter. Provide tank fittings for 125 psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. 3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125 psig working pressure and 240 deg F maximum operating temperature;constructed to admit air to compression tank, drain water,and close off system. 4. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4 inch diameter gage glass, and slotted-metal glass guard. E. Diaphragm Type Expansion Tanks: 1. Tank: Welded steel,rated for 125 psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,Division 1. 2. Diaphragm: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain required expansion capacity. 3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve,stainless steel with EPDM seats. F. In-Line Air Separators: 1. Tank: One piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to maximize air separation. 2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig. 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 13 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 13 2.7 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126,Class B,cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40 mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. B. Stainless-Steel Bellow,Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Stainless steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4 inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Heating hot water piping,aboveground shall be any of the following: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought steel fittings and wrought cast or forged steel flanges and flange fittings,and welded and flanged joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved, mechanical joints. B. Makeup water piping installed aboveground shall be Type L,drawn temper copper tubing,wrought copper fittings,and soldered joints. C. Condensate Drain Piping: Type M DWV, drawn temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. D. Air Vent Piping: 1. Inlet: Same as service where installed. 2. Outlet: Type K,annealed temper copper tubing with soldered joints. E. Safety Valve Inlet and Outlet Piping for Heating Hot Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 13 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 13 B. Install calibrated orifice balancing valves at each branch connection to return main. C. Install calibrated orifice balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal. D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. E. Install safety valves at hot water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup water connection to regulate system fill pressure. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains,consisting of a tee fitting,NPS 3/4 ball valve,and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap,at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 13 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF 13 N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe,with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers,connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section"General-Duty Valves." Q. Install unions in piping,NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. R. Install flanges in piping,NPS 2-1/2 and larger,at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. S. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps (except in-line pumps) and other vibration-producing equipment. T. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve,pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2. U. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for Mechanical Piping and Equipment." 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for Mechanical Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. B. Seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Mechanical Piping and Equipment." C. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58,Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet;minimum rod size,3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span,7 feet;minimum rod size,3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span,9 feet;minimum rod size,3/8 inch. 4.NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet;minimum rod size,3/8 inch. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 13 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 10 OF 13 5.NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet;minimum rod size,3/8 inch. 6.NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet;minimum rod size,3/8 inch. 7.NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet;minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. E. Install hangers for drawn temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1.NPS 3/4: Maximum span,5 feet;minimum rod size,3/8 inch. 2.NPS 1: Maximum span,6 feet;minimum rod size,3/8 inch. 3.NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet;minimum rod size,3/8 inch. 4.NPS 2: Maximum span,8 feet;minimum rod size,3/8 inch. F. Support vertical runs at each floor and at 10-foot intervals between floors. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale,slag,dirt,and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material,size,type,and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved end fittings and rigid,grooved end pipe couplings. 3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping,at heat transfer coils,and elsewhere as required for system air venting. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 13 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 11 OF 13 B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting. C.Install piping from air separator to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger. E. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. 1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose. 2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building components and structural members. 3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Division 23 Section"Meters and Gages for Piping." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints,including welds,uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical,isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Notify Owner's Representative at least 24 hours before tests must be made. Perform tests in presence of Owner's Representative. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 13 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 12 OF 13 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times"SE"value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9,"Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for minimum 2 hours duration, examine piping,joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components,and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. C. Perform the following before operating the system: 1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely(automatic type),or bleed air completely(manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers,to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. 3.9 CLEANING A. Preparation: 1. System shall be operational prior to cleaning. 2. Make temporary piping connections, furnish temporary pumps, and temporary bypass filter as required to properly accomplish cleaning entire system. 3. Place all manual, pressure regulating and control valves serving the system in open position during cleaning so that circulation through the system is obtained during cleaning. 4. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics for any cleaning equipment. B. Cleaning Sequence: 1. Initial Flush(all systems): St a. Completely fill the system with fresh water and circulate (1 filling) at 6 feet per second for 4-hour minimum. b. Initial flushing shall be sufficient to remove all contaminants such as cuttings, filings,loose rust and scale,welding and soldering,residue and debris. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 13 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PIPING MARCH 2013 PAGE 13 OF 13 na c. Drain the entire system and refill with fresh water(2 filling). 2. Cleaning Flush: a. Use concentrated chemical cleaner in piping system(s). Cleaner shall be a phosphate wetting agent combined with an alkaline surfactant with a sodium carbonate type alkalinity supplement introduced as necessary to produce 600 ppm of phenolphthalein alkalinity. Chemicals shall be nontoxic. b. Circulate the solution at 6 feet per second for the recommended time period corresponding to the fluid temperature. 1) Partially close and reopen all manual valves twice during the flushing duration. c. Test solution for proper concentration and document results. d. Completely drain the entire system. e. Refill the system with fresh water (3rd filling). Then, with the circulation pump running at 6 feet per second: 1) Open one or more drains as far downstream from the fill point as is possible. Be sure the makeup is sufficient to keep up with the drain so as to maintain full system. 2) Partially close and reopen all manual valves twice during the flushing duration. 3) Blowdown all strainers,dead legs and low points in the system. 4) Continue to flush the system in this manner until the drain water is of the same clarity as the makeup water and testing reveals no further traces of cleaning solution(minimum 1 hour). Document the results. f. Following the fresh water flush,drain the entire system. 1) Clean all strainers. 3. Upon completion of cleaning, notify Owner's Representative as to the types of hydronic piping systems that have been cleaned so that a decision can be made as to chemical treatment addition. 4. Upon completion of cleaning and chemical treatment addition,tag the system so that tag is plainly visible as follows: "THIS SYSTEM HAS BEEN CHEMICALLY CLEANED AND TREATED." 5. Field Reports: Submit field report indicating analysis of system's water after cleaning and after chemical treatment." END OF SECTION St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 23 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PUMPS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF10 SECTION 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.3-piece,permanently lubricated, in-line centrifugal pumps. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A.Buna-N:Nitrile rubber. B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated.Indicate pump's operating point on curves. B. Shop Drawings: For each pump. 1 Show pump layout and connections. 2 Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages. 3 Include diagrams for power,signal,and control wiring. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 23 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PUMPS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF10 1.Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s)for each pump. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 3-PIECE,PERMANENTLY LUBRICATED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Manufacturer: 1. Contractor shall furnish and install new 3-piece inline permanently lubricated pumps for chilled water and hot water heating systems as indicated on the drawings. Pumps shall be Series 60 as manufactured by Bell & Gossett under base bid. Equivalent units as manufactured by Taco or Armstrong may be submitted as deduct alternates. Pumps shall meet types, sizes, capacities, and characteristics as scheduled on the Equipment Schedule drawings. B. 3-piece Inline Pumps—Permanently Lubricated: 1. The pumps shall be of a horizontal, permanently lubricated type, specifically designed for quiet operation. Suitable for 225°F operation at 175 PSIG working pressure. The pump shall be single stage, vertical split case design, in cast iron bronze fitted (or all bronze) construction. The pump internals shall be capable of being services without disturbing piping connections. 2. The pumps shall be composed of three separable components a motor, bearing assembly, and pump end (wet end). The motor shaft shall be connected to the pump shaft via a replaceable flexible coupler. 3. The pumps shall have a solid SAE1144 steel shaft supported by two sealed ball bearings. A non-ferrous shaft sleeve shall be employed to completely cover the wetted area under the seal. 4. Pump shall be equipped with an internally flushed mechanical seal assembly. Seal assembly shall have a brass housing, Buna bellows and seat gasket, stainless steel spring, and be of a carbon ceramic design with the carbon face rotating against a stationary ceramic face. 5. Bearing assembly shaft shall connect to either a cast bronze impeller. Impeller shall be hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking capscrew or nut. 6. A flexible type coupling shall be employed between the pump and motor. 7. Pump should be designed to allow for true back pull-out access to the pump's working components for ease of maintenance. 8. Pump volute shall be of cast iron design for heating systems or cast bronze for domestic water systems. The connection style on cast iron and bronze pumps shall be flanged. Volute shall include gauge ports at nozzles,and vent and drain ports. 9. To ensure alignment the motor shall be mounted to the bearing assembly via a bolted motor bracket assembly, and a rubber motor mount shall be used to assist in aligning the motor shaft with the pump shaft. 10. Motors shall meet scheduled horsepower, speed, voltage, and enclosure design. Motors through 1 HP shall be resilient mounted, motors over 1.5 HP shall be ridgid mounted. Motors shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings and must be completely maintenance free. Motors shall be non-overloading at any point on the pump curve and shall meet NEMA specifications. 11. Pump shall be of a maintainable design and for ease of maintenance should use St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 23 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PUMPS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF10 machine fit parts and not press fit components. 12. Pump manufacturer shall be ISO-9001 certified and be of U.S. manufacturer. 13. Each pump shall be factory tested and name-plated before shipment and shall be provided with a(3)year warranty from date of installation. C. Accessories: 1. Where noted on schedule an EPT high PH (7-11) seal should be used in lieu of the Buna standard PH (7-9) seal. EPT seals are applicable on systems with up to 250°F maximum water temperatures. 2.2 PUMP SPECIALTIES: A. Suction Diffuser: 1. Contractor shall furnish and install a suction diffuser on the suction side of pumps as indicated on the drawings. Suction diffuser shall be as manufactured by Bell & Gossett under base bid. Equivalent units as manufactured by Taco or Armstrong may be submitted as deduct alternates. Suction diffusers are not required on systems where 5 pipe diameters of straight pipe is present on the suction side of the pump and a separate strainer is provided. Suction diffusers shall meet sizes and characteristics as specified in the following and as scheduled. 2. Units shall consist of an angle type body with internal straightening vanes that run the full length of the diffuser and a combination diffuser/strainer/orifice cylinder with 3/16" diameter openings for pump protection. The orifice cylinder shall be equipped with a disposable bronze fine 16-mesh strainer, which shall be removed after system start-up. Orifice cylinder shall be designed to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff head and shall have a free area equal to five times cross section area of pump suction opening. Vane length shall be no less than 2 1/2 times the pump connection diameter. Unit shall be provided with a connection point where a field fabricated support foot can be attached to carry weight of suction piping. 3. Diffuser shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and/or workmanship for a period of one year from date of installation. Diffuser manufacturer shall be responsible for any reduction in pump performance or damage due to high pressure drops, internal failures of components or harmonic oscillations caused by the diffuser. B. Double Suction Diffuser: 1. Contractor shall furnish and install a double suction diffuser on the suction side of double suction type pumps as indicated on the drawings. Double suction diffuser shall be as manufactured by Flow Conditioning under base bid. Equivalent units as manufactured by others may be submitted as deduct alternates. Suction diffusers are not required on systems where 5 pipe diameters of straight pipe is present on the suction side of the pump and a separate strainer is provided. Suction diffusers shall meet sizes and characteristics as specified in the following and as scheduled. 2. Units shall consist of a ductile iron double suction angle type body with internal exiting vanes, integrally cast flanges or grooved pump connections, 1/4" gauge tappings, 1-1/2" blowdown connection and pipe support boss. Internal design shall equally split the inlet flow in the vertical plane to equally distribute half of the St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 23 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PUMPS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF10 system flow to each side of a double suction type pump's impeller. An "0" ring sealed removable cover plate shall permit inspection and removal of the double inlet bronze and stainless steel orifice cylinder/venturi assembly in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the pump inlet. Dual covers shall be provided on all units to provide access flexibility. Diffusers for closed system operation shall be equipped with a readily replaceable start-up strainer. Start-up strainer shall be removed from the unit after initial start-up and preserved for future use and proof of removal. Orifice cylinder shall be selected to withstand a pressure differential equal to the pump shutoff head. Clean unit pressure drop shall not exceed 5' at flow corresponding to 10 fps in smaller diffuser size. Unit shall be provided with adjustable support foot to carry weight of suction piping. 3. Diffuser shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and/or workmanship for a period of one year from date of installation. Diffuser manufacturer shall be responsible for any reduction in pump performance or damage due to high pressure drops, internal failures of components or harmonic oscillations caused by the diffuser. C. Triple Duty Valve: 1. Contractor shall furnish and install a triple duty valve on the discharge side of pumps as indicated on the drawings. Triple duty valves shall be as manufactured by Bell & Gossett under base bid. Equivalent units as manufactured by Taco or Armstrong may be submitted as deduct alternates. Triple duty valves are not required on systems where a separate balancing valve, isolation valve, and check valve have been provided. Triple duty valves shall meet sizes and characteristics as specified in the following and as scheduled. 2. The triple duty valve should be sized based on the pump's flow characteristic and at the pump's design flow should provide a minimum 3' pressure drop in its wide-open position. Valve shall be fitted with a bronze seat, replaceable bronze disc with EPDM seat insert, stainless steel stem and chatter preventing stainless steel spring. . Valves shall be designed to permit re-packing under full line pressure. Valves rated to 175 PSIG shall be flanged or NPT cast iron. Valves rated to 300 PSI shall be supplied with grooved cut connections. Valves shall be rated for 250 degrees F. The valve shall be equipped with readout ports to facilitate differential pressure readings across the valve orifice. Pressure drop data for each valve shall be provided for each 10%of valve range. 2.3 SYSTEM SPECIALTIES: • A. Manual Flow Control Valves-(Circuit Setter): 1. Contractor shall furnish and install manual flow control valves on the system as indicated on the drawings. Circuit setters shall be as manufactured by Bell & Gossett under base bid. Equivalent units as manufactured by Taco or Armstrong may be submitted as deduct alternates. Circuit setters shall meet sizes and characteristics as specified in the following and as scheduled. Where sizes or pressures dictate that circuit setters can not be installed an orifice device should be mounted between flanges to determine flow and a separate shutoff valve should be installed for isolation. 2. All sweat connection style valves through 2" to be of bronze body/brass ball St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 23 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PUMPS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF10 construction with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. Valves shall be rated for 200 PSIG at 250°F working temperatures. 3. All NPT connection style valves through 3" to be of bronze body/brass ball construction with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. Valves shall be rated for 300 PSIG at 250°F working temperatures. 4. All flange connection style valves 2 1/2" and larger shall be cast iron or ductile iron construction with bronze seat, replaceable bronze disc with EPDM seal insert, and stainless steel trim. Valves shall be rated for 175 PSIG at 250°F working temperatures with 125#ANSI drilled flanges. 5. All valve sizes and models shall be sized for proper GPM flow, shall be rated for bubble tight shutoff at full rated working pressure to ensure positive shut-off service, shall operate as presettable balance type devices, and shall operate as variable orifice flow measuring devices. Valve readout port shall be fitted with internal EPT inserts and check valves. Valve bodies to have 1/4"NPT tapped drain/purge port. Valves to have memory feature calibrated nameplates to assure specific valve settings, and where noted molded insulation blocks shall be provided to cover the units. Provide differential meter, Bell & Gossett type RO, for measuring pressure drops across valves and all necessary conversion charts and tables. Valve capacities shall be readable as low as 0.2 GPM for 1/2"and 0.35 GPM for 3/4"models with 2' readable pressure drop. Permanent pressure drop created by the valve shall be 1' maximum. 6. Circuit setters are proportional balancing devices and should be field balanced as such. The balancing contractor should correctly perform a proportional balancing sequence to guarantee system balance. Proper sequence includes, but is not limited to, field balancing all valves in a branch to all other valves in that branch based on their specified design proportions, repeat this step on all other branches, then field balancing all branch valves to each other based on their specified design proportions, finally (if needed) adjust the pump triple duty valve to balance the system to its specified flow or perform a pump impeller trim in lieu of adjusting the triple duty valve. When balancing is complete, a balancing report shall be prepared and presented to the Owner including all tagging information, valve locations, valve settings,charts, tables,and other applicable information. B. Air Separator: 1. Contractor shall furnish and install an air separator on the system as indicated on the drawings. Air separator shall be as manufactured by Bell & Gossett under base bid. Equivalent units as manufactured by Taco or Armstrong may be submitted as deduct alternates. Air separator shall meet sizes and characteristics as specified in the following and as scheduled. 2. On systems with main header piping of 2" or smaller a type EAS (Enhanced Air Separator) shall be installed as required for the size and capacities for the systems. Unit shall be constructed of a cast iron body with multiple inlets, allowing the same unit to be used as either an angle or straight pass body. . Unit shall be rated for 150 PSI working pressure and liquid temperatures up to 250°F. An internal coalescing media and strainer constructed of stainless steel shall be used to produce 99% first pass air removal (including microair bubbles). Separated air is sent through a baffle into the top of the unit where it can be vented to atmosphere or piped to a plain steel compression tank. 3. On systems with main header piping of 2-1/2"or greater a "Rolairtrol" air separators St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 23 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PUMPS MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF10 shall be installed as required for the size and capacities for the systems. Unit shall be a centrifugal type air separator having tangential inlet and outlet connections to the vessel's shell. The vessel's diameter shall be 3 times the nominal inlet/outlet pipe diameter and the unit shall have an internal stainless steel air collection tube with 5/32" diameter perforations and 63%open area designed to direct accumulated air to the air discharge connection. The unit shall have a galvanized steel system strainer (if required) having 3/16" diameter perforations and a free area of not less than five (5) times the cross sectional area of the connecting pipe, as well as a blowdown connection on the bottom of the unit to facilitate routine cleaning of the strainer. Unit to be constructed for 125 PSI working pressure and constructed according to the ASME Code, stamped with "U" symbol and supplied with Form U- 1 certifying National Board compliance. 4. On systems where suction diffusers or some other form of strainer is being provided on the suction side of the pumps the "Rolairtrol" does not need to be provided with the internal strainer. Each unit shall be installed and operated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shall be furnished with a performance guarantee. 5. Contractor shall provide blow down valve (piped to floor drain) on units with strainers and shall provide either an air vent to remove the separated air or connect the top of the unit to a plain steel compression tank. D. Expansion Tank: 1. Contractor shall furnish and install a pressurized expansion tank for the system as indicated on the drawings. Expansion tank shall be as manufactured by Bell & Gossett or Wessels under base bid. Equivalent units as manufactured by Taco may be submitted as deduct alternates. Expansion tanks shall meet sizes and characteristics as specified in the following and as scheduled. 2. Pressurized expansion tank shall be of a vertical design with a heavy-duty replaceable bladder. The unit shall be constructed of a welded steel shell ASME rated and stamped for 125 PSIG working pressure installations (where noted 200 or 250 PSI working pressure may be required). The unit shall have a replaceable type bladder constructed of a heavy duty Butyl rubber material. The bladder shall be capable of filling the entire inside volume of the tank. The bladder shall be fixed in place by a flange assembly and shall have a flexible internal sparging tube to minimize bladder failures. The unit shall have a flanged bladder connection for ease of bladder removal and service as well as a NPT system connection. The unit shall be fitted with lifting rings, a floor mounted skirt for vertical installation, a NPT drain plug, and a .302" — 32 charging valve (standard tire valve) connection to facilitate on-site charging of the tank to meet system requirements. The tank comes precharged from the factory at 12 PSIG, but must be field charged, in accordance with the manufacturer's installation manual, to the same pressure as the system's pressure fill valve is set to maintain, on the system. 3. The tank must be designed, constructed and stamped in accordance with Section VIII, Division I of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and registered with the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. 4. Pressurized tank shall only be installed in systems with air removal device. The tanks shall only be installed to take up the system's expansive forces not store air. St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 23 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PUMPS MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF10 On systems where a pressurized expansion tank shall be installed a minimum of one high-capacity automatic air vent should be installed on the top of the air-separating device to vent the separated air to atmosphere. Additionally, a low capacity air vent should be installed in the line that connects the system to the expansion tank to remove any additional trapped air. A pressurized expansion tank must be connected to the system via an interconnecting pipe no smaller than the tank's system connection size; the interconnecting point should be in the main system pipe anywhere between the air separating device and the suction side of the pump. This connection,however, should not be made to the top of the system pipe, but rather the sides or bottom of the system pipe to minimize air entrapment in the connection pipe. 5. Where allowed by the manufacturer and required for installation constraints, pressurized expansion tanks can be mounted in a horizontal position. When installed in a horizontal position the bladder flange must be located at the "Six-O-Clock" position. This installation practice will ensure the longest life expectancy for the bladder during the horizontal installation. F. Automatic Air Vent: 1. Contractor shall furnish and install automatic air vents on the system as indicated on the drawings. Automatic air vents shall be as manufactured by Bell & Gossett or Hoffman under base bid. Equivalent units as manufactured by Taco may be submitted as deduct alternates. Automatic air vents shall meet sizes and characteristics as specified in the following and as scheduled. 2. Air vents shall be designed to vent automatically based on a float principle. Automatic vents shall not be used on systems that use compression tanks. Valves shall be of either a high capacity or low capacity as noted. 3. High capacity valves shall be capable of passing 50 SCFM of air at 100PSI and shall be constructed of a cast iron body with 3/4" system connection; design rated for 150 PSIG at a maximum temperature of 250F. The valve shall prevent air from entering the system if system pressure drops below that of atmospheric pressure, and shall have internal components made of stainless steel, brass, and EPDM. 4. Low capacity valves shall be of a brass body design with a combination '/z" FPT/3/4" MPT connection; rated for 150 PSIG at a maximum temperature of 240F. Provide isolation valve before vent. G. Manual Air Vent: 1. Contractor shall furnish and install manual air vents on the system as indicated on the drawings. Manual air vents shall be as manufactured by Bell & Gossett or Hoffman under base bid. Equivalent units as manufactured by Taco may be submitted as deduct alternates. Manual air vents shall meet sizes and characteristics as specified in the following and as scheduled. 2. Manual air vents shall be loose key/coin operated design and be constructed of a brass body design with a combination 1/8" MPT connections; rated for 150 PSIG at a maximum temperature of 225F. All manual air vents shall be accessibly located. Connect vent tapping at convenient and accessible point where the manual air vent can be located. J. Reducing Valve: 1. Contractor shall furnish and install a reducing valve on the system as indicated on St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 23 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PUMPS MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF10 the drawings. Reducing valve shall be as manufactured by Bell & Gossett under base bid. Equivalent units as manufactured by Taco or Armstrong may be submitted as deduct alternates. Reducing valves shall meet sizes and characteristics as specified in the following and as scheduled. 2. Reducing valve shall be of a diaphragm-operated design and constructed of a cast brass body with NPT or sweat connections. Unit shall be provided with adjustable range, the system's minimum pressure requirement must fall in the valve's adjustment range. Unit shall have low inlet pressure check valve and inlet strainer and have a removable valve seat, strainer, and stem constructed of non-ferrous materials. Unit shall be installed in the field with a three-valve bypass arrangement. This shall ensure that the valve can be bypassed during initial fill and allow for ease maintenance of the valve without requiring system shutdown. K. Relief Valve: 1. Contractor shall furnish and install a relief valve on the system as indicated on the drawings. Relief valve shall be as manufactured by Bell & Gossett under base bid. Equivalent units as manufactured by Taco or Armstrong may be submitted as deduct alternates. Relief valves shall meet sizes, pressure, and BTU/hr requirements as specified in the following and as scheduled. 2. Safety relief valve shall be of a diaphragm-operated design and constructed of either brass or iron bodies with NPT connections. Unit shall be ASME labeled for the scheduled relieving pressure and BTU/hr rate, a unit's BTU/hr. rate must exceed that of the system that it is being connected to at the required relief pressure. The fluid shall not discharge into the spring chamber and the valve shall have a low blowdown differential. The valve seat and internal wetted parts shall be of non-ferrous materials and the diaphragm and seat shall be of an EPDM material. Unit shall be installed with interconnection piping to the system and to drain of the same size as the valve's openings. Piping size reductions between the unit and the system or drain are not allowed by code. Contractor shall provide discharge pipe from relief to a floor drain. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. All components shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Lubricate oil-lubricated pumps before start-up. C. Pumps substitutions shall be provided with connection sizes equal to those scheduled. Pump connections shall not be downsized. D. Pump substitutions shall not be provided at efficiencies less than those scheduled. E. Reduction from line size to pump connection size shall be made with eccentric reducers attached to the pump with tops flat to allow continuity of flow. F. Furnish and install triple duty valves on the discharge side of all pumps and furnish and install a line size shut-off valve on the suction side of all pumps. Anywhere that 5 straight pipe diameters of pipe can not be provided on the inlet side of a pump a suction diffuser shall be used to provide appropriate flow distribution into the eye of the pump's impeller. G. Provide temperature and pressure gauges where and as detailed or directed. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 23 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PUMPS MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF10 H. On systems where pump seals require flushing water or cooling water for a heat exchanger kit. Provide cooling water supply piping and connections and well as the return piping, if required. Piping should be of adequate size to pass required flow rate. I. Proper access space around a device should be left for servicing the component. No less than the minimum recommended by the manufacturer. J. Provide an adequate number of isolation valves for service and maintenance of the system and its components. K. Circulating pump shall have sufficient capacity to circulate the scheduled GPM against the scheduled external head (feet) with the horsepower and speed as scheduled and/or as denoted on the drawings. Motors shall be of electrical characteristics as scheduled, denoted and/or as indicated on the electrical plans and specifications. Pump characteristics shall be such that the head of the pump under varying conditions shall not exceed the rated horsepower of the drive motor. L. On systems where the final balancing procedure requires the triple duty valve to be throttled more than 25%to attain design flow(on a constant speed pumping system), and no future capacity has been built in to the pump the pump impeller must be trimmed to represent actual system head resistance. The pump provider and engineer of record, based on the balancing contractor's reports, shall determine the final impeller trim diameter. M. Mounting of vertical turbine pump motors (shipped loose).shall be the responsibility of the contractor. The motors shall be field mounted in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. N. Install foot mounted and base mounted pumps on vibration isolation pad or house keeping pad,via anchor bolts. Set and level and grout in place. O. All piping shall be brought to equipment and pump connections in such a manner so as to prevent the possibility of any loads or stresses being applied to the connections or piping. All piping shall be fitted to the pumps even though piping adjustments may be required after the pipe is installed. P. On components that require draining, contractor must provide piping to and discharging into appropriate drains. Q. Provide drains for bases and seals,piped to and discharging into floor drains. R. Power wiring, as required, shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor. All wiring shall be performed per manufacturers instruction and applicable state, federal, and local codes. S. Control wiring for remote mounted switches and sensor / transmitters shall be the responsibility of the controls contractor. All wiring shall be performed per manufacturers instructions and applicable state,federal, and local codes. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION; A. The system manufacturer or factory-trained representative shall provide start-up of the any packaged pumping system. This start-up shall include verification of proper installation, system initiation, adjustment and fine-tuning. Start-up shall not be considered complete until the sequence of operation, including alarms, has been sufficiently demonstrated to the owner or the owner's designated representative. This jobsite visit shall occur only after all hook-ups, tie-ins, and terminations have been completed. A start-up reports outlining factory provided start-up and equipment St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 21 23 PERMIT SET HYDRONIC PUMPS MARCH 2013 PAGE 10 OF10 performance shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer after it completion. B. Manufacturer's trained representative shall provide on-site training for any packaged systems for the owner's designated personnel. The training shall fully cover maintenance and operation of all system components. C. Four (4) copies of the maintenance and operation manuals for all HVAC system components shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer. D. The system manufacturer must have complete HVAC training program available for owner's personnel. The training sessions shall take place at the manufacturer's facility and shall cover all aspects of HVAC system design,service, and operation. END OF SECTION St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 31 00 PERMIT SET HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work included: Providing of all required sheet metal ductwork specified or shown on the drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Basic HVAC Requirements,Section 23 00 00. B. HVAC Insulation,Section 23 0700. C. Air Duct Accessories,Section 23 33 00. D. Duct Liners,23 33 53 E. HVAC Fans,Section 23 34 00 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall include Shop Drawings of any proposed revisions to the ductwork as shown on the drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide galvanized sheet metal ductwork for air supply,return;outside air and general exhaust air systems except as specified or shown on the drawings.Provide minimum gauge and reinforcing in accordance with Chapter 16 of the 2004 Edition of the ASHRAE Handbook and as recommended by the latest edition of the"IIVAC Duct Construction Standard"published by SMACNA.Dust collection ductwork minimum gauge allowed is 20 gauge. B. Provide galvanized spiral seam ductwork where round ductwork is exposed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Construct and assemble all supply,return,outside air and general exhaust duct systems in accordance with latest edition of the"HVAC Duct Construction Standards"published by SMACNA,Chapter Sixteen,"Duct Construction"of the Chapter 16 of the 2004 ASHRAE Handbook and the appropriate chapters of the latest edition of the Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code.+ St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 31 00 PERMIT SET HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 2 B. Cross brake and reinforce ductwork and plenums with structural steel members to prevent breathing or ballooning. C. All joints in the air distribution system shall be sealed airtight with Hardcast or 3-M Duct Sealer 800. D. Provide acoustical lining where specified in Sections 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation and 23 33 53, Duct Lining. All duct dimensions shown are inside net. E. Provide services of a sheet metal man familiar with the system ductwork to provide assistance to the balancing agency during the initial phases of air balancing in locating all sheet metal dampers. Install missing dampers.Install additional dampers as required by the system balance contractor for him to accomplish his work. F. Duct construction pressure classification(SMACNA):As required for design velocities/static pressures. Dust collection system pressure classification will be a negative 16.0"w.g.. G. Maximum air conditioning supply and exhaust air duct velocities to be 1300 feet per minute. Maximum return air duct velocities to be 1000 feet per minute. END OF SECTION St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 33 00 PERMIT SET AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 4 SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work included: Providing of all required air duct accessories required. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Basic HVAC Requirements,Section 23 00 00. B. HVAC Ducts and Casings,Section 23 31 00. C. Air Outlets and Inlets,Section 23 3700. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 23 33 00. B. Submittals shall include:Manufacturer's catalog or technical data showing performance,dimensions, materials of construction and recommended methods of installation. 1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Provide O&M data in accordance with Section 23 33 00. B. O&M data shall include: Manufacturer's literature and maintenance instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Damper regulators and end bearings:Duro-Dyne,Ventlock or approved equal.Duro-Dyne used as basis of selection. B. Turning vanes:Duro Dyne,Elgen All-Tight,General Sheet Metal or approved equal. C. Duct access doors:Greenheck,Cesco,Ruskin or approved equal. D. Flexible connections:Duro-Dyne or approved equal.Duro-Dyne used as basis of selection. E. Fire,ceiling and combination smoke/fire dampers:Greenheck,Nailor-Hart,National Controlled Air,Safe Air,Ruskin,Prefco or approved equal.Greenheck used as basis of selection. 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Damper regulators and end bearings:3/8-inch Figure SRH-288 for accessible ductwork and Figure SRC-380 for concealed ductwork. 2. Volume dampers shall be of 18 gage galvanized steel and have a continuous galvanized steel shaft. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 33 00 PERMIT SET AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 4 B. Turning vanes: Airfoil double-blade turning vanes. Single-bladed,shop fabricated turning vanes are not acceptable except for supply diffuser plenums,see detail on drawings. C. Duct access doors: Galvanized sheet metal duct access doors with cam latch operators and gasketed seal. D. Flexible connections:Duro-Dyne"Insulflex"insulated flexible duct connector. E. Fire dampers:continuous spring steel curtain closing by its own inertia from any position. Positive lock in closed position.Damper opening to be 100%of duct free area.Fire damper to meet all U.L. and NFPA requirements. F. Ceiling Dampers: Continuous heat retardant blanket spring operated with positive lock in closed position for use in the airstream.U.L.and NFPA approved thermal blanket to be used for added protection where required. G. Combination Fire and Smoke dampers(SD/FLD):Greenheck FSD-22(1-1/2 hour rated Combination Fire/Smoke Damper),Greenheck OPSD-22(1-1/2 hour rated Combination Fire/Smoke Damper with actuator in airstream),Greenheck FSD-28(3 hour rated Combination Fire/Smoke Damper); 1. Assembly to be UL listed for use as a combination fire/smoke damper. 2. Minimum leakage Class II rated smoke damper with 120 volt/I phase electric actuators. Smoke dampers to be powered open,spring return close.Frame construction of 16-gauge galvanized channel, 16-gauge galvanized steel blades;oil impregnated bronze bearings, linkage located out of the airstream with stainless steel pivots,silicon rubber seals. 3. Smoke damper and actuator combination to meet all U.L.and NFPA requirements. 4. Provide automatic reset button and damper indicator light(s)to visibly indicate damper position. 5. Provide contacts/relays to allow smoke damper monitoring by the building fire alarm system. H. Louvers:Prefabricated galvanized sheet metal fixed stormproof blades with frame to suit building construction,and with Y2"x''/2", 16 gauge galvanized wire mesh on back side of all intake louvers and insect screen on exhaust/relief louvers.4"deep,45 degree fixed drainable type blade,AMCA 500 tested for 800 fpm without water penetration,and maximum of 0.07"wg intake pressure loss and 0.09"wg exhaust pressure loss.Provide"Kynar"protective coating and stainless steel fasteners(ASTM A167,type 302,cadmium finish,ASTM A165 type NS)Ruskin,Greenheck, Cesco,American Warming or approved. I. Motorized back draft dampers 1. Manufacturer:Ruskin,Greenheck,Cook or Equal. 2. Fabrication: a. Frame: 2 inches x minimum 0.090 inch(51 x minimum 2.3 mm)6063-T5 extruded aluminum channel with[front flange and]mitered corners. b. Blades: • Style: Single-piece,overlap frame. • Action: Parallel. • Orientation: Horizontal. • Material: Minimum 0.025 inch(0.6 mm)6063-T5 formed aluminum. • Width: Maximum 6 inches(152 mm). c. Bearings: Corrosion-resistant,long-life, synthetic, formed as single piece with" St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 33 00 PERMIT SET AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 4 axles. d. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl,mechanically attached to blade edge. e. Linkage: Concealed in frame. f. Axles: Corrosion-resistant,long-life,synthetic,locked to blade and formed as single piece with bearings. g. Mounting: Horizontal,air flow up. h. Finish: Mill aluminum. 3. Performance Data: a. Temperature Rating: Withstand-40 to 200 degrees F(-40 to 93 degrees C). b. Capacity: Demonstrate capacity of damper to withstand HVAC system operating conditions. • Closed Position: Maximum back pressure of 4.5 inches w.g. (1.1 kPa). • Open Position: Maximum air velocity of 1,000 feet per minute(305 m/min) c. Operation of Blades: • Start to Open: 0.03 inch w.g. (0.01 kPa). • Fully Open: 0.10 inch w.g. (0.02 kPa). d. Pressure Drop: Maximum 0.06 inch w.g. (0.01 kPa)at 1,000 feet per minute(305 in/min)through 24 inch x 24 inch(610 x 610 mm)damper. 4. Accessories: a. Actuator: Electric: 24 V,60 Hz,two-position b. Fail Position: Open c. Mounting: External sideplate\ d. Factory Sleeve: Minimum 20 gage(1.0 mm)thickness,minimum 6 inches(152 mm) length. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide volume dampers in all branch ducts to outlets and where shown on drawings. Provide regulators on all dampers. Assure that all dampers are aligned with their regulator pointers and left open for the air balance contractor.Permanently mark full open and full closed positions. B. Provide turning vanes in all mitered elbows. C. Provide duct access panels as required to service and reset dampers and other mechanical appurtenances requiring periodic maintenance. D. Provide flexible connections between all fans and connected ducts or plenums. Install with 2- inch space between the fan and connecting duct.Fabric should be snug,but not tight.Secure with flanged connections with accurate alignment between fan and duct. E. Fire,ceiling and combination smoke/fire dampers 1.Provide fire,ceiling and combination smoke/fire dampers where required by the building construction.Verify with architectural drawings and building life safety summaries.Provide installation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,NFPA requirements and the U.L.listing. 2. Coordinate with the building Architectural drawings to determine construction ratings and locations required. 3. Provide access doors for visual inspection and resetting fire dampers in ductwork.Provide access doors or panels through other construction as required for inspection and resetting. Control combination fire and smoke dampers from building fire alarm system.Dampers to reset St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 33 00 PERMIT SET AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 4 open after alarm is reset. 3. Locate smoke damper reset buttons for convenient service access F. Motorized Backdraft Dampers 1. Install dampers at locations indicated on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Install dampers square and free from racking with blades running horizontally. 3. Do not compress or stretch damper frame into duct or opening. 4. Handle damper using[sleeve or] frame. Do not lift damper using blades actuator. END OF SECTION St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 34 00 PERMIT SET HVAC FANS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 1 SECTION 23 34 00 HVAC FANS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Providing of all required fans as noted in the contract documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Basic HVAC Requirements,Section 23 0000. B. Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment, Section 23 05 53. C. Testing,Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC, Section 23 05 93. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 23 00 00. B. Submittals shall include: Manufacturer's catalog or technical data showing performance, dimensions, materials of construction and recommended methods of installation. 1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Provide O&M data in accordance with Section 15010. B. O&M data shall include manufacturer's literature and maintenance instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Fans: Greenheck, Panasonic, Cook, Penn or approved equal. 22 DESCRIPTION A. Inline exhaust fans: Belt drive,forward curved centrifugal wheel, sleeve bearings, motor and wheel external spring vibration isolators; provide duct connection with backdraft dampers on discharge. Size and capacity as indicated on Drawings. Provide neoprene flexible connections on intake and discharge. Reversomatic or Equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount the fans in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide flexible connections as applicable on inlet and discharge duct connections. C_ Connect ductwork as required. D. Coordinate with electrical sub-contractor for power and control operation. 3.2 CONTROL: 1.Wiring:All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and Local Electrical Codes. END OF SECTION St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 37 00 PERMIT SET AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work included: Providing of all required grilles. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Basic Mechanical Requirements,Section 23 00 00. B. HVAC Ducts and Casings,Section 23 31 00. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 15010. B. Submittals shall include manufacturer's catalog or technical data showing performance, dimensions,and materials of construction and recommended methods of installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Price,Krueger,Anemostat,Titus,J&J,Carnes or approved equal.Titus used as a basis for selection unless specified. 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Supply Air Diffuser-Ceiling Surface Mount:Model MCD louver face diffuser with individually adjustable modular cores and neck size shown on the drawings.Diffuser to have modular core,steel construction and standard finish with border for flat surface mounting. B. Ceiling Supply Air Grille(Auditorium):Model 350 rectangular steel construction grille,double deflection with horizontal face bars,spaced at 3/4", 1-114"margins and standard finish. C. Supply Air Diffuser-Lay-In T-bar Mount:Model MCD louver face diffuser with individually adjustable modular cores and neck size shown on the drawings.Diffuser to have modular core,steel construction and standard finish with border for flush mounting in standard 24"X24"lay-in T-bar ceiling. D. Return and Exhaust Air Grilles-Surface Mount:Model PAR grille with perforated face of neck size shown on the drawings with standard finish with border for flush mounting hard ceiling. E. Return and Exhaust Air Grilles-Lay-in T-Bar Mount:Model PAR grille with perforated face of neck size shown on the drawings with standard finish with border for flush mounting in standard 24"X24"lay-in T-bar ceiling. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 37 00 PERMIT SET AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 2 F. Sidewall Supply Air Grille:Model 350 rectangular steel construction grille,double deflection with horizontal face bars,spaced at 3/4", 1-114"margins and standard finish. G. High Sidewall Return Air Grille: Model 355 rectangular steel construction grille,35- degree blade setting on 112-inch centers, 1-1/4"margins and standard finish. H. Low Sidewall Return Air Grille: Series 355 rectangular steel construction grille,35- degree blade setting on 112-inch centers, 1-1/4"margins and standard finish. I. Provide opposed blade dampers in normally unoccupied spaces only. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install grilles where shown on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install all grilles tight to their respective mounting surfaces. C. Install plumb and true with room dimensions and accurately centered on projections as shown on architectural reflected ceiling plans. D. Verify any special paint or color requirements prior to ordering grilles. E. Select Grilles to maintain room NC levels under specified parameters with maximum air volume of 800 cfm per supply grille in the manufacturing area,400 cfm per supply grille in the office areas, 600 elm per return/exhaust grille in the office areas. END OF SECTION St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 37 23 PERMIT SET HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 1 SECTION 23 37 23 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide roof caps as required and specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Basic HVAC Requirements, Section 23 00 00. B. HVAC Ducts and Casings,Section 23 31 00. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's catalog or technical data substantiating performance required and methods of installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Greenheck, Penn, Cook or approved substitution. 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Roof caps shall be of heavy gauge spun aluminum wind band with rolled bead. Curb cap to be of heavy gauge aluminum construction, unit to be manufactured for curb mounting shown on drawings. Free area vent sizes to provide maximum discharge velocities of 750 FPM/maximum intake velocity of 500 FPM. Provide factory curb, motorized damper/counter balanced back draft damper as required and bird screen. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install roof caps where required for rooftop duct terminations. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Coordinate installation with roof construction. Flash and counter flash as required by the architectural contract documents. D. Sequence motorized damper operation with unit served. Dampers to close on unit shutdown. END OF SECTION St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 41 00 PERMIT SET AIR FILTERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 1 SECTION 23 41 00 AIR FILTERS PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work included: Providing of all disposable filters for air handling units. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Basic HVAC Requirements, Section 23 00 00. B. Rooftop Packaged Air Conditioners, Section 23 75 00 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 15010. B. Submittals shall include manufacturer's catalog or technical data substantiating performance required. 1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Not required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Air Filters: Farr, American Filter, Continental or approved equal. Farr used for selection. 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Air Filters: Farr 30/30 two-inch thick pleated disposable type(size as required- coordinate with air handling dimensional data)with a maximum face velocity of 450 FPM. Provide two complete sets of filters. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install filters in the rooftop units prior to system start-up during construction. Install a clean set of the specified filters upon job completion or when requested by the air balance contractor. END OF SECTION St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 52 39 PERMIT SET CAST IRON BOILERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 10 SECTION 23 52 39 CAST IRON BOILERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Cast iron boilers. 2. Boiler control panel. 3. Natural gas fired burner. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00—Cast-in-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for concrete housekeeping pads specified by this section. 2. Section 22 11 23—Facility Fuel Piping: Execution requirements for oil and gas piping connections to boilers specified in this section. 3. Section 23 05 48—Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for Vibration Isolators for placement by this section. 4. Section 23 05 55—HVAC Motors: Product requirements for electric motors for placement by this section. 5. Section 22 11 00—Facility Water Distribution: Execution requirements for cold water piping connections to boilers specified in this section. 6. Section 23 21 13—Hydronic Piping: Execution requirements for hot water and steam piping for piping connections to boilers specified in this section. 7. Section 23 51 00—Breeching,Chimneys,and Stacks: Execution requirements for breeching,chimney,and stack connections to boilers specified in this section. 8. Division 26—Equipment Wiring Connections:Execution requirements for electric connections to boilers specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AGA(American Gas Association)-Directory of Certified Appliances and Accessories. B. AGA Z21.13 (American Gas Association)-Gas-Fired Low-Pressure Steam and Hot Water Boilers. C. ASME Section IV(American Society of Mechanical Engineers)-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code-Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers. D. HI(Hydronics Institute)-Testing and Rating Standard for Cast Iron and Steel Heating Boilers. E. NEMA 250(National Electrical Manufacturers Association)-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum). St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 52 39 PERMIT SET CAST IRON BOILERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 10 F. NFPA 54(National Fire Protection Association)-National Fuel Gas Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00-Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit capacities and accessories included with boiler. Include general layout,dimensions,size and location of water,fuel,electric and vent connections, electrical characteristics,weight and mounting loads. C. Test Reports: Indicate boilers meet or exceed specified performance and efficiency. Submit results of combustion test. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly,support details,connection requirements,and include start-up instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate:Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Manufacturers Field Reports: Indicate condition of equipment after start-up including control settings and performance chart of control system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 77 00-Closeout Procedures: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature,operating instructions,cleaning procedures,replacement parts list,and maintenance and repair data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ASME Section IV and AGA Z21.13 Code for construction of boilers. Provide boilers registered with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. B. Gas Train and Safety Controls:Conform to requirements of Factory Mutual(FM). C. Unit Certification: AGA certified. D. Conform to applicable code for internal wiring of factory wired equipment. E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection:Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories,Inc.,as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. F. Perform Work in accordance with all applicable codes. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience,and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Section 01 31 00-Project Management and Coordination: Pre-installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section. 1.8 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Section 01-60 00-Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 52 39 PERMIT SET CAST IRON BOILERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 10 B. Accept boilers and accessories on site in factory shipping packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect boilers from damage by leaving packing in place until installation. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.10 WARRANTY A. ' Section 01 77 00-Closeout Procedures: Product warranties and product bonds. 1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Section 01 77 00-Closeout Procedures: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish wire brush and handle for fire-tube boiler cleaning. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDENSING CAST IRON BOILERS C. Manufacturers: 1. Hydrotherm Model K.N. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00—Product Requirements. D. Design: Boilers shall be CSA design certified as a condensing boiler. Boilers shall be designed for a minimum of 5:1 continuous turn down with constant CO2 over the turndown range. The boiler shall operate with natural gas and have a CSA International certified input rating as noted on the drawings,and a thermal efficiency rating up to 99% at minimum input. The boiler shall be symmetrically air-fuel coupled such that changes in combustion air flow or flue flows affect the BTUH input without affecting combustion quality. The boiler will automatically adjust input for altitude and temperature induced changes in air density. The boiler will use a proven pilot interrupted spark ignition system. The boiler shall use a UL approved flame safeguard ignition control system using UV detection flame sensing. The UV detector shall be air cooled to prevent condensate formation and so designed as to prevent misalignment. The design shall provide for silent burner ignition and operation. The boiler shall be down fired counter flow such that formed condensate always moves toward a cooler zone to prevent re- evaporation. An aluminum corrosion resistant condensate drain designed to prevent pooling and accessible condensate trap shall be provided. Boiler shall be able to vent a horizontal distance of 80 equivalent feet with a vent diameter equivalent to the combustion chamber outlet diameter. E. Service Access: The boilers shall be provided with access covers for easily accessing all serviceable components. The boilers shall not be manufactured with large enclosures, which are difficult to remove and reinstall. All accesses must seal completely as not to disrupt the sealed combustion process. All components must be accessible and able to adjust with the removal of a single cover or cabinet component. F. Indicating Lights: Each boiler shall include a diagnostic control panel with a full text display indicating the condition of all interlocks and the BTUH input percentage. Access to the controls shall be through a completely removable cover leaving diagnostic panel intact and not disrupted. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 52 39 PERMIT SET CAST IRON BOILERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 10 2.2.1 COMPONENTS G. Combustion Chamber: The combustion chamber shall be constructed of cast-iron. It shall be a down-fired design utilizing light weight refractory around the burner housing. H. Heat Exchanger: Boilers shall be a cast iron sectional unit designed for pressure firing and shall be constructed and tested for 100 P.S.I.water working pressure,in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Section IV Rules for the Construction of Heating Boilers. Individual sections will have been subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test of 250 PSIG at the factory before shipment and they shall be marked,stamped or cast with the A.S.M.E. Code symbol. Boilers with less than 250-psi pressure test will not be acceptable for this project. The sections shall be of a down fired counter flow single-pass design. Water ports will be sealed with graphite port connectors. The sections will be fully machined for metal to metal sealing of the gas side surfaces. The design will provide for equal temperature rise through all sections. The heat exchanger shall be designed to prevent fluid boiling. The iron shall have a minimum thickness of The heat exchanger design should have no limitations on temperature rise or restrictions to inlet water temperature and a Cv of 60(KN-6), 100(KN-10),and 190(KN-20). Jackets: Stainless Steel. J. Gas Burner: The burner shall be metal fiber mesh construction,allowing high turndown of the fuel-air mixture. The burner flame shall burn horizontally and be of the pre-mix type with a forced draft fan. Burner shall fire to provide equal distribution of heat throughout the entire heat exchanger. The burner shall be easily removed for maintenance without the disruption of any other major component of the boiler. A window view port shall be provided for visual inspection of the boiler during firing. The gas distribution components and burner shall be enclosed with a cast-aluminum housing. K. Ignition Components: The ignition hardware shall consist of Alumina ceramic insulated ignition electrodes and UV sensing tube permanently arranged to ensure proper ignition electrode and UV alignment. L. Rated Capacity: The boiler shall be capable of operating at rated capacity with pressures as low as 2"W.C. at the inlet to the burner pressure regulator. M. The burner shall be capable of 99%efficiency without exceeding a Nox reading above 1 l ppm. N. The burner and gas train shall be provided with the following trim and features: 1. Burner Firing: Full modulation with 5:1 turndown @ Continuous CO2. 2. Burner Ignition: Intermittent spark 3. Safety Controls: Energize ignition,limit time for establishing flame,prevent opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven,stop gas flow on ignition failure, and allow gas valve to open. 4. Flue-Gas Collector: Enclosed combustion chamber with integral combustion-air- blower and single venting connection. 5. Gas Train: Manual gas valves(2),main gas valve(solenoid),manual test and check valves,pilot gas pressure regulator,and automatic pilot gas valve. All components to be factory mounted and CSD-1 compliant. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 52 39 PERMIT SET CAST IRON BOILERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 10 6. Safety Devices: Low gas pressure switch,air-flow switch,and blocked flue detection switch,low water cutoff(manual reset),high temperature manual reset. All safeties to be factory mounted. 7. Individual gas regulator provide by factory,shipped loose for field installation, one per boiler. 2.3 BOILER TRIM O. Controls: The boiler control package shall be a MTI Heat-Net or equivalent,integrated boiler management system. The control system must be integral to each boiler,creating a control network that eliminates the need for a"wall mount"stand-alone boiler system control. Additional standalone control panels,independent of a Building Management System(BMS),shall not be allowed to operate the boiler network. The Heat-Net control shall be capable of operating in the following ways: 1. As a stand alone boiler control system using the Heat-Net protocol,with one "Master"and multiple"Member"untis. 2. As a boiler network,enabled by a Building Management System(BMS),using the Heat-Net protocol,with one"Master"and multiple"Member"units. 3. As"Member"boilers to a Building Management System(BMS)with multiple input control methods. MASTER: A Boiler becomes a Master when a resistance type 10K sensor is connected to the J10 "SYS/DHW HEADER"terminals. The sensor shall be auto detected. The Master senses and controls the header/loop temperature utilizing a system setpoint. It uses any boilers it finds"Heat-Net Members"or those defined in the control setup menus to accomplish this. The"Master"shall also have the option of monitoring Outside Air Temperature "OA"to provide full outdoor air reset functionality. Only one master shall be allowed in the boiler network. When operating as a"Master",the Heat-net control provides a stand alone method using a PID algorithm to regulate water temperature. The algorithm allows a single boiler "Master"or multiple"Master+Member"boilers in a network of up to 16 total boilers. The control algorithm is based upon a control band,at the center of which is the setpoint. While below the control band,boilers are staged on and modulated up until the control band is entered. Once in a the control band,modulation is used to maintain setpoint. Optimized system efficiency is always accomplished by setting the Modulation Maximum"Mod-Max"setting to exploit each boiler in the network's inverse efficiency curve. The control shall operate so that the maximum number of boilers required,operate at their lowest inputs until all boilers are firing. Once all boilers are firing,the modulation clamp is removed and all boilers are allowed to fire above this clamped percentage up to 100%. This"boiler efficiency"clamp is defaulted to 80%and thus limits all the boilers individual outputs to 80%until the last boiler fires. The 80%default must be field adjustable for varying operating conditions. All boilers modulate up and down together always at the same modulation rate. Boilers are shut down only when the top of the band is breached,or before the top of the band,if the control anticipates that there is a light load. Timers shall also be included in each control in the network to - prevent any boiler from short cycling. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 52 39 PERMIT SET CAST IRON BOILERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 10 MEMBER: Additional boilers in the network always default to the role of member. The lack of sensors connected to the J10 terminals"SYS/DHW Header"on each additional boiler shall ensure this. Each"Member"shall sense its supply outlet water temperature and modulate based on signals from a Building Management System(BMS)or"Master"boiler. When operating as a member,starting,stopping,and firing rate shall also be controlled by the`BMS"or "Master"boiler. When using the Heat-Net protocol,the system setpoint shall be sent from the"Master", along with the modulation value to control firing rate. It also receives its command to start or stop over the Heat-Net cable. Each"Member"will continuously monitor its supply outlet temperature against its operating limit. If the supply temperature approaches the operating limit temperature(adjustable),the boilers input control rate is limited and its modulation value decreases to minimize short cycling. If the operating limit is exceeded,the boiler shall shut off. Each Heat-Net control in the boiler network shall have the following standard features: 4. Digital Communications Control: a. Boiler to Boiler: Heat-Net b. Building Management System(BMS): MODBUS standard protocol. c. Building Management System(BMS): BACnet and LonWorks optional protocols. 5. Analog 4:20 and 0-10vdc also supported. 6. Distributed control using Heat-Net protocol for up to 16 total boilers. 7. System/Boiler operating status in English text display. 8. Interlock,Event,and System logging with a time stamp. 9. Advanced PID algorithm optimized for specific boilers(KN-Series). 10. Four dedicated temperature sensor inputs for: Outside Air Temperature, Supply (Outlet) Temperature,Return Temperature(Inlet),and Header Temperature. 11. Automatically detects the optional temperature sensors on start up. 12. Menu driven calibration and setup menus with a bright 4-line Vacuum Fluorescent Display. 13. (8)Dedicated 24vac interlock monitors and 8 dedicated 120vac system monitors used for diagnostics and providing feedback of faults and system status. 14. Multiple boiler pump or motorized boiler valve control modes. 15. Combustion Air Damper control with proof time. 16. Optional USB/RS485 network plug-in to allow firmware updates or custom configurations. 17. Optional BACNet and LonWorks interface. 18. Alarm contacts. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 52 39 PERMIT SET CAST IRON BOILERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 10 19. Runtime hours. 20. Outdoor Air Reset with programmable ratio. 21. Time of Day clock to provide up to four(4)night setback temperatures. 22. Failsafe mode when a Building Management System(BMS)is controlling setpoint If communications is lost,the boiler/system shall run off the Local Setpoint. P. Safety-Relief Valve: ASME rated,factory set to protect boiler and piping as per schedule/drawings. 100 psi maximum allowable working pressure. Q. Gauge: Combination water pressure and temperature shipped factory installed. LCD outlet temperature readout to be an integral part of the front boiler control panel display to allow for consistent easy monitoring of temperatures factory mounted and wired. R. Burner Controls: Boiler shall be provided with a Honeywell RM7800 series digital flame safe guard with UV rectification. The flame safe guard shall be capable of both pre and post purge cycles. S. High Limit: Temperature control with manual-reset limits boiler water temperature in series with the operating control. High Limit shall be factory mounted and sense the outlet temperature of the boiler through a dry well. T. Provide the following standard time: 1. Aluminum Condensate Receiver Pan 2. Low Air Pressure Switch 3. Blocked Flue Detection Switch 4. Modulation Control 5. Temperature/Pressure Gauge 6. Manual Reset High Limit 7. Low Gas Pressure Safety Switch 8. Low Water Cutoff with Manual Reset(CSD-1) 9. Gas Pressure Regulator to provide 4"Incoming Pressure to Main Gas Valve— Shipped Loose for Field Installation. 10. Air Inlet Filter 11. Supply Outlet Temperature Display 12. Full Digital Text Display for all Boiler Series of Operation and Failures 13. Air Inlet Filter 14. Variable Frequency Drive and Combustion Air Fan with Safety Interlock 15. Condensate Drain U. Provide the following job specific trim and features: 1. High Gas Pressure Switch and Valve Proving Switch for IRI Compliant Gas Train. 1.12 MOTORS A. Refer to Division 23 Section"Motors"for factory-installed motors. B. Boiler Blower Motor: Blower motor shall be externally mounted for ease of service. There shall be no requirement to remove covers or gas train components to remove the blower motor. The Kl-6 Blower shall be .5 HP and FLA not to exceed 5 Amps. The St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 52 39 PERMIT SET CAST IRON BOILERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 10 KN-10 Blower shall be 5.HP and FLA not to exceed 8 Amps. The.KN-20 Blower shall be 1 HP and FLA not to exceed 11 Amps. 1.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect boilers according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section N. Boilers shall be test fired in the factory with a report attached permanently to the exterior cabinet of the boiler for field reference. 1.14 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Division 26-Wiring Connections: Requirements for electrical characteristics. B. Section 23 05 55—HVAC Motors: Requirements for motors. C. Disconnect Switch:Refer to Division 26. 1.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements: Testing,inspection,and analysis requirements. B. Make completed fire-tube boilers available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to packaging for shipment. Notify Owner at least seven days before inspection time. C. Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturers test facility. Notify Owner at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled. PART 3 EXECUTION 1.16 INSTALLATION A. Install boilers plumb and level,to plus or minus 1/16 inch over boiler base. B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over boilers. C. Install boiler on concrete housekeeping pad,minimum 3-1/2 inches high and 6 inches larger than boiler base on each side. Refer to Section 03 30 00. D. Install boiler on vibration isolators in accordance with Section 23 05 48. E. Connect natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. F. Connect natural gas piping to boiler,full size of boiler gas train inlet. Arrange piping with clearances for burner removal and service. G. Connect steam and condensate piping to supply and return boiler connections. H. Install the following piping accessories. Refer to Section 23 21 13. 1. On supply: a. Thermometer well for temperature controller. b. Thermometer well and thermometer. c. Well for control system temperature sensor. d. Strainer. e. Nipple and flow switch. f. Pressure gage. g. Shutoff valve. 2. On return: St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 52 39 PERMIT SET CAST IRON BOILERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF 10 a. Thermometer well and thermometer. b. Well for control system temperature sensor. c. Pressure gage. d. Shutoff valve. e. Balancing valve. 1. Install the following piping accessories on natural gas piping connections. 1. Strainer. 2. Pressure gage. 3. Shutoff valve. 4. Check valve. 5. Pressure reducing valve. J. Install discharge piping from relief valves and drain valves to nearest floor drain. K. Install boiler trim and accessories furnished loose for field mounting. L. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. M. Install control wiring between boiler control panel and field mounted control devices. N. Connect flue to boiler outlet,full size of outlet. O. Install Work in accordance with all applicable codes and standards. 1.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform combustion test including boiler firing rate,over fire draft,gas flow rate,heat input,burner manifold gas pressure,percent carbon monoxide,percent oxygen,percent excess air,flue gas temperature at outlet,ambient temperature,net stack temperature, percent stack loss,percent combustion efficiency,and heat output. Perform test at minimum and high fire. B. Arrange with local authorities having jurisdiction for inspection of boiler,piping,and for certificate of operation. 1.18 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements: Requirements for manufacturer's field services. B. Start-up boilers according to manufacturer's start-up instructions and in presence of boiler manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Adjust burner for maximum burning efficiency. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 1.19 CLEANING A. Section 01 77 00-Closeout Procedures: Requirements for cleaning. B. Flush and clean boilers upon completion of installation,in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. 1.20 DEMONSTRATION A. Section 01 77 00-Closeout Procedures: Requirements for demonstration and training. B. Demonstrate operation and maintenance procedures. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 52 39 PERMIT SET CAST IRON BOILERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 10 OF 10 C. Furnish services for manufacturer's technical representative for one 8-hour day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of boilers. Schedule training with Owner,provide at least 7 days notice to Architect/Engineer of training date. END OF SECTION St_ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 62 00 PERMIT SET PACKAGED CONDENSING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 6 SECTION 23 62 00 PACKAGED CONDENSING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes air-cooled, packaged refrigerant compressor and condenser units, suitable for[on-the-ground] [or] [rooftop] installation. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Compressor, condenser units, and associated motors shall perform satisfactorily in the following service conditions: 1. Elevation: 7500 feet above sea level. 2. Maximum ambient temperature: 104 degrees F. 3. Minimum ambient temperature: -20 degrees F. 4. 24-hour average temperature: not exceeding 86 degrees F. 5. Maximum solar heat gain: 110 W/sq ft. B. Supplier-provided control systems, including instruments, signal transmissions, panels, cabinets, and other instrumentation and control requirements shall be coordinated with the l&C Subcontractor and in accordance with Section 25 5000, "Integrated Automated Facility Controls". Some equipment controls are specified in other portions of the subcontract documents. As part of the work of this section, coordinate with these other suppliers and trades to provide a complete and working equipment controls. C. It is the responsibility of the bidder to read and conform to all sections of the specifications, review all subcontract drawings of all divisions, and coordinate with all equipment suppliers of material specified under other sections of the specifications. D. Seismic Protection and Performance: The seismic protection and performance of air- cooled packaged compressor and condenser units shall be in accordance with Section 22 0548,Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 1.3 REFERENCES(Conformance to Codes and Standards as Applicable to Project) A. Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) 1. AHRI 210/240— Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment. 2. AHRI 270—Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 62 00 PERMIT SET PACKAGED CONDENSING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 6 3. AHRI 340/360—Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air- Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment. 4. AHRI 365—Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Condensing Units. 5. AHRI 370—Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Equipment. 6. AHRI 460—Performance Rating of Remote Mechanical-Draft Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 1. ASHRAE 15—Safety Standard for Mechanical Refrigeration. 2. ASH RAE 20— Method of Testing for Rating Remote Mechanical-Draft Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers. 3. ASHRAE 23—Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and Condensing Units. 4. ASHRAE 90.1 —Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA) 1. NEMA 250— Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum). D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70—National Electric Code. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. UL 207—Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical. 2. UL 1995—Heating and Cooling Equipment. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each air-cooled packaged compressor and condenser unit, include rated capacities,operating characteristics,furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate components,assembly, dimensions, weights and loading, required clearances, location and size of field connections, electrical requirements, and wiring diagrams for power, signal and control wiring. Include schematic layouts showing condenser, refrigeration compressors, cooling coils, refrigerant piping and accessories required for complete system. Include plans,elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 62 00 PERMIT SET PACKAGED CONDENSING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 6 D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic restraints indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the NM licensed professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Installation details including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails and equipment mounting frames. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, and any nationally recognized testing laboratory(NRTL), and marked for intended location and application. B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." C. Performance Ratings: Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio(SEER) not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, Section 6, "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." 1.6 WARRANTY A. The equipment manufacturer shall provide, at no additional cost, a standard parts warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of compressor and condenser units that fail in materials or workmanship within the warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: • a. Compressor failure. b. Condenser coil leak. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. General: Factory-assembled, single piece, air-cooled condensing unit. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, compressor, holding charge, and special features required prior to field start-up. B. Unit Cabinet: 2. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and coated with a prepainted baked enamel finish. 3. A heavy-gauge roll-formed perimeter base rail with forklift slots and lifting holes shall be provided to facilitate rigging. C. Condenser Fans: 1. Condenser fans shall be direct driven, propeller type,discharging air vertically upward. St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 62 00 PERMIT SET PACKAGED CONDENSING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 6 2. Fan blades shall be balanced. 3. Condenser fan discharge openings shall be equipped with PVC-coated steel wire safety guards. 4. Condenser fan and motor shaft shall be corrosion resistant. D. Compressor: 1. Compressor shall be of the hermetic scroll type. 2. Compressor shall be mounted on rubber grommets. 3. Compressors shall include overload protection. 4. Compressors shall be equipped with a crankcase heater. 5. Compressor shall be equipped with internal high pressure and high temperature protec- tion. 6. 38AUZ*16 and 25 sizes shall use two scroll compressors manifold together. E.Condenser Coils: 1.Standard Aluminum fin-Copper Tube Coils: a.Standard evaporator and condenser coils shall have aluminum lanced plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless internally grooved copper tubes with all joints brazed. b.Evaporator coils shall be leak tested to 150 psig, pressure tested to 450 psig,and qualified to UL 1995 burst test at 1775 psig. c.Condenser coils shall be leak tested to 150 psig, pressure tested to 650 psig,and qualified to UL 1995 burst test at 1980 psig. F. Refrigeration Components:Refrigeration circuit components shall include liquid line service valve, suction line service valve, a full charge of compressor oil, and a partial holding charge of refrigerant. G. Controls and Safeties: 1.Minimum control functions shall include: f. Control wire terminal blocks. g. Compressor lockout on auto-reset safety until reset from thermostat. h. Each unit shall utilize the Comfort Alertt Diagnostic Board that provides: (1.) System Pressure Trip fault code indication (2.) Short Cycling fault code indication (3.) Locked Rotor fault code indication (4.) Open Circuit fault code indication (5.) Reverse Phase 3 fault code indication (6.) Welded Contactor fault code indication (7.) Low Voltage fault code indication (8.) Anti-short cycle protection (9.) Phase reversal protection 2.Minimum safety devices which are equipped with automatic reset (after resetting first at thermo- stat), shall include: a. High discharge pressure cutout. b. Low pressure cutout. St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 62 00 PERMIT SET PACKAGED CONDENSING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 6 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION B. Examine rough-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation. C. Examine condition of locations where the packaged compressor and condenser unit will be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant. B. Install packaged units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. C. Furnish vibration isolators as required or as shown on the drawings. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in Section 22 0548, "Vibration and Seismic Control for Plumbing Piping and Equipment". 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Install refrigerant piping and refrigerant specialties(pressure relief, service valve,filter- dryer, and moisture indicator on each refrigerant-circuit liquid line)in accordance with Section 23 2300, Refrigerant Piping. B. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. C. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to unit's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing so it does not interfere with access to unit. Install furnished accessories. D. Install electrical components,devices, and accessories and connection to electrical power wiring that are not factory mounted. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Leak Test: After installation,charge system with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks. Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil,and retest until no leaks exist. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 62 00 PERMIT SET PACKAGED CONDENSING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 6 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor operation and unit operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 5. Verify proper airflow over coils. C. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure. 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following: 1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing. 2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight. 3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris. 4. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight. 5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections. 6. Verify that controls are connected and operational. B. Lubricate bearings on fans. C. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding. D. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and complete manufacturer's startup checklist. E. Measure and record airflow over coils. F. Verify proper operation of capacity control device. G. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure. H. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings. END OF SECTION St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 73 13 PERMIT SET CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF13 SECTION 23 73 13 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum of five years documented experience. B. Units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 manufacturing quality standard. C. Air-handling unit assembly shall have UL 1995 certification for safety, including use with electric heat. D. Products requiring electric connection shall be listed and classified by ETL and CSA as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. E. Coil performance shall be certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 410, latest edition. F. Air-handling unit shall be AHRI 430 listed and meet NFPA 90A requirements. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. All indoor units, painted or unpainted, shall be completely shrink-wrapped from the factory for protection during shipment. Tarping of bare units is unacceptable. B. Inspect for transportation damage and store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. 1.03 START-UP REQUIREMENTS Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, condensate properly trapped, piping connections verified and leak tested, belts aligned and tensioned, all shipping braces have been removed, and fan has been test run under observation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Units shall ship in the number of sections necessary to meet project requirements and shall ship in as many splits as specified in selection software. Split options as follows: 1. Shipped in sections—shipping split. 2. Shipped assembled. B. Unit shall be factory-supplied, central station air handler. The air-handling unit may consist of a fan with the following factory-installed components as indicated on the equipment schedule. 1. Mixing Box Section: a. With angle filter tracks. 10. Filter Section: a. 2-in. flat filters. b. 4-in. flat filters. c. 2-in. angle filters. d. 4-in. angle filters. e. Side loading 12-in. bag/cartridge filters with 2-in. pre-filters. f. Side loading 30-in. bag/cartridge filters with 2-in. pre-filters. g. Face loading bag/cartridge filters without pre-filters. Maximum bag/cartridge filter length is limited to access/plenum sections placed after this section. h. Face loading HEPA(high-efficiency particulate air)bag/cartridge filters without pre-filters. 11. Coil Section: St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 73 13 PERMIT SET CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF13 b. Direct expansion coil. c. Hot water coil. b. No dampers (for dual duct). 13. Fan Section: a. Horizontal draw-thru. 2.02 CASING A. Construction: 1. Unit shall be constructed of a complete frame with easily removable panels. Removal of any panel shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit. 2. All units shall be supplied with 14-gage or heavier, G-90 galvanized steel base rails. Bolton legs are NOT acceptable. Perimeter lifting lugs for overhead lifting shall be provided on each section. Slinging units in place of lifting lugs shall not be acceptable. 3. Unit shall be thermally broken to minimize the conduction path from the inside of the casing to the outside. 4. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall be constructed of galvanized steel, and shall have one of the following exterior finishes as specified: b. Unpainted G-90 galvanized steel. 5. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom)shall be constructed of galvanized steel, and shall have one of the following interior finishes as specified: b. Unpainted G-90 galvanized steel. 6. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom)shall be one piece, double-wall construction with insulation sealed between the inner and outer panels. Panel assemblies shall not carry an R- value of less than 13. 7. Casing deflection shall not exceed a 1:200 ratio when subject to an internal pressure of±8- in.wg. Casing leakage rate shall be less than 1% at 8 in. wg of nominal unit airflow or 50 cfm, whichever is greater. Leakage rate shall be tested and documented on a routine basis on random production units. Optionally,factory witness leak testing and/or test reports shall be available. 8. Side panels shall be easily removable for access to unit and shall seal against a full perimeter automotive style gasket to ensure a tight seal. 9. The panel retention system shall comply with UL 1995 which states all moving parts(for example,fan blades, blower wheels, pulleys, and belts)that, if accidentally contacted, could cause bodily injury, shall be guarded against accidental contact by an enclosure requiring tools for removal. 10. Accessibility options shall be as follows: a. Hinged double-wall access door on either side with removable access panel(s)on the other side. b. Hinged double-wall access doors on both sides. c. Removable double-wall access panels on both sides. 12. Fan supports, structural members, panels, or flooring shall not be welded, unless aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant material is used. Painted welds on unit exterior steel or galvanized steel are not acceptable. 13. All coil sections shall be double-wall construction with insulation sealed between the inner and outer panels. Panel assemblies shall not carry an R-value of less than 13. Single height coil sections shall have removable frame sections to facilitate vertical coil extraction. B. Access Doors: Access doors shall be one piece, double-wall construction with insulation sealed between the. inner and outer panels. Panel assemblies shall not carry an R-value of less than 13. C. Drain Pans: Drain pans shall be insulated double-wall galvanized or stainless steel construction. The pan shall be sloped toward the drain connection. Drain pan shall have 11/2-in. MPT connection exiting through the hand side or opposite side of the casing as specified. One drain outlet shall be supplied for each cooling coil section. Drain pan shall allow no standing water and comply with ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2010. Where 2 or more coils are stacked in a coil bank, intermediate St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 73 13 PERMIT SET CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF13 drain pans shall be provided and the condensate shall be piped to the bottom drain pan. The bottom coil shall not serve as a drain path for the upper coil. 2.03 FANS A. General: 1. Forward-curved fans shall have one double-width double-inlet(DWDI)fan wheel and scroll. They shall be constructed of galvanized steel with baked enamel. They shall be designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fans shall have an AMCA class rating corresponding to the static pressure at which the fan is designed to operate (Class I or II). Completed fan assembly shall be dynamically balanced in accordance with 1989 ARI Guideline G and ANSI S2.19-1986 at design operating speed using contract drive and motor if ordered. 5. Fan assembly vibration shall not exceed 0.2 in. per second when mounted on active isolators. Vibration shall be measured in both vertical and horizontal directions at the specified fan operating speed using specified motor. Accelerometers shall be mounted on the motor near the bearing locations. 7. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft and shall be designed for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fan wheels and shafts shall be selected with a maximum operating speed 25%below the first critical. 8. Belt drive fan motor shall be mounted within the fan section casing on slide rails equipped with adjusting screws. Motor shall be premium efficiency, open drip-proof or totally enclosed fan cooled NEMA Design A or B with size and electrical characteristics as shown on the equipment schedule. Motor shall be mounted on a horizontal flat surface and shall not be supported by the fan or its structural members. All three-phase motors shall have a ± 10% voltage utilization range and a 1.15 minimum service factor. Motor shall be compliant with the Energy Independence and Security Act(EISA)of 2007 where applicable. Single-phase motors shall be available up to and including 5 hp. B. Performance Ratings: Fan performance shall be rated and certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 430, latest edition. C. Sound Ratings: Manufacturer shall submit first through eighth octave sound power for fan discharge and casing radiated sound. D. Mounting: Fan scroll, wheel, shaft, bearings, drives, and motor shall be mounted on a common base assembly. The base assembly is isolated from the outer casing with factory-installed isolators and rubber vibration absorbent fan discharge seal. A canvas style duct connection between fan discharge and cabinet is not acceptable. Units shall use 2-in. deflection spring isolators. E. Fan Accessories: 1. Forward-curved fans: a. Variable frequency drives with or without bypass. d. Belt guards. F. Flexible Connection: The base assembly is isolated from the outer casing with factory-installed isolators and rubber vibration absorbent fan discharge seal. A canvas style duct connection between fan discharge and cabinet is not acceptable. 2.04 BEARINGS AND DRIVES A. Bearings: Self-aligning, grease lubricated, anti-friction with lubrication fittings extended to drive side of fan section. Optional grease fittings extended to the exterior of the casing are available.All bearing life calculations shall be done in accordance with ABMA 9 for ball bearings and ABMA 11 for roller bearings. St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 73 13 PERMIT SET CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF13 1. Size 03 to 110 forward-curved fans: Cartridge type bearings for Class I fans. Heavy-duty pillow block type, self-aligning, regreasable ball or roller type bearings selected for a minimum average life (Lso) of 200,000 hours or optionally for an (Lso)of 500,000 hours. B. Shafts: Fan shafts shall be solid steel,turned, ground, polished and coated with a rust inhibitor. C. V-Belt Drive: Drive shall be designed for a minimum 1.2 service factor as standard with a 1.5 service factor option and/or a factory-supplied extra set of belts. Drives shall be fixed pitch with optional variable pitch for motors 15 hp and less.All drives shall be factory mounted, with sheaves aligned and belts properly tensioned. 2.05 COILS A. All water,steam and direct expansion (DX) refrigerant coils shall be provided to meet the scheduled performance.All coil performance shall be certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 410.All water and direct expansion coils shall be tested at 450 psig air pressure. Direct expansion coils shall be designed and tested in accordance with ASHRAE/ANSI 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (latest edition). Factory-supplied 1/2-in. OD coils shall be covered under the standard product one-year limited warranty. All steam coils, integral face and bypass coils and s/s-in. OD coils shall be warranted for a period not in excess of 12 months from their shipment from the manufacturer. Coil epoxy coating shall be covered under a 5-year limited warranty from the date of shipment from the manufacturer. B. General Fabrication: 1. All water and refrigerant coils shall have minimum 1/2-in. OD copper tubes mechanically expanded into fins to ensure high thermal performance with lower total flow and pumping requirements. Minimum tube wall thickness shall be 0.016 inches. Optional tube wall thickness of 0.025 in. shall be supplied, if specified. 2. Optionally,water coils shall have minimum 5/8-in. OD copper tubes mechanically expanded into fins to ensure high thermal performance with lower total flow and pumping requirements. Minimum tube wall thickness shall be 0.020 inches. Optional tube wall thickness of 0.035 in. shall be supplied, if specified. 3. Aluminum plate fin type with belled collars. Optional copper plate fins shall be supplied, if specified. 4. Aluminum-finned coils shall be supplied with die-formed casing and tube sheets of mill galvanized steel or stainless steel as specified. Copper-finned coils shall be supplied with stainless steel casing and tube sheets. C. Hydronic Heating and Cooling Coils: 1. Headers shall be constructed of steel with steel MPT connections. Headers shall have drain and vent connections accessible from the exterior of the unit. Optional non-ferrous headers and red brass MPT connections shall be supplied if specified. 2. Configuration: Coils shall be drainable, with non-trapping circuits. Coils will be suitable for a design working pressure of 300 psig at 200 F F. Refrigerant Coils: 1. Headers shall be constructed of copper with brazed joints. 2. Standard circuiting selections include: a. Single distributor arrangement for sizes 03-17. b. Row split intertwined, multiple distributor arrangement for sizes 03-110. c. Face split, multiple distributor arrangement for sizes 03-110. 3. Replaceable nozzle, brass refrigerant distributors and seamless copper distribution tubes are supplied to ensure uniform flow. 2.07 FILTER SECTIONS A. Flat filter sections shall accept either 2-in. or 4-in.filters. Sections shall include side access slide rails. B. Angle filter sections shall accept either 2-in. or 4-in. filters of standard sizes, arranged in a horizontal V formation. St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 73 13 PERMIT SET CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF13 C. Draw-thru bag/cartridge filter sections shall be capable of accepting headered standard size 6-in. to 12-in. deep rigid media or bag filters. D. Draw-thru bag/cartridge filter sections shall be capable of accepting headered standard size 12- in. to 30-in. deep rigid media or bag filters. E. Blow-thru bag/cartridge filter sections shall contain a face loading filter frame and be capable of accepting standard size 12-in. deep rigid media (headered or box)or bag filters. F. Blow-thru HEPA filter sections shall contain a face loading filter frame and be capable of accepting standard size 12-in. deep HEPA box filters. G. Magnehelic Gages: 1. Housing shall be constructed of a die cast aluminum case and bezel with acrylic cover. Exterior finish shall be coated gray to withstand 168 hr salt spray corrosion test. 2. Accuracy shall be ±2% of full scale throughout range at 70 F(21.1 C). 3. Pressure limits shall be–20 in. Hg to 15 psig (0.677 bar to 1.034 bar). 4. Overpressure relief plugs shall open at approximately 25 psig(1.72 kPa). 5. Temperature limits shall be 20 to 140 F (-6.67 to 60 C). 6. Diameter of dial face shall be 4 in. (101.6 mm). 7. Process connections shall be 1/s-in.female NPT duplicate high and low pressure taps—one pair side and one pair back. 2.08 DAMPERS Factory-supplied dampers shall be warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 12 months after being installed or placed in service, but in no instance shall the period of warranty be longer than 18 months from the date of the original shipment by the manufacturer. A. Mixing boxes,filter-mixing boxes, and exhaust boxes shall have parallel or opposed blades and interconnecting outside-air and return-air dampers. 2. Premium Dampers: Damper blades shall be constructed of galvanized steel with a double-skin airfoil design, with blade seals and stainless steel jamb seals. Blades shall be mechanically fastened to axle rods rotating in self-lubricating synthetic bearings. Maximum leakage rate shall be 2 cfm/ft2at 1 in. wg (0.25 kPa)differential pressure. E. Variable Frequency Drives: 1. Factory-mounted variable frequency drives (VFDs)shall be wired to factory-supplied motors. 2. Factory-supplied VFDs are programmed and started up from the factory and qualify the VFD, through ABB, for a 24-month warranty from date of commissioning or 30 months from date of sale,whichever occurs first. 3. The VFD parameters are programmed into the controller and removable keypad. In the event that the VFD fails and needs replacement,the program can then be uploaded to the replacement VFD via the original keypad. 4. The VFD package as specified herein shall be enclosed in a UL Listed type enclosure, exceeding NEMA enclosure design criteria (enclosures with only NEMA ratings are not acceptable), completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer in an ISO 9001 facility. The VFD tolerated voltage window shall allow the VFD to operate from a line of+30% nominal, and –35% nominal voltage as a minimum. a. Environmental operating conditions: VFDs shall be capable of continuous operation at– 15 to 40 C (5 to 104 F)ambient temperature with no frost allowed as per VFD manufacturers documented/submittal data or VFD must be oversized to meet these temperature requirements. Not acceptable are VFDs that can only operate at 40 C intermittently(average during a 24-hour period) and therefore, must be oversized. VFDs shall be capable of operating at altitude 0 to 3300 ft above sea level and less than 95% humidity, non-condensing. All circuit boards shall have conformal coating. b. Enclosure shall be rated UL Type 1 and shall be UL listed as a plenum rated VFD. VFDs without these ratings are not acceptable. Type 1 enclosures with only NEMA rating are not acceptable(must be UL Type 1). 5. All VFDs shall have the following standard features: St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 73 13 PERMIT SET CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF13 a. All VFDs shall have the same customer interface, including digital display,and keypad, regardless of horsepower rating. The keypad shall be removable, capable of remote mounting and allow for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for start-up of multiple VFDs. b. The keypad shall include Hand-Off-Auto selections and manual speed control. The drive shall incorporate"bumpless transfer"of speed reference when switching between "Hand" and "Auto" modes.There shall be fault reset and"Help" buttons on the keypad.The Help button shall include"on-line"assistance for programming and troubleshooting. c. There shall be a built-in timeclock in the VFD keypad. The clock shall have a battery back-up with 10 years minimum life span. The clock shall be used to date and time stamp faults and record operating parameters at the time of fault. If the battery fails, the VFD shall automatically revert to hours of operation since initial power up. Capacitor back-up is not acceptable.The clock shall also be programmable to control start/stop functions, constant speeds, PID parameter sets and output Form-C relays. The VFD shall have a digital input that allows an override to the timeclock(when in the off mode)for a programmable time frame. There shall be four(4)separate, independent timer functions that have both weekday and weekend settings. d. The VFDs shall utilize pre-programmed application macros specifically designed to facilitate start-up. The application macros shall provide one command to reprogram all parameters and customer interfaces for a particular application to reduce programming time. The VFD shall have two user macros to allow the end-user to create and save custom settings. e. The VFD shall have cooling fans that are designed for easy replacement. The fans shall be designed for replacement without requiring removing the VFD from the wall or removal of circuit boards.The VFD cooling fans shall operate only when required. To extend the fan and bearing operating life, the VFD shall cycle the cooling fans on and off as required. f. The VFD shall be capable of starting into a coasting load (forward or reverse)up to full speed and accelerate or decelerate to set point without tripping or component damage (flying start). g. The VFD shall have the ability to automatically restart after an overcurrent,over-voltage, under-voltage, or loss of input signal protective trip. The number of restart attempts,trial time, and time between attempts shall be programmable. h. The overload rating of the drive shall be 110% of its normal duty current rating for 1 minute every 10 minutes, 130%overload for 2 seconds. The minimum FLA rating shall meet or exceed the values in the NEC/UL table 430250 for 4-pole motors. i. The VFD shall have internal 5% impedance reactors to reduce the harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients. The 5% impedance may be from dual (positive and negative DC bus) reactors, or 5%AC line reactors.VFDs with only one DC reactor shall add an AC line reactor. j. The input current rating of the VFD shall be no more than 3% greater than the output current rating. VFDs with higher input current ratings require the upstream wiring, protection devices, and source transformers to be oversized per NEC 430.120. Input and output current ratings must be shown on the VFD nameplate. k. The VFD shall include a coordinated AC transient surge protection system consisting of 4 to 120 joule rated MOVs (phase to phase and phase to ground), a capacitor clamp, and 5% impedance reactors. I. The VFD shall provide a programmable loss-of-load (broken belt/broken coupling) Form- C relay output. The drive shall be programmable to signal the loss-of-load condition via a keypad warning, Form-C relay output, and/or over the serial communications bus. The loss-of-load condition sensing algorithm shall include a programmable time delay that will allow for motor acceleration From zero speed without signaling a false loss-of-load condition. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 73 13 PERMIT SET CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF13 m. The VFD shall have user programmable underload and overload curve functions to allow user defined indications of broken belt or mechanical failure/jam condition causing motor overload n. The VFD shall include multiple"two zone" PID algorithms that allow the VFD to maintain PID control from two separate feedback signals (4-20mA, 0-10V, and/or serial communications). The two zone control PID algorithm will control motor speed based on a minimum,maximum,or average of the two feedback signals. All of the VFD PID controllers shall include the ability for"two zone"control. o. If the input reference (4-20mA or 2-10V) is lost, the VFD shall give the user the option of either(1)stopping and displaying a fault, (2) running at a programmable preset speed, (3) hold the VFD speed based on the last good reference received, or(4)cause a warning to be issued, as selected by the user.The drive shall be programmable to signal this condition via a keypad warning, Form-C relay output and/or over the serial communication bus. p. The VFD shall have programmable"Sleep" and "Wake up"functions to allow the drive to be started and stopped from the level of a process feedback signal. 6. All VFDs to have the following adjustments: a. Three (3)programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from operating the load continuously at an unstable speed. The lockout range must be fully adjustable,from 0 to full speed. b. Two(2) PID set point controllers shall be standard in the drive, allowing pressure or flow signals to be connected to the VFD, using the microprocessor in the VFD for the closed- loop control. The VFD shall have 250 mA of 24 VDC auxiliary power and be capable of loop powering a transmitter supplied by others. The PID set point shall be adjustable from the VFD keypad, analog inputs, or over the communications bus. There shall be two independent parameter sets for the PID controller and the capability to switch between the parameter sets via a digital input, serial communications or from the keypad. The independent parameter sets are typically used for night setback, switching between summer and winter set points, etc. c. There shall be an independent, second PID loop that can utilize the second analog input and modulate one of the analog outputs to maintain the set point of an independent process(ie. valves, dampers, etc.). All set points, process variables, etc. to be accessible from the serial communication network. d. Two(2)programmable analog inputs shall\accept current or voltage signals. e. Two(2)programmable analog outputs(0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA). The outputs may be programmed to output proportional to Frequency, Motor Speed, Output Voltage, Output Current, Motor Torque, Motor Power(kW), DC Bus voltage, Active Reference,Active Feedback,and other data. f. Six (6) programmable digital inputs for maximum flexibility in interfacing with external devices. All digital inputs shall be programmable to initiate upon an application or removal of 24 VDC or 24 VAC. g. Three(3) programmable, digital Form-C relay outputs. The relay outputs shall include programmable on and off delay times and adjustable hysteresis. The relays shall be rated for maximum switching current 8 amps at 24 VDC and 0.4 A at 250 VAC; Maximum voltage 300 VDC and 250 VAC; continuous current rating of 2 amps RMS. Outputs shall be true Form-C type contacts; open collector outputs are not acceptable. h. Run permissive circuit:There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, input contact closure, timeclock control, or serial communications), the VFD shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal the damper to open(VFD motor does not operate).When the damper is fully open, a normally open dry contact(end switch)shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a VFD digital input and allows VFD motor operation.Two separate safety interlock inputs shall be provided.When either safety is opened,the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop and the damper shall be commanded to close. The keypad St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 73 13 PERMIT SET CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF13 shall display"start enable 1 (or 2)missing".The safety input status shall also be transmitted over the serial communications bus. i. The VFD control shall include a programmable time delay for VFD start and a keypad indication that this time delay is active.A Form C relay output provides a contact closure to signal the VAV boxes open.This will allow VAV boxes to be driven open before the motor operates.The time delay shall be field programmable from 0 to 120 seconds. Start delay shall be active regardless of the start command source(keypad command, input contact closure,time-clock control, or serial communications). j. Seven (7) programmable preset speeds. k. Two independently adjustable accelerate and decelerate ramps with 1 to 1800 seconds adjustable time ramps. I. The VFD shall include a motor flux optimization circuit that will automatically reduce applied motor voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and reduce audible motor noise. The VFD shall have selectable software for optimization of motor noise, energy consumption, and motor speed control. m. The VFD shall include a carrier frequency control circuit that reduces the carrier frequency based on actual VFD temperature that allows higher carrier frequency settings without derating the VFD. n. The VFD shall include password protection against parameter changes. 7. The keypad shall include a backlit LCD display. The display shall be in complete English words for programming and fault diagnostics (alphanumeric codes are not acceptable). All VFD faults shall be displayed in English words. The keypad shall include a minimum of 14 assistants including: a. Start-up assistant b. Parameter assistants c. PID assistant d. Reference assistant e. I/O assistant f. Serial communications assistant g. Option module assistant h. Panel display assistant i. Low noise set-up assistant j. Maintenance assistant k. Troubleshooting assistant I. Drive optimizer assistants 8. All applicable operating values shall be capable of being displayed in engineering (user) units. A minimum of three operating values from the list below shall be capable of being displayed at all times. The display shall be in complete English words (alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable): a. Output Frequency b. Motor Speed (RPM, %, or Engineering units) c. Motor Current d. Motor Torque e. Motor Power(kW) f. DC Bus Voltage g. Output Voltage 9. The VFD shall include a fireman's override input. Upon receipt of a contact closure from the fire/smoke control station, the VFD shall operate in one of two modes: 1) Operate at a programmed predetermined fixed speed ranging from—500 Hz(reverse)to 500 Hz(forward). 2) Operate in a specific fireman's override PID algorithm that automatically adjusts motor speed based on override set point and feedback.The mode shall override all other inputs (analog/digital, serial communication, and all keypad commands), except customer defined safety run interlocks, and force the motor to run in one of the two modes above. "Override Mode"shall be displayed on the keypad. Upon removal of the override signal,the VFD shall resume normal operation, without the need to cycle the normal digital input run command. St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 73 13 PERMIT SET CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF13 10. Serial Communications: a. The VFD shall have an EIA-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be Modbus, Johnson Controls N2, Siemens Building Technologies FLN, and BACnet*. [Optional protocols for LonWorkst, Profibus, EtherNet, BACnet IP, and DeviceNet shall be available.] Each individual drive shall have the protocol in the base VFD. The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable.All protocols shall be"certified" by the governing authority(i.e., BTL Listing for BACnet). Use of non-certified protocols is not allowed. b. The BACnet connection shall be an EIA-485, MS/TP interface operating at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, or 76.8 Kbps. The connection shall be tested by the BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) and be BTL Listed. The BACnet interface shall conform to the BACnet standard device type of an Applications Specific Controller(B-ASC). The interface shall support all BIBBs defined by the BACnet standard profile for a B-ASC including, but not limited to: 1) Data Sharing—Read Property— B. 2) Data Sharing—Write Property—B. 3) Device Management—Dynamic Device Binding (Who-Is; I-Am). 4) Device Management—Dynamic Object Binding (Who-Has; I-Have). 5) Device Management—Communication Control—B. c. If additional hardware is required to obtain the BACnet interface,the VFD manufacturer shall supply one BACnet gateway per drive. Multiple VFDs sharing one gateway shall not be acceptable. d. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; run-stop control, speed set adjustment, proportional/integral/derivative PID control adjustments, current limit, accel/decel time adjustments, and lock and unlock the keypad. The drive shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as process variable feedback, output speed/frequency, current(in amps), %torque, power(kW),kilowatt hours(resettable), operating hours (resettable), and drive temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the VFD relay output status, digital input status, and all analog input and analog output values. All diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote VFD fault reset shall be possible. e. The VFD shall include an independent PID loop for customer use. The independent PID loop may be used for cooling tower bypass valve control,chilled water valve/hot water valve control, etc. Both the VFD PID control loop and the independent PID control loop shall continue functioning even if the serial communications connection is lost. As default, the VFD shall keep the last good set point command and last good DO and AO commands in memory in the event the serial communications connection is lost and continue controlling the process. 11. EMI/RFI filters:All VFDs shall include EMI/RF1 filters. The onboard filters shall allow the VFD assembly to be CE Marked and the VFD shall meet product standard EN 61800-3 for the First Environment restricted level with up to 100 feet of motor cable. No Exceptions. Certified test reports shall be provided with the submittals confirming compliance to EN 61800-3, First Environment. 12. All VFDs through 75 hp at 480 V shall be protected from input and output power mis-wiring. The VFD shall sense this condition and display an alarm on the keypad. The VFD shall not sustain damage from this power mis-wiring condition. 13. Operational Functions: a. The drive shall contain two separate acceleration/deceleration times with auto tuning for optimum setting (0.1 to 6000 seconds)with choice of linear, S, or C curves that shall be factory programmed to match the fan load and prevent nuisance overcurrent fault trips. b. The drive shall be equipped with both local/remote and manual/auto keys on touch pad. c. The drive shall be equipped with a quick setup key. d. The drive shall contain 15 preset speeds, which can be activated from the keypad, terminal inputs, and host computer. e. The drive shall have the capability of storable special custom user setting. St. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 73 13 PERMIT SET CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 10 OF13 f. The drive shall restart into a rotating motor operating in either the forward or reverse direction and match that frequency. g. The drive shall have adjustable soft stall (10%to 150%)which reduces frequency and voltage of the inverter to sustain a run in an overload situation factory programmed for each motor's characteristics. h. The drive shall be capable of performing a time base pattern run using 4 groups of 8 patterns each using the 15 preset speed values for a maximum of 32 different patterns. i. The drive shall have adjustable UL listed electronic overload protection (10%to 100%) factory programmed to match each motor's FLA/RLA ratings. j. The drive shall have a custom programmable volt/hertz pattern. 14. Protective Features: a. The drive shall be rated for 200,000 AIC(ampere interrupting capacity).The use of input fuses to achieve this rating shall not be acceptable. b. The drive shall have external fault input. c. The drive shall be capable of resetting faults remotely and locally. d. The drive shall be programmable to alert the following alarms: 1) Over torque alarm. 2) Inverter overload pre-alarm. 3) Motor overload pre-alarm. 4) Braking resistor overload pre-alarm. 5) Inverter overheat pre-alarm. 6) Undercurrent alarm. 7) Overcurrent pre-alarm. 8) Communication error alarm. 9) Cumulative timer alarm. 10) Executing retry. e. The drive shall identify and display the following faults: 1) Overcurrent during acceleration trip. 2) Overcurrent during deceleration trip. 3) Overcurrent during normal run trip. 4) Overcurrent on the DC Bus during acceleration trip. 5) Overcurrent on the DC Bus during deceleration trip. 6) Overcurrent on the DC Bus during normal run trip. 7) Load end overcurrent trip detected at start-up(output terminals, motor wiring, etc.). 8) U-phase short circuit trip detected at start-up. 9) V-phase short circuit trip detected at start-up. 10) W-phase short circuit trip detected at start-up. 11) Overvoltage during acceleration trip. 12) Overvoltage during deceleration trip. 13) Overvoltage during normal (constant speed) run trip. 14) Inverter overloaded trip. 15) Motor overloaded trip. 16) Inverter overheat trip. 17) Emergency off trip message. 18) EEPROM failure during write cycle. 19) EEPROM abnormality during initial reading. 20) RAM error. 21) ROM error. 22) CPU error. 23) Communication interruption error. 24) Gate array error. 25) Output current detection circuit error. 26) Option PCB error trip. 27) Low operating current trip. 28) Main circuit under voltage trip. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 73 13 PERMIT SET CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 11 OF13 29) Over torque trip. 30) Software detected earth fault trip. 31) Hardware detected earth fault trip. 32) Inverter type form mismatch error. 33) EEPROM type form mismatch error. 15. Monitor Functions: a. The drive digital display shall be capable of displaying the following: Frequency, percent current,current amps, percent voltage I/O, voltage in volts I/O,RPM,GPM, I/O watts, torque,and input reference signal,kWh. b. The drive shall have 320 programmable parameters which can be changed while the drive is operating. c. The drive's 353 parameters shall be adjustable from the 8-key touchpad or computer link. d. The drive's 8-key touchpad shall be NEMA 12 rated. e. The drive's keypad shall be capable of being extended 15 ft from the drive. f. The drive shall contain a reset of all parameters to factory default settings or user defaults(whichever one is chosen). g. The drive shall have 2 programmable analog outputs programmable to 17 choices. h. The drive shall have one programmable relay output programmable to 67 choices. i. The drive shall have 8 programmable digital inputs programmable to 54 choices. j. The drive shall have a pulse train out-put proportional to frequency(48,96, 360 times frequency). k. The drive shall have an elapsed time meter. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment per industry standards, applicable codes, and manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not use AHUs for temporary heating, cooling or ventilation prior to complete inspection and startup performed per this specification. C. Install AHUs on a concrete pad,or structural steel base,as shown on drawings. D. Install AHUs with manufacturer's recommended clearances for access,coil pull,and fan removal. E.Provide one complete set of filters for testing,balancing,and commissioning. Provide se- cond complete set of filters at time of transfer to owner. F. Install AHU plumb and level.Connect piping and ductwork according to manufacturer's in- structions. G. Install seismic restraints and anchors per applicable local building codes.Refer to specifica- tion Section 230548(15240/ 15070)for product and installation requirements. H. Insulate plumbing associated with drain pan drains and connections. I. Install insulation on all staggered coil piping connections,both internal and external to the unit. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 73 13 PERMIT SET CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 12 OF13 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Store per AHU manufacturer's written recommendations. Store AHUs indoors in a warm, clean,dry place where units will be protected from weather,construction traffic,dirt,dust, water and moisture.If units will be stored for more than 6 months,follow manufacturer's instruction for long-term storage. B.Rig and lift units according manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 AHU INSPECTION A.Hire manufacturer's factory-trained and factory-employed service technician to perform an inspection of unit and installation prior to startup.Technician shall inspect and verify the following as a minimum: 1 Damage of any kind 2 Level installation of unit 3 Proper reassembly and sealing of unit segments at shipping splits. 4 Installation of shipped-loose parts,including filters. 5 Completion and tightness of electrical,ductwork and piping connections 6 Tight seals around wiring,conduit and piping penetrations through AHU casing. 7 Supply of electricity from the building's permanent source 8 Integrity of condensate trap for positive or negative pressure operation 9 Condensate traps charged with water 10 Removal of shipping bolts and shipping restraints 11 Tightness and full motion range of damper linkages(operate manually) 12 Complete installation of control system including end devices and wiring 13 Cleanliness of AHU interior and connecting ductwork 14 Proper service and access clearances 15 Proper installation of filters 16 Filter gauge set to zero B. Resolve any non-compliant items prior to proceeding with the inspection of the fan assembly. 3.04 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT:AHU FAN ASSEMBLY A.Hire the manufacturer's factory-trained and factory-employed service technician perform an inspection of the AHU fan assembly subsequent to general AHU inspection and prior to startup.Technician shall inspect and verify the following as a minimum: 1 Fan isolation base and thrust restraint alignment 2 Tight set screws on pulleys,bearings and fan 3 Tight fan bearing bolts 4 Tight fan and motor sheaves 5 Tight motor base and mounting bolts 6 Blower wheel tight and aligned to fan shaft 7 Sheave alignment and belt tension 8 Fan discharge alignment with discharge opening 9 Fan bearing lubrication 10 Free rotation of moving components(rotate manually) St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 73 13 PERMIT SET CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 13 OF13 B.Manufacturer shall perform service to bring fan performance within factory specifications. 3.05 STARTUP SERVICE AND OWNER TRAINING A. Manufacturer's factory-trained and factory-employed service technician shall startup AHUs. Technician shall perform the following steps as a minimum: 1 Energize the unit disconnect switch 2 Verify correct voltage,phases and cycles 3 Energize fan motor briefly("bump")and verify correct direction of rotation. 4 Re-check damper operation;verify that unit cannot and will not operate with all dampers in the closed position. 5 Energize fan motors and verify that motor FLA is within manufacturer's tolerance of nameplate FLA for each phase. B.Provide a minimum of 4 hours of training for owner's personnel by manufacturer's factory- trained and factory-employed service technician.. C.Training shall include startup and shutdown procedures as well as regular operation and maintenance requirements. D. If AHU is provided with a factory-mounted variable frequency drive(VFD),hire the VFD manufacturer's factory-trained and factory-employed service technician to inspect,test,ad- just,program and start the VFD.Ensure that critical resonant frequencies are programmed as`skip frequencies' in the VFD controller. E. Submit a startup report summarizing any problems found and remedies performed. 3.06 FIELD PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION A.Leakage: Pressurize casing to+/-8"w.g.and measure leakage.If leakage exceeds 1%of de- sign airflow,seal leakage points with a permanent solution.Repeat test. If the AHU still does not pass,contact the manufacturer to seal unit. B. Submit a field test report with testing data recorded.Include description of corrective ac- tions taken. 3.07 CLEANING A.Clean unit interior prior to operating.Remove tools,debris,dust and dirt. B.Clean exterior prior to transfer to owner. 3.08 DOCUMENTATION A.Provide Installation Instruction Manual,&Startup checklist in the supply fan section of each unit. B.Provide six copies of Spare Parts Manual for owner's project system manual. END OF SECTION St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 82 19 PERMIT SET FAN COIL UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 6 SECTION 23 82 19 FAN COIL UNITS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BAS:Building automation system. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. LEED Submittals: 1 Product Data for Credit EA 4:Documentation indicating that equipment and refrigerants comply. 2 Product Data for Prerequisite IEQ 1:Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62.1,Section 5-"Systems and Equipment." C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, .method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.Wiring Diagrams:Power,signal,and control wiring. D.Samples for Initial Selection:For units with factory-applied color finishes. E. Samples for Verification:For each type of fan-coil unit indicated. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 82 19 PERMIT SET FAN COIL UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 6 1.Ceiling suspension components. 2. Structural members to which fan-coil units will be attached. 3.Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling,including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. 6.Perimeter moldings for exposed or partially exposed cabinets. B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that fan-coil units, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term"withstand"means"the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b.The term"withstand"means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." • 1 Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 2 Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C.Field quality-control test reports. D.Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1.Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors,coils,integral controls,and filters. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 82 19 PERMIT SET FAN COIL UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 6 1 Fan-Coil-Unit Filters: Furnish two spare filters for each filter installed. 2 Fan Belts: Furnish one spare fan belt for each unit installed. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 -"Systems and Equipment"and Section 7-"Construction and Startup." C.ASHRAEJIESNA 90.1 Compliance:Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6- "Heating,Ventilating,and Air-Conditioning." 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates or is supported by ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment,fire-suppression-system components,and partition assemblies. B.Coordinate size and location of wall sleeves for outdoor-air intake. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of condensing units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include,but are not limited to,the following: a.Compressor failure. b.Condenser coil leak. 1 Warranty Period:Four years from date of Substantial Completion. 2 Warranty Period(Compressor Only):Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3 Warranty Period(Condenser Coil Only):Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 82 19 PERMIT SET FAN COIL UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 6 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. General: Factory-assembled,horizontal and vertical,draw-thru type fan coil unit for ducted installation above the ceiling or floor mounting. Unit shall be complete with water coils,fan(s),motor,belt drive,drain pan,and filter. B. Casing: Construction shall be heavy-gage galvanized steel, lined with one-in.thick fiberglass Tuf-SkinTT" II thermal/acoustical insulation. Knockouts shall be provided for hanging the horizontal unit,that will accept 3/8-in.threaded rod at the top and bottom of all unit corners.Supply and return duct connections shall be 1 in. long. Removable side panels shall be provided for access to the fan/motor assembly.Access panels shall be easily removable with hex key tool on vertical unit, and without tools on horizontal unit.A double-sloped drain pan shall be constructed of stainless steel, extending under the full length and width of the coil(s)with a 3/4-in. male nominal pipe thread stainless steel drain connection and 1/2-in. male NPT stainless secondary drain connection (cap when not required).The outside surface of the drain pan shall be insulated with 1/8-in. closed cell insulation. Drain pan is removable from cabinet from same end as coil connections for ease of cleaning. C. Fans: Belt-driven,double-width fan wheels shall have forward-curved blades and be statically and dynamically balanced. Fan drive shall consist of variable-pitch motor pulley,fixed-diameter blower sheave with keyed shaft, and V-belt. Fan drive shall be designed for 120%of rated fan horsepower. Fans and scrolls shall be of galvanized steel. Bearings are ball bearings, permanently lubricated and sealed for life. Bearings are isolated from the blower housing by rubber mounts set into heavy gage metal support system.The blower housing shall be isolated from the cabinet and motor. D. Coils: Standard unit shall be equipped with a 4-row coil for installation in a 2-pipe system and additional rows of coil shall be provided as an option for installation in a 4-pipe system. Coils shall have 1/2- in.copper tubes,aluminum fins bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion and have a working pressure of 250 psig at 200 F. Each coil shall have a manual air vent and sweat connections for copper tubes. E. Operating Characteristics: A single-circuit coil unit installed in a 2-pipe system shall be capable of providing heating or cooling as determined by the operating mode of the central water supply system.A double-circuit coil unit installed in a 4-pipe system shall be capable of providing sequenced heating and cooling. F. Motor(s): 1. Fan motors shall be open, drip-proof,single-speed,60 Hz, 1750 rpm single or 3 phase, suitable for continuous duty at 104 F(40 C). Single-phase motors are capacitor start, include automatic reset thermal overload protection and are available in 115,208, 230,or 277 volts (60 Hz)or 220 volts(50 Hz). Three-phase motors are available in 208,230,or 460 volts(60 Hz)or 380 volts(50 Hz). 2. Motors are Class B,continuous duty rated. Motors are resilient mounted(1/4 to 2 HP),rigid base mounted (3 and 5 HP), NEMA frame motors. Motors are factory wired to unit junction or control box. Motor bearings are permanently lubricated. Motors are mounted on an adjustable base for belt tensioning and alignment.The motor and drive are installed on the same end as the coil connection for ease of service. G. Special Features: 1. Coils: c. For installation in a 4-pipe system, unit shall be equipped with either a 4-row cooling/1- row hot water heating split-circuit coil,or a 4/2,6/1, or 6/2 split-circuit coil as required. d. Unit shall be equipped with a 4-row DX(direct expansion)cooling coil 2. Filters: a. A two-in. pleated filter shall be installed in the unit(standard). 3. Insulation: a. Units shall be equipped with 1-in.thick Tuf-Skin TM II insulation (standard). St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 82 19 PERMIT SET FAN COIL UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 6 4. Controls: a. Unit shall be equipped with 24-v transformer,motor contactor and terminal strip for connection to field or factory provided controller. b. Unit shall be equipped with interlocking door-disconnect switch with lock-out tag-out compatibility,touch-type fusing, 24-v transformer,motor contactor and terminal strip for connection to field provided controller. c. Unit shall be equipped with interlocking door-disconnect switch with lock-out tag-out compatibility,separate motor and electric heater touch-type fusing,24-v transformer, motor contactor and terminal strip for connection to field-provided or factory-provided controller. d. Fuses comply with NFPA 70E/IP20. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan-coil-unit installation. C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb. B.Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A. C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolators are specified in Section 230548"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." D. Verify locations of thermostats,humidistats,and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation.Install devices 60 inches above finished floor. E.Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows: 1 Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 2 Connect piping to fan-coil-unit factory hydronic piping package. Install piping package if shipped loose. 3 Connect condensate drain to indirect waste. St.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 23 82 19 PERMIT SET FAN COIL UNITS MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 6 a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction. B. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections. C.Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing.Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1 Operational Test:After electrical circuitry has been energized,start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2 Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3 Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C.Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.5 ADJUSTING A.Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. END OF SECTION ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 19 PERMIT SET BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 12 SECTION 26 05 19 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single conductor building wire. B. Metal-clad cable. C. Wiring connectors. D. Oxide inhibiting compound. E. Wire pulling lubricant. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00- Firestopping. B. Section 26 05 26-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems:Additional requirements for grounding conductors and grounding connectors. C. Section 26 05 53- Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D. Section 28 31 00- Fire Alarm System:Fire alarm system conductors and cables. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B3-Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2001 (Reapproved 2007). B. ASTM B8-Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard,or Soft; 2011. C. ASTM B33-Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes;2010. D. ASTM B787/B787M-Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation;2004(Reapproved 2009). E. ASTM B801 -Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Conductors of 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy Wire for Subsequent Covering of Insulation;2007. F. FS A-A-59544-Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation); Federal Specification; Revision A,2008. G. NEC 210.4(B)-Multiwire Branch Circuits-Disconnecting Means; National Electrical Code; 2008 AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 19 PERMIT SET BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 12 H. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. I. NECA 120-Standard for Installing Armored Cable(AC)and Metal-Clad Cable(MC); National Electrical Contractors Association;2006. J. NEMA WC 70- Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2009(ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S- 95-658). K. NETA STD ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. L. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. M. UL 44-Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 83-Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 486A-486B-Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 486C-Splicing Wire Connectors;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q. UL 486D-Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. R. UL 1569-Metal-Clad Cables;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes of raceways,boxes,and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials,construction, ratings, listings,and available sizes, configurations,and stranding. C. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for aluminum conductors substituted for copper conductors. Include proposed modifications to raceways, boxes, wiring gutters, enclosures, etc.to accommodate substituted conductors. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 19 PERMIT SET BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 12 D. Field Quality Control Test Reports. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency.Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,and installation of product. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual routing for underground circuits. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications:Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle,and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than 14 degrees F,unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Architect and obtain direction before proceeding with work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required. C. Metal-clad cable is permitted only as follows: 1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used: a. Where concealed in hollow stud walls, above accessible and non-accessible ceilings, and under raised floors for branch circuits up to 20 A. 1) Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for circuit homerun from first outlet to panelboard. 2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used: a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction. b. Where exposed to view,except in dedicated electrical,communications, and mechanical rooms where not subject to damage. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 19 PERMIT SET BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 12 c. Where exposed to damage. d. For damp,wet,or corrosive locations,unless provided with a PVC jacket listed as suitable for those locations. e. For isolated ground circuits, unless provided with an additional isolated/insulated grounding conductor. f. For patient care areas of health care facilities requiring redundant grounding, unless hospital grade rated and provided with a redundant ground path. 2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cerro Wire LLC:www.cerrowire.com. B. Encore Wire Corporation:www.encorewire.com. C. American Insulated Wire:www.leviton.com. D. Southwire Company:www.southwire.com. E. General Cable;www.generalcable.com. 2.03 ALL CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.as suitable for the purpose indicated. C. Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation. D. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes,wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system. E. Comply with NEMA WC 70. F. Comply with FS A-A-59544 where applicable. G. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83. H. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44. I. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding:Also comply with Section 26 05 26. ). Conductors and Cables Installed Where Exposed to Direct Rays of Sun: Listed and labeled as sunlight resistant. K. Conductors and Cables Installed Exposed in Spaces Used for Environmental Air(only where specifically permitted):Plenum rated, listed and labeled as suitable for use in return air plenums. L. Conductor Material: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 19 PERMIT SET BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 12 1. Provide copper conductors only.Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project.Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper. 2. Copper Conductors:Soft drawn annealed,98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3,ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787M unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tinned Copper Conductors:Comply with ASTM B33. 4. Aluminum Conductors(only where specifically indicated or permitted for substitution):AA-8000 series aluminum alloy conductors recognized by ASTM B800 and compact stranded in accordance with ASTM B801 unless otherwise indicated. M. Minimum Conductor Size: 1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG. a. Exceptions: 1) 20 A 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG,for voltage drop. 2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet:8 AWG,for voltage drop. 3) 20 A 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG,for voltage drop. 2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG. N. Where conductor size is not indicated,size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. O. Conductor Color Coding: 1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project. 2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used for identification. 3. Color Code: a. 208Y/120 V,3 Phase,4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C:Blue. 4) Neutral/Grounded:White. b. Equipment Ground,All Systems:Green. c. Isolated Ground,All Systems:Green with yellow stripe. d. For control circuits,comply with manufacturer's recommended color code. 2.04 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 1. Copper Building Wire: a. Cerro Wire LLC:www.cerrowire.com. b. Encore Wire Corporation:www.encorewire.com. c. Southwire Company:www.southwire.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 19 PERMIT SET BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 12 2. Aluminum Building Wire(only where specifically indicated or permitted for substitution): a. Alcan Products Corporation/Alcan Cable:www.cable.alcan.com. b. Prysmian Power Cables and Systems:www.us.prysmian.com. c. Southwire Company:www.southwire.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Description:Single conductor insulated wire. C. Conductor Stranding: 1. Feeders and Branch Circuits: a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller:Solid or stranded. b. Size 8 AWG and Larger:Stranded. 2. Control Circuits:Stranded. D. Insulation Voltage Rating:600 V. E. Insulation: 1. Copper Building Wire:Type THHN/THWN,THHN/THWN-2, or XHHW-2,except as indicated below. a. Size 4 AWG and Larger:Type XHHW-2,THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2. b. Installed Underground:Type XHHW-2,THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2. 2. Aluminum Building Wire(only where specifically indicated or permitted for substitution):Type XHHW-2 or RHH/RHW-2. 2.05 METAL-CLAD CABLE A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems Inc:www.afcweb.com. 2. Encore Wire Corporation:www.encorewire.com. 3. Southwire Company:www.southwire.com. 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70,Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569,and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. C. Conductor Stranding: 1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller:Solid or stranded. 2. Size 8 AWG and Larger:Stranded. D. Insulation Voltage Rating:600 V. E. Insulation:Type THHN/THWN-2 or XHHW-2. F. Provide dedicated neutral conductor for each phase conductor where indicated or required. G. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor. H. Armor:Aluminum or steel, interlocked tape. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 19 PERMIT SET BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 12 I. Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for environment of installed location. 2.06 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Description:Wiring connectors appropriate for the application,suitable for use with the conductors to be connected,and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable. B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 05 26. C. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps: 1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller:Use twist-on insulated spring connectors or compression connectors. 2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger:Use compression connectors. 3. Connectors for Aluminum Conductors: Use compression connectors. D. Wiring Connectors for Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs. 2. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device. 3. Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate disconnection. 4. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use compression connectors where connectors are required OR for all connections. 5. Aluminum Conductors: Use compression connectors where connectors are required.Use oxide inhibiting compound. 6. Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for connections to terminal screws. 7. Conductors for Control Circuits:Use crimped terminals where connectors are required. E. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with conductors without stripping insulation. F. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors. G. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations. 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M:www.3m.com. b. Ideal Industries, Inc:www.idealindustries.com. c. NSI Industries LLC:www.nsiindustries.com. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 19 PERMIT SET BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 12 d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. H. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy:www.burndy.com. b. Ilsco:www.ilsco.com. c. Thomas&Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. I. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy:www.burndy.com. b. Ilsco:www.ilsco.com. c. Thomas& Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. J. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated,with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable for connection to be made. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy:www.burndy.com. b. Ilsco:www.ilsco.com. c. Thomas&Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.07 WIRING ACCESSORIES A. Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Listed;suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy:www.burndy.com. b. Ideal Industries, Inc:www.idealindustries.com. c. Ilsco:www.ilsco.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed;suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature. 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M:www.3m.com. b. American Polywater Corporation:www.polywater.com. c. Ideal Industries, Inc:www.idealindustries.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 19 PERMIT SET BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF 12 B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70. D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Circuiting Requirements: 1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required. 3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices. 4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location shown. 5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control,signaling,and power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70. 6. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70. 7. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated,when branch circuits are shown as separate,combining them together in a single raceway is permitted, under the following conditions: a. Provide no more than six current-carrying conductors in a single raceway. Dedicated neutral conductors are considered current-carrying conductors. b. Increase size of conductors as required to account for ampacity derating. c. Size raceways, boxes,etc.to accommodate conductors. 8. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated,sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit. B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. D. Install aluminum conductors in accordance with NECA 104. E. Install metal-clad cable(Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120. F. Installation in Raceway: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 19 PERMIT SET BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE MARCH 2013 PAGE 10 OF 12 1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants. 2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time. 3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure. 4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary,except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer. G. Exposed Cable Installation (only where specifically permitted): 1. Route cables parallel or perpendicular to building structural members and surfaces. 2. Protect cables from physical damage. H. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner. I. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems. 1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles. 2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds permissible limits. J. Terminate cables using suitable fittings. 1. Metal-Clad Cable(Type MC): a. Use listed fittings. b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor. c. Do not use direct-bearing set-screw type fittings for cables with aluminum armor. K. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet. L. Where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others, provide a minimum of 5 feet of slack. M. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes,wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures. N. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors. 1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies. 2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 19 PERMIT SET BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE MARCH 2013 PAGE 11 OF 12 3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides,and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces. 5. Connections for Aluminum Conductors: Fill connectors with oxide inhibiting compound where not pre-filled by manufacturer. 6. Mechanical Connectors:Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 7. Compression Connectors:Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. O. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application,with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors. 1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape,or heat shrink tubing. a. For taped connections,first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape or electrical filler tape,followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape. b. For taped connections likely to require re-entering, including motor leads, first apply varnished cambric electrical tape,followed by adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape,followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape. 2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape,or heat shrink tubing. a. For connections with insulating covers,apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape. b. For taped connections,follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape. 3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing. P. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape. Q. Field-Applied Color Coding:Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under"Color Coding",apply half overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible. R. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 05 53. S. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00. T. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others,as required for a complete operating system. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 19 PERMIT SET BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE MARCH 2013 PAGE 12 OF 12 U. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner,as specified in NECA 1. Contractor shall comply with NEC 210.4(B)by providing a separate neutral conductor for . each circuit in a multi-wire branch circuit. V. Support cables above accessible ceiling,using spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. Do not attach cables to slack wires. Plastic cable ties shall be plenum rated in plenum spaces. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspection,testing,and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS,except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS,Section 7.3.2.The insulation resistance test is only required for services and feeders. 1. Disconnect surge protective devices(SPDs)prior to performing any high potential testing. Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 26 PERMIT SET GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 8 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding and bonding requirements. B. Conductors for grounding and bonding. C. Connectors for grounding and bonding. D. Ground bars. E. Ground rod electrodes. F. Ground access wells. • 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 19- Building Wire and Cable:Additional requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding,including conductor color coding. 1. Includes oxide inhibiting compound. B. Section 26 05 53- Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. BICSI TDMM Manual-Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, 12th Edition; Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc.;2009. B. IEEE 81 -Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance,and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System; 1983. C. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association;2010. D. NEMA GR 1 -Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007. E. NETA STD ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. F. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. TIA/EIA J-STD-607-Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications;Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance;2002. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 26 PERMIT SET GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 8 H. UL 467-Grounding and Bonding Equipment;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode. 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding and bonding system connectors. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage,handling, protection,examination,preparation,and installation of product. D. Field quality control test reports. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system components and connections. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications:Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle,and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 26 PERMIT SET GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Work:Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to be reused,they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity are verified,and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors,connectors,conduit, boxes,fittings,supports,accessories,etc.as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system. D. Where conductor size is not indicated,size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. E. Grounding System Resistance: 1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless otherwise approved by Architect. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions. 2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms OR 25 ohms to ground, when tested according to IEEE 81 using"fall-of-potential" method. 3. Between Grounding Electrode System and Major Electrical Equipment Frames, System Neutral,and Derived Neutral Points: Not greater than 0.5 ohms,when tested according to IEEE 81 using"point-to-point" methods. F. Grounding Electrode System: 1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form grounding electrode system. a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint. b. Install grounding electrode conductors in non-metallic raceway where exposed to physical damage. 2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s): a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where present)water service pipe(s). b. Provide bonding jumper(s)around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe electrically continuous. c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal of meter without disconnecting jumper. 3. Metal Building or Structure Frame: a. Provide connection to metal building or structure frame effectively grounded in accordance with NFPA 70 at nearest accessible location. 4. Concrete-Encased Electrode: a. Provide connection to concrete-encased electrode consisting of not less than 20 feet of either steel reinforcing bars or bare copper conductor not AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 26 PERMIT SET GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 8 smaller than 4 AWG embedded within concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70. G. Service-Supplied System Grounding: 1. For each service disconnect, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral(grounded)service conductor to grounding electrode system. Unless otherwise indicated, make connection at neutral(grounded) bus in service disconnect enclosure. 2. For each service disconnect, provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral (grounded)bus to equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make any other connections between neutral(grounded)conductors and ground on load side of service disconnect. H. Bonding and Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes,device grounding terminals,and other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor. 3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. 5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral(grounded)or isolated/insulated ground bus. 6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to accommodate conduit movement. 7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70.This includes, but is not limited to: a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water pipe used as grounding electrode. b. Metal gas piping. c. Metal process piping. 8. Provide bonding for interior metal air ducts. 9. Provide bonding for metal building frame where not used as a grounding electrode. 10. Provide bonding for metal siding not effectively bonded through attachment to metal building frame. Communications Systems Grounding and Bonding: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 26 PERMIT SET GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 8 1. Provide intersystem bonding termination at service equipment or metering equipment enclosure and at disconnecting means for any additional buildings or structures in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Provide bonding jumper from intersystem bonding termination OR building grounding electrode system to each communications room or backboard and provide ground bar for termination OR leave slack conductor for termination by others. a. Bonding Jumper Size: 6 AWG,unless otherwise indicated or required. b. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 4 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required. c. Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 3. Telecommunications Grounding System: a. Install in accordance with BICSI TDM Manual,TIA/EIA 607,and NFPA 70. b. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view as much as possible. c. Install grounding for each rack and equipment using#6 AWG THHN, rated for 90 degrees C,insulated,copper stranded conductor to copper communication grounding bus bar. d. install routing for grounding conductor as short and direct as practical. e. Install routing of bonding conductors with minimum number of bends and splices.Use sweeping bends. f. Install bonding connections with listed bolts,clamps,or lugs. Exothermic welding may be used. g. Between each communications room, install multiple busbars directly bonded with#6 AWG copper conductor. h. Ground data cabinets, racks,cable trays,and mounting hardware located in all telecommunications rooms. Install ground from each piece of equipment to grounding bar via an insulated cable no smaller than#6 AWG stranded copper wire. Install proper grounding lug on cable where connecting to racks and grounding bar. j. Label grounding conductors and grounding bus bars in accordance with BICSI guidelines. 2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide products listed, classified,and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL)or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated. 2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable. B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding,in addition to requirements of Section 26 05 19: 1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 26 PERMIT SET GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 8 a. Exceptions: 1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth. 2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway). 2. Factory Pre-fabricated Bonding Jumpers: Furnished with factory-installed ferrules; size braided cables to provide equivalent gauge of specified conductors. C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: 1. Description:Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467. 2. Unless otherwise indicated,use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections. a. Exceptions: 1) Use mechanical connectors for connections to electrodes at ground access wells. 3. Unless otherwise indicated,use mechanical connectors or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections. a. Exceptions: 1) Use exothermic welded connections for connections to metal building frame. 4. Manufacturers- Mechanical Connectors(Bronze): a. Burndy:www.burndy.com. b. Harger Lightning&Grounding:www.harger.com. c. Thomas&Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 5. Manufacturers- Exothermic Welded Connections: a. Burndy:www.burndy.com. b. Cadweld,a brand of Erico International Corporation:www.erico.com. c. ThermOweld,a brand of Continental Industries, Inc:www.thermoweld.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. D. Ground Bars: 1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators. 2. Size:As specified herein. 3. Holes for Connections:As indicated or as required for connections to be made. 4. Manufacturers: a. Erico International Corporation:www.erico.com. b. Harger Lightning&Grounding:www.harger.com. c. ThermOweld,a brand of Continental Industries, Inc:www.thermoweld.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. E. Ground Rod Electrodes: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 26 PERMIT SET GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 8 1. Comply with NEMA GR 1. 2. Material: Copper-bonded(copper-clad)steel. 3. Size:5/8 inch diameter by 10 feet length,unless otherwise indicated. 4. Where rod lengths of greater than 10 feet are indicated or otherwise required, sectionalized ground rods may be used. 5. Manufacturers: a. Erico International Corporation:www.erico.com. b. Galvan Industries, Inc:www.galvanelectrical.com. c. Harger Lightning&Grounding:www.harger.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. F. Ground Access Wells: 1. Description:Open bottom round or rectangular well with access cover for testing and inspection;suitable for the expected load at the installed location. a. Areas Exposed to Vehicular Traffic:Rated for traffic. 2. Size:As required to provide adequate access for testing and inspection, but not less than minimum size requirements specified. a. Round Wells: Not less than 8 inches in diameter. b. Rectangular Wells: Not less than 12 by 12 inches. 3. Depth:As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 10 inches. 4. Cover: Factory-identified by permanent means with word "GROUND". 5. Manufacturers: a. Erico International Corporation:www.erico.com. b. Harger Lightning&Grounding:www.harger.com. c. ThermOweld,a brand of Continental Industries, Inc:www.thermoweld.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. G. Oxide Inhibiting Compound:Comply with Section 26 05 19. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove paint, rust, mill oils,and surface contaminants at connection points. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed. B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 26 PERMIT SET GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 8 B. Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Ground Rod Electrodes:Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically.Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or bury horizontally in trench at least 30 inches(750 mm)deep in accordance with NFPA 70. 1. Outdoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with top of rod 6 inches below finished grade. 2. Indoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with 4 inches of top of rod exposed. D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors. 1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces. 3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Mechanical Connectors:Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. E. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 05 53. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspection,testing,and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.13. D. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions. E. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified requirements. F. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions taken. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 29 PERMIT SET HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 9 SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. C. Support and attachment components for equipment,conduit,cable, boxes,and other electrical work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00-Cast-in-Place Concrete:Concrete equipment pads. B. Section 05 50 00-Metal Fabrications:Materials and requirements for fabricated metal supports. C. Section 26 05 34-Conduit:Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits. D. Section 26 51 00-Interior&Exterior Lighting:Additional support and attachment requirements for interior luminaires. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M-Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012. B. ASTM A153/A153M-Standard Specification for Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware;2009. C. ASTM B633-Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2011. D. MFMA-4- Metal Framing Standards Publication; Metal Framing Manufacturers Association;2004. E. ICC-ES AC01 -Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2009. F. ICC-ES AC106-Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners(Screw Anchors)in Masonry Elements;2006 G. ICC-ES AC193-Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements;2010 H. ICC-ES AC308-Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements;2009. I. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association;2010. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 29 PERMIT SET HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 9 j. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. K. UL 5B-Strut-Type Channel Raceways and Fittings;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and components to be installed. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for installation. 3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations. 4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has fully cured in accordance with Section 03 30 00. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for metal channel(strut)framing systems,non-penetrating rooftop supports,and post-installed concrete and masonry anchors. C. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or methods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution. D. For products specified as requiring evaluation and recognition by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC(ICC-ES), provide current ICC-ES evaluation reports upon request. E. Installer's Qualifications: Include evidence of compliance with specified requirements. F. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems. G. Manufacturer's Instructions:Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,and installation of product. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 29 PERMIT SET HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 9 B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. C. Comply with applicable building code. D. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. E. Installer Qualifications for Powder-Actuated Fasteners(when specified):Certified by fastener system manufacturer with current operator's license. F. Installer Qualifications for Field-Welding:As specified in Section 05 50 00. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle,and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide all required hangers,supports,anchors,fasteners,fittings,accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work. 2. Provide products listed,classified,and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL)or Intertek(ETL)as suitable for the purpose indicated,where applicable. 3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported with a minimum safety factor of 5. Include consideration for vibration,equipment operation,and shock loads where applicable. 4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 5. Do not use wire,chain, perforated pipe strap,or wood for permanent supports unless specifically indicated or permitted. 6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed. a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel,stainless steel, or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al23/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. B. Materials for Metal Fabricated Supports: Comply with Section 05 50 00. C. Conduit and Cable Supports:Straps,clamps, etc.suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported. AM-3533 • ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 29 PERMIT SET HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 9 1. Conduit Straps:One-hole or two-hole type;steel or malleable iron. 2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated. 3. Manufacturers: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds,a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com. b. Erico International Corporation:www.erico.com. c. O-Z/Gedney,a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. d. Thomas&Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com. e. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. D. Outlet Box Supports:Hangers,brackets,etc.suitable for the boxes to be supported. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds,a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com. b. Erico International Corporation:www.erico.com. c. O-Z/Gedney,a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. d. Thomas&Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com. e. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. E. Metal Channel(Strut)Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut)and associated fittings,accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports. 1. Comply with MFMA-4. 2. Channel(Strut)Used as Raceway(only where specifically indicated): Listed and labeled as complying with UL 5B. 3. Channel Material: a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or galvanized steel. b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations:Use galvanized steel or stainless steel. 4. Minimum Channel Thickness: 14 gauge. 5. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 13/16 inch height. 6. Manufacturers: a. Cooper B-Line,a division of Cooper Industries:www.cooperindustries.com. b. Thomas& Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com. c. Unistrut,a brand of Atkore International Inc:www.unistrut.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. F. Hanger Rods:Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated. 1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required: a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter. b. Single Conduit up to 1 inch(27mm)trade size: 1/4 inch diameter. c. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch(27mm)trade size: 3/8 inch diameter. d. Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits:3/8 inch diameter. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 29 PERMIT SET HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 9 e. Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch diameter. f. Luminaires:3/8 inch diameter. G. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs:Steel pedestals with thermoplastic or rubber bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly,with support fixtures as specified. 1. Base Sizes:As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly. 2. Attachment/Support Fixtures:As recommended by manufacturer,same type as indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports. 3. Mounting Height:Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under supported component to top of roofing. 4. Manufacturers: a. Cooper B-Line,a division of Cooper Industries:www.cooperindustries.com. b. Erico International Corporation:www.erico.com. c. PHP Systems/Design:www.phpsd.com. d. Unistrut,a brand of Atkore International Inc:www.unistrut.com. e. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. H. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications. 2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts,expansion anchors, or screw anchors. 3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry:Use toggle bolts. 5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts. 6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts,welded threaded studs,or 7. Sheet Metal:Use sheet metal screws. 8. Wood: Use wood screws. 9. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted. 10. Powder-actuated fasteners are permitted only as follows: a. Where approved by Architect. b. Use only threaded studs; do not use.pins. 11. Hammer-driven anchors and fasteners are permitted only as follows: a. Nails are permitted for attachment of nonmetallic boxes to wood frame construction(when specified). b. Staples are permitted for attachment of nonmetallic-sheathed cable to wood frame construction(when specified). 12. Preset Concrete Inserts:Continuous metal channel(strut)and spot inserts specifically designed to be cast in concrete ceilings,walls,and floors. a. Comply with MFMA-4. b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel. c. Minimum Channel Thickness: 12 gauge. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 29 PERMIT SET HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 9 d. Manufacturer:Same as manufacturer of metal channel(strut)framing system. 13. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC(ICC-ES)for compliance with applicable building code. 14. Manufacturers- Mechanical Anchors: a. Hilti, Inc:www.us.hilti.com. b. ITW Red Head,a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc:www.itwredhead.com. c. Powers Fasteners, Inc:www.powers.com. d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc:www.strongtie.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 15. Manufacturers- Powder-Actuated Fastening Systems: a. Hilti, Inc:www.us.hilti.com. b. ITW Ramset,a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc:www.ramset.com. c. Powers Fasteners, Inc:www.powers.com. d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc:www.strongtie.com. e. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Thomas&Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com. B. Threaded Rod Company:www.threadedrod.com. C. Erico:www.erico.com. D. B-Line:www.b-line.com. E. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Hangers,Supports,Anchors,and Fasteners-General:Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit,including weight of wire in conduit. B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members;galvanized. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Obtain permission from Architect before using powder-actuated anchors. 2. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts,expansion anchors, or preset inserts. 3. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps,steel spring clips,steel ramset fasteners,or welded fasteners. 4. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors. 5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster,and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners. 6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts. 7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 29 PERMIT SET HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 9 8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. D. Fastener Types: 1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors:Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors:Complying with ICC-ES AC01. 3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors:Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106. 5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors:Complying with ICC-ES AC308. 6. Other Types:As required. 7. Manufacturers: a. Powers Fasteners, Inc:www.powers.com. b. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. E. Formed Steel Channel: 1. Manufacturer: Kindorf,Unistrut, B-Line,or approved. 2. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. F. Steel Spring Clips: 1. Manufacturer:Caddy, Raco,T&B, B-Line. 2. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. G. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs:Steel pedestals with thermoplastic or rubber bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly,with support fixtures as specified. 1. Base Sizes:As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly. 2. Steel Components:Stainless steel,or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. 3. Attachment/Support Fixtures:As recommended by manufacturer,same type as indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports;corrosion resistant material. 4. Mounting Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under supported component to top of roofing. 5. Manufacturers: a. Cooper B-Line,a division of Cooper Industries:www.cooperindustries.com. b. PHP Systems/Design:www.phpsd.com. c. Unistrut,a brand of Atkore International Inc:www.unistrut.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 29 PERMIT SET HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS • MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 9 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components,in a neat and workmanlike manner,as specified in NECA 1. 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes,ducts,mechanical equipment,or conduit. 2. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members. B. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. D. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall. E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. F. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. H. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC(ICC-ES) evaluation report conditions of use where applicable. I. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. J. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect,do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid. K. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck. L. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer. M. Field-Welding(where approved by Architect): Comply with Section 05 50 00. N. Equipment Support and Attachment: 1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel(strut)to support equipment as required. 2. Use metal channel(strut)secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out. 3. Use metal channel(strut)to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted equipment on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 29 PERMIT SET HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF 9 5. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support. O. Conduit Support and Attachment:Also comply with Section 26 05 34. P. Box Support and Attachment:Also comply with Section 26 05 37. Q. interior and Exterior Luminaire Support and Attachment:Also comply with Section 26 51 00. R. Preset Concrete Inserts:Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour. S. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. T. Remove temporary supports. U. Provide independent electrical component support wires above accessible ceilings. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements,for additional requirements. B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects. C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 16 SECTION 26 05 34 CONDUIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC). B. Intermediate metal conduit(IMC). C. Flexible metal conduit(FMC). D. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit(LFMC). E. Electrical metallic tubing(EMT). F. Rigid polyvinyl chloride(PVC)conduit. G. Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit(LFNC). H. Conduit fittings. I. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00-Cast-in-Place Concrete:Concrete encasement of conduits. B. Section 07 84 00-Firestopping. C. Section 26 05 19- Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. D. Section 26 05 26-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. Includes additional requirements for fittings for grounding and bonding. E. Section 26 05 29-Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. F. Section 26 05 35-Surface Raceways. G. Section 26 05 37-Boxes. H. Section 26 05 53- Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. I. Section 27 10 05-Structured Cabling for Voice and Data- Inside-Plant:Additional requirements for communications systems conduits. J. Section 27 13 43-Structured Cabling for Voice and Data:Additional requirements for communications systems conduits. K. Section 31 23 16- Excavation. L. Section 31 2316.13-Trenching: Excavating, bedding,and backfilling. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 16 M. Section 31 23 23-Fill: Bedding and backfilling. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.. ANSI C80.1 -American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit(ERSC);2005. B. ANSI C80.3-American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT); 2005. C. ANSI C80.5-American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit(ERAC); 2005. D. ANSI C80.6-American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit(EIMC); 2005. E. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association;2010. F. NECA 101 -Standard for Installing Steel Conduits(Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors Association;2006. G. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings,Cast Metal Boxes,and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing,and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2012(ANSI/NEMA FB 1). H. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride(PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2005. I. NEMA TC 2-Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003. J. NEMA TC 3-Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2004. K. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. L. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 6- Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 6A- Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass,and Stainless Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 360- Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 514B-Conduit,Tubing,and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q. UL 651 -Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. R. UL 797- Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH2013 PAGE3OF16 S. UL 1242- Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. T. UL 1660- Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members,ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes,enclosures, and equipment installed under other sections or by others. 4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between outlet,junction and splicing points. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate proposed arrangement for conduits to be installed within structural concrete slabs,where permitted. 2. Include proposed locations of roof penetrations and proposed methods for sealing. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits embedded within concrete slabs,and conduits 2 inch(53 mm)trade size and larger. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle,and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 16 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted,use the conduit types indicated for the specified applications.. . C. Underground: 1. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,intermediate metal conduit(IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,or rigid PVC conduit. 2. Exterior, Direct-Buried:Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metallic conduit(IMC),or rigid PVC conduit. 3. Where rigid polyvinyl(PVC)conduit is provided,transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit(IMC)where emerging from underground. 4. Where rigid polyvinyl(PVC)conduit larger than 2 inch(53 mm)trade size is provided, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows or intermediate metal conduit(IMC)elbows or fiberglass for bends in runs over 100 feet. For shorter runs factory formed schedule 40 PVC elbows may be used. 5. 1.5 Inches Diameter and Smaller: For total conduit lengths between pull points over 100 ft.,use rigid steel elbows. For shorter overall lengths, rigid steel or Schedule 40 PVC may be used. 6. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth use where soil has a resistivity of less than 2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on soils report or local experience to provide supplementary corrosion protection. D. Embedded Within Concrete: 1. Within Slab on Grade(within structural slabs only where approved by Structural Engineer): Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC),or rigid PVC conduit. 2. Within Slab Above Ground(within structural slabs only where approved by Structural Engineer): Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,intermediate metal conduit(IMC),electrical metallic tubing(EMT),or rigid PVC conduit. 3. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC), electrical metallic tubing(EMT), or rigid PVC conduit. 4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC)conduit is provided,transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit(IMC)where emerging from concrete. 5. Where electrical metallic tubing(EMT)emerges from concrete into salt air, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches on either side of where conduit emerges. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 16 E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC), or electrical metallic tubing(EMT). F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls:Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC),or electrical metallic tubing(EMT). G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings:Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC), or electrical metallic tubing(EMT). H. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit(IMC). I. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC), or electrical metallic tubing(EMT). �. Exposed, Interior,Subject to Physical Damage:Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit(IMC). 1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to: a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or closets. b. Where exposed below 20 feet in warehouse areas and manufacturing areas. K. Exposed, Exterior:Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC),or PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. L. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC),or electrical metallic tubing (EMT). M. Corrosive Locations Above Ground: Use rigid PVC conduit. 1. Corrosive locations include, but are not limited to: a. Cooling towers. b. Swimming pool equipment rooms. N. Hazardous(Classified)Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit(IMC). O. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit. 1. Maximum Length:6 feet. P. Connections to Vibrating Equipment: 1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit. 2. Damp,Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Maximum Length:6 feet unless otherwise indicated. 4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to: a. Transformers. b. Motors. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 16 Q. Fished in Existing Walls,Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit or MC cable. 2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Work:Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused,they may be reused only where they comply with specified requirements,are free from corrosion, and integrity is verified by pulling a mandrel through them. B. Electrical Service Conduits:Also comply with Section 26 27 01. C. Communications Systems Conduits:Also comply with Section 27 10 05 or 27 13 43. D. Fittings for Grounding and Bonding:Also comply with Section 26 05 26. E. Provide all conduit,fittings,supports,and accessories required for a complete raceway system. F. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc.(UL)or Intertek(ETL)as suitable for the purpose indicated. G. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Branch Circuits: 1/2 inch(16 mm)trade size. 2. Branch Circuit Homeruns:3/4 inch(21 mm)trade size. 3. Control Circuits: 1/2 inch(16 mm)trade size. 4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 1/2 inch(16 mm)trade size. 5. Underground, Interior:3/4 inch(21 mm)trade size. 6. Underground, Exterior:3/4 inch(21 mm)trade size. H. Where conduit size is not indicated,size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT(RMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube&Conduit:www.alliedeg.com. 2. Republic Conduit:www.republic-conduit.com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company:www.wheatland.com. B. Description: NFPA 70,Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc:www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney,a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas&Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com. 2. Non-Hazardous Locations:Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and • labeled as complying with UL 5146. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 16 3. Hazardous(Classified) Locations:Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 1203 for the classification of the installed location. 4. Material:Use steel or malleable iron. a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings. 5. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only.Threadless set screw and compression(gland)type fittings are not permitted. 2.04 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT(IMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube&Conduit:www.alliedeg.com. 2. Republic Conduit:www.republic-conduit.com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company:www.wheatland.com. B. Description: NFPA 70,Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc:www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney,a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas&Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com. 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Hazardous(Classified) Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 1203 for the classification of the installed location. 4. Material:Use steel or malleable iron. a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings. 5. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only.Threadless set screw and compression(gland)type fittings are not permitted. 2.05 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT(FMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc:www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company:www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose:www.metalhose.com. B. Description: NFPA 70,Type FMC standard wall steel or standard wall aluminum flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc:www.bptfittings.com. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 16 b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas& Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel, malleable iron,or aluminum. a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings. 2.06 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT(LFMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc:www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company:www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose:www.metalhose.com. B. Description: NFPA 70,Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride(PVC)jacketed steel or aluminum flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc:www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney,a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas&Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel, malleable iron,or aluminum. a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings. 2.07 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING(EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube&Conduit:www.alliedeg.com. 2. Republic Conduit:www.republic-conduit.com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company:www.wheatland.com. B. Description: NFPA 70,Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc:www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney,a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas&Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH2013 PAGE9OF16 3. Material:Use steel. a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use set-screw type except when embedded in concrete. Use concrete tight compression(gland)type. a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings. 5. Damp or Wet Locations(where permitted): Use fittings listed for use in wet locations. 6. Embedded Within Concrete(where permitted): Use fittings listed as concrete-tight. Fittings that require taping to be concrete-tight are not acceptable. 2.08 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(PVC)CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Cantex Inc:www.cantexinc.com. 2. Carton,a brand of Thomas&Betts Corporation:www.carlon.com. 3. JM Eagle:www.jmeagle.com. 4. Allied Tube and Conduit:www.alliedtube.com. B. Description: NFPA 70,Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651;Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated,Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage;rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturer:Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMATC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; material to match conduit. D. Elbows: 1. Use only factory formed Schedule 40 elbows.Field bends are not acceptable. 2. 1.5 Inches Diameter and Smaller: For total conduit lengths between pull points over 100 ft.,use rigid steel elbows. For shorter overall lengths, rigid steel or Schedule 40 PVC may be used. 3. 2 Inches Diameter and Larger: For total conduit lengths between pull points over 100 ft.,use long sweep rigid steel or fiberglass elbows. For shorter overall lengths, rigid steel,fiberglass,or Schedule 40 PVC elbows may be used. 2.09 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT(LFNC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc:www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company:www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose:www.metalhose.com. B. Description: NFPA 70,Type LFNC liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1660,Type A or Type B or. C. Fittings: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH 2013 PAGE 10 OF 16 1. Manufacturer:Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B;suitable for the type of conduit to be connected. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 10 mil. B. Conduit Joint Compound:Corrosion-resistant,electrically conductive;suitable for use with the conduit to be installed. C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings:As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed. D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound- force. E. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed. F. Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for the conduits to be installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC)in accordance with NECA 101. D. Install intermediate metal conduit(IMC)in accordance with NECA 101. E. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride(PVC)conduit in accordance with NECA 111. F. Install liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit(LFNC)in accordance with NECA 111. G. Conduit Routing: 1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown,determine exact routing required. 3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed. 4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH 2013 PAGE 11 OF 16 a. Electrical rooms. b. Mechanical equipment rooms. c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling. 5. Unless otherwise approved,do not route conduits exposed: a. Across floors. b. Across roofs. c. Across top of parapet walls. d. Across building exterior surfaces. 6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated.Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces,following surface contours where practical. 7. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom,clearances,and access. 8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends between pull points. 9. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points. 10. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible. 11. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect. 12. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems. 13. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. 14. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack. H. Conduit Support: 1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork,or other systems. 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles. 4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit. a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide space between conduit and mounting surface. 5. Use metal channel(strut)with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted conduits. 6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod. 7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel(strut)with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits. 8. Use non-penetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops (only where specifically approved). 9. Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is permitted only as follows: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH 2013 PAGE 12 OF 16 a. Support of electrical metallic tubing(EMT)up to 1 inch(27 mm)trade size concealed above accessible ceilings and within hollow stud walls. 10. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted. 11. Where conduit support intervals specified in NFPA 70 and NECA standards differ, comply with the most stringent requirements. Connections and Terminations: 1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections. 2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated,use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads. 3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another. 4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors. 5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations. 6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finished floor. 7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors. 8. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity. �. Penetrations: 1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams,without approval of Structural Engineer. 2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required. 4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground. 5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent entry of moisture and gases. 6. Provide suitable modular seal where conduits penetrate exterior wall below grade. 7. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane,seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane. 8. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary,seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. 9. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view. 10. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and-methods specified in Section 07 84 00. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH 2013 PAGE 13 OF 16 K. Underground Installation: 1. Provide trenching and backfilling in accordance with Sections 31 2316 and 31 23 23. 2. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required: a. Underground, Exterior:24 inches. b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab. 3. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 05 53 along entire conduit length for service entrance where not concrete-encased. L. Embedment Within Structural Concrete Slabs(only where approved by Structural Engineer): 1. Include proposed conduit arrangement with submittals. 2. Maximum Conduit Size: 1 inch(27 mm)unless otherwise approved. 3. Minimum Conduit Spacing:Shall be as directed by Structural Engineer. 4. Install conduits within middle one third of slab thickness. 5. Secure conduits to prevent floating or movement during pouring of concrete. M. Concrete Encasement:Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated to be concrete-encased, provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 with minimum concrete cover of 3 inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated. N. Hazardous(Classified) Locations:Where conduits cross boundaries of hazardous (classified)locations, provide sealing fittings located as indicated or in accordance with NFPA 70. O. Conduit Movement Provisions:Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings or approved flexible connections to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment.This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion,contraction, or deflection. 2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride(PVC) conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost. P. Condensation Prevention:Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation.This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces. 2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces. 3. Where conduits penetrate coolers or freezers. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH 2013 PAGE 14 OF 16 Q. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end. R. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. S. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 05 53. T. Do not cross conduits in slab. U. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter;de-burr cut ends. V. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings;fasten securely. W. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer.Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining.Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting.Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes minimum. X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. Y. All elbows installed in primary and secondary power conduit runs shall be minimum 36- inch radius. Z. Where conduit is shown stubbed into a telephone,computer or communication terminal area, conduit shall be stubbed up 6 inches below ceiling and terminated with insulating bushings. AA. Where the contractor elects to utilize PVC in lieu of GRC,the contractor shall provide supplemental ground bus in terminating switch and panelboards,and green ground wire as per code rules. AB. Conduit runs shall not exceed 100 feet without an accessible pull box installed in line. AC. Communications system conduit run above the ceiling shall not be installed within 12 inches of a parallel run of current carrying conductors,transformers,feeder cables, motors, or lighting ballasts. AD. Conduit connections between outlet boxes less than 24 inches apart on opposite sides of a wall shall be made with a loop of flexible conduit to limit sound transmission. AE. Penetrations of Masonry and Concrete Constructions: 1. Ensure that the sound control performance of structures be maintained in accordance with the drawings and specifications.All penetrations shall be installed in a manner that results in complete air tightness through structure. If a condition occurs where penetration of the structure by a conduit is not shown clearly on the drawings(or described in the specifications),the Contractor shall ask immediately for clarification of the method necessary to install the particular item. AF. Penetrations of Drywall Constructions: 1. Ensure that the sound control performance of structures be maintained in accordance with the drawings and specifications.All penetrations shall be installed in a manner that results in complete air tightness through structure. If a condition AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH 2013 PAGE 15 OF 16 occurs where penetration of the structure by a conduit is not shown clearly on the drawings(or described in the specifications),the Contractor shall ask immediately for clarification of the method necessary to install the particular item. AG. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00. AH. To attenuate objectionable EMI and RFI signals,the audio and video system raceway groups shall maintain a specified minimum distance separation whenever possible within the constraints of the building's architecture.System conduit groups that run parallel with each other shall adhere to the following table of minimum distance separation: AudioNideo Microphone Line Speaker Video Sub-System Microphone Adjacent 6 inches 12 inches 12 inches Line 6 inches Adjacent 12 inches 6 inches Speaker 12 inches 6 inches Adjacent 6 inches Video 12 inches _ 6 inches 6 inches Adjacent Al. Audio and video system conduit that runs parallel with AC power conduit shall be separated by at least 3 feet minimum. AJ. Audio and video system conduit that runs across or perpendicular to AC power conduit shall be separated by at least 1 foot minimum. AK. To attenuate objectionable EMI and RFI signals,the telecommunications system raceway and cable shall maintain a specified minimum distance separation whenever possible within the constraints of the building's architecture. Condition Minimum Separation Distance Unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in 24 inches proximity to open or nonmetal telecommunication pathways Unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in 12 inches proximity to a grounded metal telecommunication conduit pathway Power lines enclosed in a grounded metal conduit(or 12 inches equivalent shielding)in proximity to a grounded metal telecommunication conduit pathway Electrical motors,transformers,generators,frequency 47 inches converters,and UPS systems AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 34 PERMIT SET CONDUIT MARCH 2013 PAGE 16 OF 16 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements,for additional requirements. B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 35 PERMIT SET SURFACE RACEWAYS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 5 SECTION 26 05 35 SURFACE RACEWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface raceway systems. B. Wireways. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 26-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 05 29-Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 05 34-Conduit. D. Section 26 05 37-Boxes. E. Section 26 0553-Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. F. Section 26 27 26-Wiring Devices: Receptacles. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association;2010. B. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. NEMA 250- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum); 2008. D. UL 5-Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings;Current Edition,Including All Revisions. E. UL 111 -Outline of Investigation for Multioutlet Assemblies;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 870-Wireways,Auxiliary Gutters,and Associated Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of raceways with millwork,furniture, equipment,etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate rough-in locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 and conduit provided under Section 26 05 34 as required for installation of raceways provided under this section. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 35 PERMIT SET SURFACE RACEWAYS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 5 3. Verify minimum sizes of raceways with the actual conductors and components to be installed. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install raceways until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 2. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of raceways is complete between outlet,junction and splicing points. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including dimensions,knockout sizes and locations, materials,fabrication details,finishes,service condition requirements,and accessories. 1. Surface Raceway Systems: Include information on fill capacities for conductors and cables. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Pre-wired Surface Raceway Systems: Provide plan and elevation views including dimensioned locations of wiring devices and circuiting arrangements. 2. Wireways: Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views including adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications:Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all components,fittings,supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 35 PERMIT SET SURFACE RACEWAYS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 5 B. Provide products listed,classified,and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc.(UL)or Intertek(ETL)as suitable for the purpose indicated. C. Do not use raceways for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 2.02 SURFACE RACEWAY SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated:www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. MonoSystems, Inc:www.monosystems.com. 3. Wiremold,a brand of Legrand North America, Inc:www.Iegrand.us. 4. Panduit:www.panduit.com. B. Surface Metal Raceways: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 5. 1. Type Metallic-Surface Raceway System: a. Raceway Type:Single;Two; OR Three channel, painted steel. b. Size:As indicated on drawings. c. Color:To be selected by Architect. d. Accessory Device Boxes:Suitable for the devices to be installed;color to match raceway. C. Multioutlet Assemblies: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 111. 1. Type Multioutlet Assemblies-Surface Raceway System: a. Raceway Type:Single channel, painted steel. b. Size:As indicated on drawings. c. Color:To be selected by Architect. d. Accessory Device Boxes:Suitable for the devices to be installed;color to match raceway. e. Integrated Device Provisions: 1) Receptacles: (a) Comply with Section 26 27 26,except for finishes. (b) Configuration:As indicated on the drawings. (c) Color:As selected by Architect. (d) Spacing:As indicated on the drawings. D. Applications: 1. Surface ways may only be used as indicated on drawings or elsewhere in the specifications. 2.03 WIREWAYS A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper B-Line,a division of Cooper Industries:www.cooperindustries.com. 2. Hoffman,a brand of Pentair Technical Products:www.hoffmanonline.com. 3. Schneider Electric;Square D Products:www.schneider-electric.us. 4. Siemens:www.usa.siemens.com. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 35 PERMIT SET SURFACE RACEWAYS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 5 5. GE:www.ge.com. B. Description: Lay-in wireways and wiring troughs with removable covers; listed and labeled as complying with UL 870. C. Wireway Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Indoor Clean,Dry Locations: NEMA 250,Type 1, painted steel; OR Type 12, painted steel with screw-cover; hinged cover; OR secured with screws. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 3R, painted steel;Type 4X,stainless steel;OR Type 4X,fiberglass with screw-cover; hinged cover; OR secured with screws. D. Finish for Painted Steel Wireways: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated. E. Minimum Wireway Size:4 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. F. Where wireway size is not indicated,size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements,for additional requirements. B. Factory test each production unit for pre-wired surface raceway systems to verify proper wiring. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that outlet boxes and conduit terminations are installed in proper locations and are properly sized in accordance with NFPA 70 to accommodate raceways. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive raceways and that final surface finishes are complete,including painting. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install raceways in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Install raceways plumb and level. D. Arrange wireways and associated raceway connections to comply with NFPA 70,including but not limited to requirements for deflected conductors and wireways used as pullboxes. Increase size of wireway where necessary. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 35 PERMIT SET SURFACE RACEWAYS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 5 E. Secure and support raceways in accordance with Section 26 05 29 at intervals complying with NFPA 70 and manufacturer's requirements. F. Close unused raceway openings with factory fittings. G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. H. Identify raceways in accordance with Section 26 05 53. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements,for additional requirements. B. Inspect raceways for damage and defects. C. Surface Raceway Systems with Integrated Devices:Test each wiring device to verify operation and proper polarity. D. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective raceways. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint,or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed raceways from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 37 PERMIT SET BOXES MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 10 SECTION 26 05 37 BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull boxes. B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches. C. Boxes for hazardous(classified)locations. D. Floor boxes. E. Underground handhole enclosures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00-Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 07 84 00- Firestopping. C. Section 08 31 00-Access Doors and Panels: Panels for maintaining access to concealed boxes. D. Section 26 05 26-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 05 29- Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. F. Section 26 05 34-Conduit: 1. Conduit bodies and other fittings. 2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points. G. Section 26 05 35-Surface Raceways: 1. Accessory boxes designed specifically for surface raceway systems. 2. Lay-in wireways and wiring troughs with removable covers. H. Section 26 05 53-Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. I. Section 26 27 26-Wiring Devices: 1. Wall plates. 2. Floor box service fittings. 3. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices. j. Section 2710 05-Structured Cabling for Voice and Data- Inside-Plant:Additional requirements for communications systems outlet boxes. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 37 PERMIT SET BOXES MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 10 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association;2010. B. NECA 130-Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association;2010. C. NEMA FB 1 -Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes,and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2012(ANSI/NEMA FB 1). D. NEMA OS 1 -Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers,and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2008(Revised 2010)(ANSI/NEMA OS 1). E. NEMA 250- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2008. F. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. SCTE 77-Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity;Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; 2010(ANSI/SCTE 77). H. UL 50- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 50E-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 508A- Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 514A- Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors,clamps,support fittings,and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70. 4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits,calculated according to NFPA 70. 5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork,furniture, devices,equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 37 PERMIT SET BOXES MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 10 7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted boxes where indicated. 8. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Samples: 1. Floor Boxes: Provide one sample(s)of each specified floor box upon request. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency.Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation,and installation of product. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes,junction boxes, pull boxes,cabinets and enclosures,floor boxes,underground handhole enclosures,and similar items. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements,for additional provisions. 2. Keys for Lockable Enclosures:Two of each different key. • 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. C. Electrical boxes shall be sized according to NEC requirements unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. D. Maintain integrity of insulation materials where flush boxes are installed in insulated spaces. E. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle,and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BOXES A. General Requirements: 1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 37 PERMIT SET BOXES MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 10 2. Provide all boxes,fittings,supports,and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed. 3. Provide products listed,classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL)or Intertek(ETL)as suitable for the purpose indicated. 4. Where box size is not indicated,size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate. B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required. 2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required;furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers. 3. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or exposed intermediate metal conduit(IMC)is used. 4. Use cast aluminum boxes where aluminum rigid metal conduit is used. 5. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete. 6. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls. 7. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required. 8. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction. 9. Do not use"through-wall"boxes designed for access from both sides of wall. 10. Sheet-Steel Boxes:Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A. 11. Cast Metal Boxes:Comply with NEMA FB 1,and list and label as complying with UL 514A;furnish with threaded hubs. • 12. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported;furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required. 13. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-connected gangable boxes. 14. Minimum Box Size,Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Wiring Devices(Other Than Communications Systems Outlets):4 inch square by 1-1/2 inch deep(100 by 38 mm)trade size. b. Communications Systems Outlets:Comply with Section 27 10 05. c. Ceiling Outlets:4 inch octagonal or square by 1-1/2 inch deep(100 by 38 mm)trade size. 15. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 27 26. 16. Manufacturers: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds,a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com. b. Hubbell Incorporated; Bell Products:www.hubbell-bell.com. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 37 PERMIT SET BOXES MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 10 c. Hubbell Incorporated; RACO Products:www.hubbell-raco.com. d. O-Z/Gedney,a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. e. Thomas&Betts Corporation:www.tnb.com. f. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: 1. Comply with NEMA 250,and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E,or UL 508A. 2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations:Type 1, painted steel. b. Outdoor Locations:Type 3R, painted steel. 3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. b. Boxes 6 square feet and Larger: Provide hinged-cover enclosures. 4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures,Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes: a. Provide lockable hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. b. Back Panels:Painted steel,removable. c. Terminal Blocks: Provide voltage/current ratings and terminal quantity suitable for purpose indicated,with 25 percent spare terminal capacity. 5. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated. 6. Manufacturers: a. Cooper B-Line,a division of Cooper Industries:www.cooperindustries.com. b. Hoffman,a brand of Pentair Technical Products:www.hoffmanonline.com. c. Hubbell Incorporated;Wiegmann Products:www.hubbell-wiegmann.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. D. Underground Handhole Enclosures: 1. Description: In-ground,open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with legend indicating type of service and stainless steel cover bolts. 2. Size:As indicated on drawings or as required. 3. Depth:As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 12 inches. 4. Applications: a. Sidewalks and Landscaped Areas Subject Only to Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures,with minimum SCTE 77, Tier 8 load rating. b. Parking Lots,in Areas Subject Only To Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures,with minimum SCTE 77,Tier 15 load rating. c. Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehicular traffic. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 37 PERMIT SET BOXES . MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 10 5. Polymer Concrete Underground Handhole Enclosures: Comply with SCTE 77. a. Manufacturers: 1) Highline Products, Inc:www.highlineproducts.com. 2) Hubbell Incorporated; Quazite Products: www.hubbellpowersystems.com. 3) Oldcastle Precast, Inc:www.oldcastleprecast.com. 4) Utility Vault. 5) Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. E. Electrical Outlet Box Pad: 1. Electrical outlet box pads shall be applied where called out on the drawings or specifications. Its function is to seal box openings, increase mass, and provide damping to reduce air-transmitted sound through party walls. It shall consist of polybutene-butyl and inert fillers. Material shall provide good adhesion to metal and plastic. Pads shall be applied to the backs of installed electrical boxes, molded to box,and folded around conduit cable entering the box.Pads shall not be used in areas subject to temperatures above 200 degrees F. 2. The following are acceptable,subject to the above: a. Lowry's outlet box pads from Harry A. Lowry&Associates, Inc.,Sun Valley, California,(800)225-8231. b. SpecSeal firestop putty pads(fire-rated)from Specified Technologies, Incorporated,Somerville, New jersey,(800)992-1180. c. Or approved equal. F. In-Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250,Type 6,flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and,where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 37 PERMIT SET BOXES MARCH2013 PAGE 7OF10 E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems. F. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted. G. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or permitted. H. Box Locations: 1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 31 00 as required and where approved by the Architect. a. Coordinate exact location of infloor boxes with Architect. b. Adjust box locations up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended uprupose, at no additional cost to the owner. 2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate. 3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others. a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices as indicated on drawings. b. Communications Systems Outlets as indicated on drawings. 4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes. 5. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints. 6. Unless otherwise indicated,where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line. 7. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation. 8. Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire-resistance will not be reduced. a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individual noncommunicating stud cavities and protect both boxes with listed putty pads. b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or such that the total aggregate area of openings exceeds 100 square inches for any 100 square feet of wall area. 9. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated,as required to facilitate installation of conductors,and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 26 05 34. 10. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas,unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect: a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings. b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling. c. Electrical rooms. d. Mechanical equipment rooms. Box Supports: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 37 PERMIT SET BOXES MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 10 1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support)supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork,or other systems. 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support system. 4. Repair or replace supports for boxes that permit excessive movement. J. Install boxes plumb and level. K. Flush-Mounted Boxes: 1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete,tile,gypsum,plaster, etc.so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface. 2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface. 3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete,tile,gypsum, plaster,etc.so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge of the box. L. Floor-Mounted Cabinets: Mount on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00. M. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity. N. Metallic Floor Boxes: Install box level at the proper elevation to be flush with finished floor. O. Underground Handhole Enclosures: 1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 12 inches deep. 2. Flush-mount enclosures located in concrete or paved areas. 3. Mount enclosures located in landscaped areas with top at 1 inch above finished grade. 4. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover bolted in place. P. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. Q. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00. R. Close unused box openings. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 37 PERMIT SET BOXES MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF 10 S. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use. T. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. U. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53. 1. Adjust box locations up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose,at no additional cost to Owner. V. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring device orientation as specified in Section 26 27 26. W. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. X. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. Y. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas:Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. Z. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. AA. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. AB. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches,thermostats,and similar devices. 1. Acoustic rated walls. a. In a single stud wall,there shall be a separation of 24 inches between centerlines of outlet boxes or receptacles set into opposite sides of the wall. When these boxes are of dimensions exceeding 4 inches wide,this dimension(24 inches)shall be clear between the side walls, providing a full 24-inch separation regardless of the box size.Conduit connecting such boxes shall be flexible and shall provide 6 inches slack per 24 inches of run. b. In a double stud wall, boxes in opposite sides of the wall shall be located 24 inches on center, minimum. Effectively,this means that boxes on the same side of the wall will be 48 inches apart if there is a box between them on the other side of the wall.Conduit,in the case of a double wall,shall home run to a point outside of the partition before connecting to cable and conduit connecting boxes on the other side.Conduit,which shall be flexible, may thread through the studs on its own side but shall under no circumstances interface with the stud on the other side of the wall. c. The boxes shall be treated to reduce sound transmission.All unused knock- out holes shall be plugged with knock-out caps.The openings or cutouts in the walls to receive the boxes/receptacles shall be made no more than 1- 1/4 inches oversize to allow a gap all around of 1-1/8 inches.The flanges shall be perimeter sealed with acoustical caulking, prior to the boxes/receptacles being inserted. d. An outlet box pad,which acts to increase mass and provides damping,shall be applied to the backs of back-to-back electrical boxes separated by less AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER C 26 05 37� S MgRGH2 X13 PAGE/o o IOthan 24 in ch es or al ere the box rs installed;m acoustical barrier walls. Refer architectur //types. Use stamped steel fasten flu sh mounting outlet box between s tads AD Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceilin g outlet box.qE• Support boxes independently of conduit, exc eP cast box that is connected to two rigid me conduits b hup e d Within p2 inch of box.3 03 MEAN/NG A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt,�ebr's plaster and other foreign material.e Clean exposed u daces and restore finish. PROTECTION Immediately after;nstallation rotect boxes from entry of moisture and forei gn material until ready for inst allation of conductors.WITH OTHER P RODUCTS A. Coordinate installation of outlet bo x with products furnished under other sections of these specifications.e• Coordinate locations and sizes of rewired access d°ors,locate t� tang box;n masonry w require cutting of masonry unit corner only. EOOrdina e m as°mrY cu to achieve na o m© Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets m ou ntep above counters,benches, and wh architectural END OF sEN AM-3.533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 53 PERMIT SET IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 7 SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical identification requirements. B. Identification nameplates and labels. C. Wire and cable markers. D. Underground warning tape. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 90 00- Painting and Coating. B. Section 26 05 19- Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables:Color coding for power conductors and cables 600 V and less;vinyl color coding electrical tape. C. Section 26 27 26-Wiring Devices: Device and wallplate finishes;factory pre-marked wallplates. D. Section 27 10 05-Structured Cabling for Voice and Data: Identification for communications cabling and devices. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Verify final designations for equipment,systems,and components to be identified prior to fabrication of identification products. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not conceal items to be identified,in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until identification products have been installed. 2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 53 PERMIT SET IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 7 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to remain whose designations are changed as part of the new work. B. Identification for Equipment: 1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments,and components. a. Switchboards: 1) Identify ampere rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Identify power source. 4) Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective device. 5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s)served for each branch device. Identify spares. b. Panelboards: 1) Identify ampere rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Identify power source. 4) Identify main overcurrent protective device. Use identification label for panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate. 5) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s)served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces. 6) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify load(s)served for each branch device. Identify spares. c. Enclosed switches,circuit breakers,and motor controllers: 1) Identify voltage and phase. 2) Identify power source. 3) Identify load(s)served. d. Time Switches: 1) Identify load(s)served and associated circuits controlled. Include location. e. Enclosed Contactors: 1) Identify voltage and phase. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 53 PERMIT SET IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 7 2) Identify configuration,e.g.,E.O.E.H.(electrically operated, electrically held)or E.O.M.H.(electrically operated, mechanically held). 3) Identify coil voltage. 4) Identify load(s)and associated circuits controlled. Include location. 2. Service Equipment: a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means. b. For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service,or any combination of branch circuits,feeders,and services, use identification nameplate acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service disconnecting means to identify all other services,feeders, and branch circuits supplying that building or structure.Verify format and descriptions with authority having jurisdiction. c. Use identification nameplate or identification label at each piece of service equipment to identify the available fault current and the date calculations were performed. 3. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify equipment utilizing series ratings,where permitted, in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with remote disconnecting means. 5. Use identification label, identification nameplate, or handwritten text using indelible marker on inside of door at each motor controller to identify nameplate horsepower,full load amperes,code letter,service factor,voltage,and phase of motor(s)controlled. 6. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for electrical equipment,such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination,adjustment,servicing, or maintenance while energized. a. Minimum Size: 5 by 7 inches. b. Legend: Include orange header that reads"WARNING",followed by the word message"Arc Flash and Shock Hazard;Appropriate PPE Required; Do not operate controls or open covers without appropriate personal protection equipment; Failure to comply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA 70E for minimum PPE requirements"or approved equivalent. C. Identification for Conductors and Cables: 1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19 and as follows: Less Than 250 Volts Between Phases:251-600 Volts Between Phases: Phase A-BlackPhase A-Brown Phase B-RedPhase B-Orange Phase C-BluePhase C-Yellow Neutral-WhiteNeutral-Gray Ground-GreenGround-Green AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 53 PERMIT SET IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 7 2. Identification for Communications Conductors and Cables:Comply with Section 27 10 05. 3. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for power,control,and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations: a. At each source and load connection. b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present. c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the enclosure. 4. Use wire and cable markers to identify connected grounding electrode system components for grounding electrode conductors. 5. Use underground warning tape to identify direct buried cables. D. Identification for Raceways: 1. Use underground warning tape to identify underground raceways. E. Identification for Boxes: 1. Fire Alarm System: Red. 2. For exposed boxes in public areas, do not color code. 3. Use handwritten text using indelible marker to identify circuits enclosed. a. For exposed boxes in public areas, provide identification on inside face of cover. F. Identification for Devices: 1. Identification for Communications Devices:Comply with Section 27 10 05. 2. Factory Pre-Marked Wallplates:Comply with Section 26 27 26. 3. Use identification label to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles. 4. Use identification label to identify receptacles protected by upstream GFI protection,where permitted. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Identification Nameplates: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brimar Industries, Inc:www.brimar.com. b. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co:www.kolbipipemarkers.com. c. Seton Identification Products:www.seton.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2. Materials: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates. b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic,stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use. 3. Plastic Nameplates:Two-layer or three-layer laminated electrically non-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text. a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch when any dimension is greater than 4 inches. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 53 PERMIT SET IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 7 4. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch;engraved or laser- etched text. 5. Aluminum Nameplates:Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch;engraved or laser-etched text. 6. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners:Two,centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes. B. Identification Labels: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady Corporation:www.bradyid.com. b. Brother International Corporation:www.brother-usa.com. c. Panduit Corp:www.panduit.com. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV,chemical,water, heat,and abrasion resistant. a. Use only for indoor locations. 3. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth,wrap- around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified. 1. Do not use self-adhesive type markers. B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties. C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated. D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text,all capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use handwritten text. E. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch. F. Color: Black text on white. 2.04 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation:www.bradyid.com. 2. Brimar Industries, Inc:www.brimar.com. 3. Seton Identification Products:www.seton.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Materials: Use APWA approved non-detectable type OR foil-backed detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwise indicated. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 53 PERMIT SET IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH2013 PAGE6OF7 1. Exception:Use foil-backed detectable type tape where required by serving utility or as noted. C. Non-detectable Type Tape: 3 inches wide,with minimum thickness of 4 mil. D. Foil-backed Detectable Type Tape:3 inches wide,with minimum thickness of 5 mil, unless otherwise required for proper detection. E. Legend:Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape. F. Color: 1. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background. 2. Tape for Buried Communication,Alarm, and Signal Lines: Black text on orange background. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment,servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows: 1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front. 2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door or enclosure front. 3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front;also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access. 4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform. 5. Branch Devices:Adjacent to device. 6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access. 7. Conduits: Legible from the floor. 8. Boxes: Outside face of cover, unless otherwise noted. 9. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access. 10. Devices:Outside face of coverpiate. C. Install identification products centered, level,and parallel with lines of item being identified. D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws, rivets, self-adhesive backing,or epoxy cement and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement. 1. Do not use adhesives on exterior surfaces except where substrate can not be penetrated. E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion,with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 05 53 PERMIT SET IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 7 F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 6 inches below finished grade. For trenches over 18 inches wide, install additional marker tape such that they are not over 10 inches apart(edge to edge)over the entire width of the trench. G. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws. H. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00- Quality Requirements,for additional requirements. B. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles,wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper adhesion. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 09 18 PERMIT SET LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 10 SECTION 26 09 18 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Networked lighting control system. B. Remote switches. C. Remote sensors. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 34-Conduit. B. Section 26 05 37- Boxes: Switch outlets and installation of switch devices. C. Section 26 24 16-Panelboards. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data:Submit manufacturer's data on lighting control system and components. C. Shop Drawings:Submit drawings of lighting control panel and accessories, including, but not necessarily limited to,the low voltage relay panels, power wiring,and switch inputs. 1. Switch Input Wiring. 2. Control Output Terminations. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation,and installation of product. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and record circuiting and switching arrangements. Provide accurate"as-built" drawings to the Owner for correct programming and proper maintenance of the control system.The"as-builts"shall indicate the load controlled by each relay and the relay panel number. F. Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts numbers and recommended spare parts list.The factory shall supply all operation and service manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and UL 916. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 0918 PERMIT SET LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 10 B. ETL& ETLc Approvals:The control panels shall be tested and listed under the UL 916 Energy Management Equipment standards and CSA C22.2#205 by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. C. NEC Compliance:The control system shall comply with all applicable National Electrical Codes regarding electrical wiring standards. D. NEMA Compliance:The control system shall comply with all applicable portions of the NEMA standards regarding the types of electrical equipment enclosures. E. Component Pre-testing:All control equipment shall undergo strict inspection standards. The equipment shall be previously tested and burned-in at the factory prior to installation. F. System Checkout:A factory trained technician or factory authorized personnel or contractor shall functionally test the control system and verify performance after installation. G. Manufacturer Qualifications:Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years experience in control systems. Manufacturer shall provide off the shelf control products from its inventory. Control systems that require custom assembly and sizing shall not be acceptable. H. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Greengate:www.cooperlighting.com/greengate. B. Lighting Control &Design:www.lightingcontrols.com. C. Leviton:www.leviton.com. D. Wattstopper:www.wattstopper.com. E. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROL A. System Description: 1. The lighting control system shall consist of low voltage relay control panels with 32 programmable switch inputs and shall offer 32 control relays. 2. Each low voltage lighting control panel shall be microprocessor controlled with an integral 4 x 16-64 character display and with a programming keypad. 3. Programmable intelligence shall include Time-Of-Day control, 32 holiday dates, warn occupants of an impending off,timed inputs, preset control,auto daylight savings,astronomical clock w/offsets,and local control. a. TOD:64 Time-Of-Day/holiday schedules for 365 day programming. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 09 18 PERMIT SET LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 10 b. Holidays:32 holiday dates. c. Warn Off: Flashlights and provide an extra 1-second to 99 minutes of illumination. d. Preset: Pre-programmed switch patterns. e. Timed Inputs:Switch input timers 1-999 minutes. f. Timed Overrides:Timed override 1-999 minutes, resumes to normal schedule. g. Local Control:From alphanumeric keypad&local switch. h. Astronomical Clock: Longitude and latitude input with sunset-sunrise offsets to customize outdoor lighting. Auto Daylight Savings Adjust:Automatically adjusts the clock at the appropriate dates,selectable. j. Priorities:Establishes a hierarchy for inputs and network control commands. k. Masking: Provides permission orientation to switch inputs and network commands thereby ensuring building lighting control integrity. I. Soft-Linking:Group linking for rapid programming. 4. Relays may be designated as either normally open or normally closed from software. Relay status shall not only disclose commanded relay status but next scheduled state to occur. 5. Each control panel shall provide a Warn Off(flash the lights)to inform the occupants of an impending Off command.The Warn Off command shall provide an adjustable time duration of 1 second to 99 extra minutes.The occupants may exit the premises with adequate lighting or cancel the Warn Off by overriding the lighting zone.This option occurs with all Off commands except local overrides. 6. The controller shall permit lighting to be overridden On for after hours use or cleaning.The controller shall provide optional switch timer assignments or timed overrides.The override choices for various relays shall provide special event occurrences and the controller shall return to the programmed state.Also,the controller shall provide priority and masking choices to customize the functions of switch inputs,thereby enabling switches to function differently at different times of the day to meet special facility operational requirements.These overrides shall be hard-wired inputs. 7. Programming the controller shall be through the local integral keypad. Descriptive information shall assist the user to employ the system without a programming manual. 8. Priorities and/or Masking shall be assigned to inputs,telephone override,and global commands to insure building integrity. Priorities enable or disable the inputs based on Time-Of-Day scheduling in the controller. Masks shall permit:On only,Off only and On&Off control for intelligent after hours utilization of the controlled facility 9. The lighting control system may be fully programmed through PC programming software.Programming shall be permitted through a direct RS-232 connection, modem or Ethernet. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 09 18 PERMIT SET LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 10 10. The control system shall provide networking between lighting control panels. Panels shall permit data sharing for global control.All inputs(no limitation)are transferable over the network to create any switching pattern required. B. Hardware Features: 1. Operator Interface: a. The control panel-programming interface resides in firmware in the control panel.The programming interface shall consist of a circuit board mounted keypad capable of linking switch inputs to relay outputs and schedule assignments. Systems that utilize blocking diode technology for relay assignments shall not be acceptable. b. The integral keypad shall provide access to the main programming features.The keypad shall permit the user to manually command any or all relays individually. Each panel shall control its own loads from internal memory.A control system that relies on a central control computer/processor or external time clocks shall not be permitted. 2. Contact Inputs: a. The control system shall permit 32 dry contacts(Digital/Switch Inputs)for override purposes. Momentary 3 wire or 2 wire(toggle)inputs shall be supported. Maintained contacts shall be supported as 2 wire(SPST)inputs. Inputs shall be dry contacts(24 VDC @ 12 ma. internally supplied to the inputs).An input shall be software linked to any number of relays for override control. b. The controller shall provide timers for each switch input. Each switch input timer shall be capable of 0-999 minutes.Software shall enable or disable switch inputs based on Time of Day scheduling. 3. Relay Type: a. The system shall utilize control relays which are rated to 20 amps at 120 VAC.The relays shall be magnetically held and are provided in groups of eight. Relays that are latched or mechanically held are not acceptable.The relays shall be rated for 10 million mechanical operations.A limited 10-year warranty shall be provided on the individual relays. 4. Modular Design: a. The control system shall employ all modular connectors to avoid repeat wiring in case of component failure.The system CPU board shall be mounted on quick release hinge pins that shall permit an entire change out of the processor and input board in less than 1 minute. b. All connections for the switch inputs shall incorporate modular connectors. The relay board shall be modular and designed for rapid field replacement or upgrading.Systems that do not employ modular connectors shall not be acceptable. 5. Hardware Output Options: a. Latching Relay Card(LRC) AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 09 18 PERMIT SET LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM MARCH2013 PAGE 5OF10 1) The controller shall provide an option for remote placement of the control relays.A modular card shall connect into the relay compartment.Twisted(3)conductor cable shall power and control the remote mounted relays. Maximum distance is 500 feet employing 18 AWG conductor. b. Modular Relay Card(MRC) 1) The controller shall provide an option for modular relay control. The Modular Relay Card(MRC)shall offer the feature of controlling two pole voltages such as 208,240,and 480VAC in a Normally Open or Normally Closed configuration.Single pole is offered for 120 and 277VAC in a Normally Open and Absolute Zero Configuration.This relay card shall also provide visual indication of relay status. Relays shall be individually exchangeable with plug in low voltage connectors.Combinations of relays shall be permitted since relay modules shall snap into and lock in location.Two pole modules require two relay locations for a maximum of four two-pole relays per card.All other relay modules use 1 relay location for a maximum of eight per card.All Modular Relay Card components shall be warranted for 10 years. c. Two Pole Relay Card(TPRC) 1) The controller shall provide an option for two pole relay control. The Two Pole Relay Card TPRC shall offer the feature of controlling two pole voltages such as 208,240,and 480 VAC lighting loads at 20 amps.The relays shall be modular in design and offer manual hand override control.This optional relay card shall also provide a visual indication of relay status.The 208, 240 VAC version shall provide 8 relays per card whereas the 480 VAC version shall provide 4 relays per card.Combinations of relays shall be permitted since relays shall snap into location. d. Automatic Relay Card(ARC) 1) The system shall utilize hybrid control relays that are rated to 20 amps at 277 VAC.The hybrid relay shall combine a high-speed electronic switch with a mechanical relay to create a unique switching device.The hybrid design shall look at each AC phase and shall close the electronic switch precisely at the absolute zero crossing.The mechanical relay in parallel shall follow and close after the in-rush current condition.The relay shall provide an integral switch for both manual hand operation and visual indication of relay status.The relays shall be rated for 10 million mechanical operations.A limited 2-year warranty shall be provided on the individual relays. e. Lighted Switch Card(LSC) 1) The controller shall provide an option for pilot light wall switch annunciation.A modular card shall connect into the controller AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 09 18 PERMIT SET LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 10 board and shall provide power to illuminate pilot light switches. This option shall confirm relay operation.When a relay is in the "ON" position the pilot light switch shall be illuminated. 6. Diagnostic Aids: a. Each control panel shall incorporate diagnostic aids for confirmation of proper operation, or in case of failure these aids shall guide the individual in rapid troubleshooting of the system. b. The control panels shall employ both a backlit supertwist LCD and LED's that indicates: 1) POWER(LED) 2) SYSTEM OK(LED) 3) NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS(LED) 4) ON/OFF STATUS of EACH RELAY(LED&LCD) 5) SYSTEM CLOCK and DATE(LCD) 6) PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION(LCD) 7) (TOD, HOLIDAY,ON/OFF,&PRESET) c. Control systems that do not provide visual self help diagnostics shall not be acceptable. 7. Memory Back-Up: a. The system shall utilize a memory back-up device that is system integrated and shall be non-serviceable.The data in RAM shall be protected against power interruptions lasting as long as 7 days.The power interrupt protection circuit shall be entirely maintenance-free. 8. Multi-tapped Transformer: a. The control panel shall incorporate the use of a multi-tapped transformer. The panel shall not require specification of voltage for each control location.The voltages of 120&277 VAC shall be available with each control panel. 9. Status Indication of Relays: a. The system shall provide visible status indication of all relays through the window of each control panel.The visual indication shall disclose On/Off status and relay number. 10. Service Override& Priority Override: a. The control panel shall provide a three position master-service override for the control unit.The service override shall not be accessible from the exterior. b. The master service override provides a single three position switch with the option of All Off,Auto,and All On, respectively.This master switch shall operate all of the relays in the controller.This switch shall override and supersede all commands from the logic board when the switch is in the All On or All Off position.The master switch shall function to override all the relays should the logic board programming differ from the space function. c. The system shall remember the last command to the individual relays. Upon returning the master override switch to the Auto position,the relays AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 09 18 PERMIT SET LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 10 shall return to the most recent command state.This will occur even if the last command happened during the master override condition. d. Additionally,the system shall provide external priority override for the entire panel.Through an externally maintained contact the override card shall place the panel in a priority state.This external contact will supersede any other programmed state and will command all the relays ON or OFF depending on operational choice.This priority state will continue until the external contact is removed.Once the external override is removed the control panel will return the relays to the appropriate programmed state. 11. Lockable Enclosure: a. Each control panel shall be enclosed in a lockable NEMA class 1 enclosure. The enclosure shall be manufactured out of 1/16"steel and shall provide pre-punched knockouts for efficient installation. 12. Panels: a. The low voltage controller shall exist in two sizes of relay enclosures.The enclosure maximum sizes shall be either 16 or 32 relays per cabinet.The 16 size will employ two relays cards and the 32 will utilize 4 relay cards. Relays shall be provided in groups of eight relays per card. 13. High Voltage Barriers: a. The low voltage controller shall provide as an option the ability to provide a barrier for either voltage separation or emergency circuit separation.The 16-size enclosure shall permit one barrier and the 32-size enclosure shall permit up to three locations where the barrier(s)may be installed.The barrier shall be painted red to denote the difference. 14. Modem: a. The control system shall be capable of modem communications. Each control panel shall provide a serial communications port for external tele- communications.The modem shall utilize the Hayes compatibility standard and enable modem access as defined by the Bell 212A and CCITT V.22 protocol standards. b. The system shall permit: Local Area Network(LAN)with the optional Supervisor program, On-Site&Off-Site communications.The system shall be a multi-tasking system and permit more than one modem in operation at a time communicating on the network.Communication speed shall be a minimum of 14,400 baud. 15. Keeper Enterprise Software: a. The PC based interface software accessory provides access to lighting control system files within a Microsoft Windows environment.The software package shall allow individual panel programming to be executed locally, direct connection, Ethernet connection or remotely through a modem.The central programming software shall permit the user to modify the control panel programming or configuration in an"OFF-LINE" mode.This software package shall store all programmed data and archive for future use. Systems using third party software are not acceptable. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 09 18 PERMIT SET LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 10 b. The following features shall be standard in the PC based software: 1) Standard Software Features: 2) Real Time Relay Status Monitoring 3) Alpha-Numeric Descriptors 4) Communications: Direct, Network, Ethernet and Modem 5) Network Status Indication 6) Global Software Modifications • 7) Manual Relay Commands 8) Remote Pattern Commands 9) Preset Options 10) File Maintenance 11) Archive Programs 12) Data Base Restoration 13) Uploading and Downloading of Programs c. Software package shall permit the PC to be utilized for other functions(i.e. word processing,data-base,&etc.)besides lighting control.Systems that require an"on-line"dedicated computer for control system operation shall not be acceptable. 16. PC Interface(RS-232 port): a. The controller shall permit PC programming through software.The controller shall provide a RJ-12 connection for RS-232 programming. Programming shall be permitted through either a local connection or remotely through a modem.PC software shall permit multiple file storage for data archival and for seasonal facility requirements. Operator commands may be issued directly from the PC keyboard. 17. Network Hardware Options(provide only as required for operation): a. AnalogKeeper(AK) 1) Provides the ability to add analog remote sensing to the ControlKeeper network.An analog photosensor connected to the AnalogKeeper shall broadcast photocell light levels onto the ControlKeeper's network for any relay to employ.The actual network broadcasted data is available for any relay to actuate either an "on/off'at any preset analog value for total global control.All relays connected to the network are capable of being set to different analog photosensor values for total building control. b. ControlKeeper-2(CK-2) 1) The CK-2 shall provide additional flexibility by providing two 20 amp @ 277 VAC rated relays that are addressable and fully programmable from the network.The CK-2 controllers although accessible through the network shall be fully stand-alone in their control capability.The remote controller(CK-2) provides full status indication of CPU status, network communication, power,and HOA overrides.The controller shall provide two(2)switch inputs that may be configured as a maintained,or momentary inputs.Thirty AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 09 18 PERMIT SET LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF 10 (30)additional global commands shall be available for network control and shall reside in the CK-2. 2.03 REMOTE SWITCHES A. Wall Switch:Toggle type. 1. Description: Momentary contact,three position switches,color to match line voltage switches, rated 3 amperes at 25 VAC. 2. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Key Switches: Match non-key switch ratings. 1. Description:Cylinder lock type. 2. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. C. Switches with Pilot Lamp: 1. Description: Momentary contact three position rocker type, color to match line voltage switches,rated 3 amperes at 25 VAC,with integral red pilot light. 2. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.04 REMOTE SENSORS A. Exterior Lighting Sensor: 1. Description: Photodiode lighting sensor in weatherproof housing. 2. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Photocell Control Unit: 1. Photodiode control unit with PHOTOCELL ENABLE and MASTER OVERRIDE inputs for remote control,3-minute time delay. 2. Selectable ranges for 1 to 10 fc, 10 to 100 fc, 100 to 1000 fc, 1000 to 10,000 fc. 3. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.05 POWER LIMITED WIRE AND CABLE A. Manufacturers:As recommended by lighting control system manufacturer. B. Remote Control Cable: Copper conductor,300 volt insulation rated 60 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together and covered with PVC jacket. C. Plenum Cable:Copper conductor,300 volt insulation rated 60 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together and covered with nonmetallic jacket; suitable for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts,and plenums. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring in the following locations in conduit in accordance with Section 26 05 34: 1. Within walls. 2. Above inaccessible ceilings. 3. Within hollow spaces used as air handling ducts and plenums. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 09 18 PERMIT SET LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 10 OF 10 4. Exposed along surfaces. B. Install relays to be accessible.Allow space for adequate ventilation and circulation of air. C. The control system shall be installed and fully wired as shown on the plans by the installing contractor.The contractor shall complete all electrical connections to all control circuits,and override wiring. 3.02 SCHEDULES A. As required by the Owner. 3.03 PRODUCT SUPPORT AND SERVICE A. Factory telephone support shall be available at no cost to the Owner. B. A minimum of 4 hours of on-site factory support shall be available at no cost to the Owner.Additional hours may be negotiated by the Contractor or Owner. C. Factory assistance shall consist of solving programming or application questions concerning the control equipment. 3.04 SYSTEM DELIVERY AND ACCEPTANCE A. The contractor is responsible for complete installation of the entire system according to strict factory standards and requirements.The following items shall constitute factory standards and requirements: 1. All system equipment shall operate in accordance with specification and industrial standard procedures. 2. An operational user program shall exist in the control system.The program shall execute and perform all functions required to effectively operate the site according to the requirements. 3. Demonstration of program integrity during normal operation and pursuant to a power outage. 4. Contractor shall provide a minimum of six training hours on the operation and use of the control system and software.Additional support services shall be negotiated between the contractor and the building owner or manager. 3.05 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall supply a 2-year warranty on all hardware and software.A limited 10- year warranty shall be provided on the standard relay card. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 24 13 PERMIT SET SWITCHBOARDS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 5 SECTION 26 2413 SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Switchboards. B. Metering transformer cabinets. C. Meter bases. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00-Cast-in-Place Concrete:Concrete for supporting foundations and pads. B. Section 26 05 26-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 05 53-Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D. Section 26 28 13-Fuses. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 400-Standard for Installing and Maintaining Switchboards(ANSI); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2007. B. NEMA PB 2-Deadfront Distribution Switchboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2011. C. NEMA PB 2.1 -General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation,and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007 D. NETA STD ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. E. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. F. UL 891 -Standard for Safety Switchboards; Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.;2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics including voltage,frame size and trip ratings,fault current withstand ratings,and time-current curves of all equipment and components. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 24 13 PERMIT SET SWITCHBOARDS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 5 C. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends;size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral,and ground;and switchboard instrument details. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,and installation of product. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of switchboards. F. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing;source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies;and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements,for additional provisions. 2. Enclosure Keys:Two of each different key. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications:Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section. C. Perform work in accordance with utility company written requirements and NFPA 70. 1. Maintain one copy of each document on site. D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver in 48 inch maximum width shipping splits,individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids. B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,water, construction debris,and traffic. C. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure,and finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Electrical:www.eatonelectrical.com. B. General Electric Company:www.geindustrial.com. C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products:www.schneider-electric.us. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 24 13 PERMIT SET SWITCHBOARDS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 5 D. Siemens:www.sea.siemens.com. 2.02 SWITCHBOARDS A. Description: NEMA PB 2 switchboard with electrical ratings and configurations as indicated and specified. B. Ratings: 1. Voltage and bus ampacity rating:As indicated on drawings. 2. Integrated Equipment Rating: 100,000 rms amperes symmetrical. 3. Main service board shall be service entrance rated. C. Bus Material:Copper or aluminum with tin plating, standard size. D. Bus Connections:Bolted,accessible from front for maintenance. E. Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard. F. Insulated Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard. G. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. 1. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. 2. Include shunt trip where indicated. H. Line and Load Terminations:Accessible from the front only of the switchboard,suitable for the conductor materials and sizes indicated. I. Metering Transformer Compartment: For utility company's use;compartment size, bus spacing and drilling,door, and locking and sealing requirements in accordance with utility company's requirements. J. Future Provisions: Fully equip spaces for future devices with bussing and bus connections,suitably insulated and braced for short circuit currents. Provide continuous current rating as indicated. K. Pull Box: Removable top and sides,same construction as switchboard. 1. Size as shown on Drawings. 2. Set front back sufficient distance to accommodate circuit breaker lifting devices. 3. Provide insulating,fire-resistive bottom with separate openings for each circuit to pass into switchboard. L. Enclosure:Type 1 -General Purpose. 1. Align sections at rear only. 2. Switchboard Height:90 inches,excluding floor sills, lifting members and pull boxes. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces.Coat internal surfaces with minimum one coat corrosion-resisting paint, or plate with cadmium or zinc. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 24 13 PERMIT SET SWITCHBOARDS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 5 M. All lugs shall be field replaceable compression type. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Metering Transformer Cabinets:Sheet metal cabinet with hinged door,conforming to utility company requirements,with provisions for locking and sealing. 1. Size:As required by utility. B. Meter Base:As required by utility company. C. Other Components:As required by utility company. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Shop inspect and test switchboard according to NEMA PB 2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Provide concrete housekeeping pad under the provisions of Section 03 30 00. B. Arrange with utility company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. C. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer and as indicated on utility company drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboard in locations shown on drawings, according to NEMA PB 2.1. B. Install transformer pad and/or vault, metering transformer cabinets,and meter base as required by utility company. C. Install in a neat and workmanlike manner,as specified in NECA 400. D. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard. E. Identify switchboards in accordance with Section 26 05 53. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field testing in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS,except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS,Section 7.1. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. B. Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 24 13 PERMIT SET SWITCHBOARDS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 5 C. For systems with adjustable trip circuit breakers,provide coordination study for review. Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values indicated on coordination study. Submit to Architect for review. 3.05 CLEANING A. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 24 16 PERMIT SET PANELBOARDS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 10 SECTION 26 2416 • PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Power distribution panelboards. B. Lighting and appliance panelboards. C. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 26-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 05 29- Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 05 53-Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D. Section 26 28 13- Fuses: Fuses for fusible switches and spare fuse cabinets. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-375-Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification; Revision D, 2006. B. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association;2010. C. NECA 407-Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2009. D. NEMA 250- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum);2008. E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards;National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2011. F. NEMA PB 1.1 -General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007. G. NETA STD ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. H. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. I. UL 50-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 2416 PERMIT SET PANELBOARDS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 10 J. UL 50E-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 67- Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 489-Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 869A- Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 943-Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 1053-Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 1699-Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades. Do not place ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted panelboards where indicated. 4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards,enclosures,overcurrent protective devices,and other installed components and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions,voltage, main bus ampacity,overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes,short circuit current ratings,conduit entry locations,conductor terminal information,and installed features and accessories. D. Field Quality Control Test Reports. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 2416 PERMIT SET PANELBOARDS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 10 E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation,and installation of product. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed circuiting arrangements. G. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements,for additional provisions. 2. Panelboard Keys:One for each panelboard installed. 3. See Section 26 2813 for requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle,and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA 407. B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,water, construction debris, and traffic. C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure,and finish. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of panelboards: 1. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation;Cutler-Hammer Products:www.eaton.com. B. General Electric Company:www.geindustrial.com. C. Schneider Electric;Square D Products:www.schneider-electric.us. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 24 16 PERMIT SET PANELBOARDS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 10 D. Siemens:www.sea.siemens.com. E. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. F. Source Limitations:Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 ALL PANELBOARDS A. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F. C. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location. 2. Listed series ratings are acceptable, except where not permitted by motor contribution according to NFPA 70,acceptable only where specifically indicated, or not acceptable. 3. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by NFPA 70. D. Panelboards Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A. E. Mains:Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices:Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices. G. Bussing:Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements. 1. Provide fully rated neutral bus,with a suitable lug for each feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection. 2. Provide 200 percent rated neutral bus and lugs where oversized neutral conductors are provided. 3. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard,with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 4. Provide separate isolated/insulated ground bus where indicated. H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. I. Enclosures:Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50 E. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 24 16 PERMIT SET PANELBOARDS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 10 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated,as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations:Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations:Type 3R. 2. Boxes:Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed. b. Increase gutter space as required where sub-feed lugs,feed-through lugs, gutter taps, or oversized lugs are provided. c. Provide removable end walls for NEMA Type 1 enclosures. d. Provide painted steel boxes for surface-mounted panelboards, finish to match fronts. 3. Fronts: a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures:Same dimensions as boxes. b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures:Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough opening. c. Finish for Painted Steel Fronts: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lockable Doors:All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. J. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions. K. Ground Fault Protection:Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed and labeled as complying with UL 1053. 1. Where electronic circuit breakers equipped with integral ground fault protection are used,provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable. 2. Where accessory ground fault sensing and relaying equipment is used, equip companion overcurrent protective devices with ground-fault shunt trips. a. Use zero sequence ground fault detection method unless otherwise indicated. b. Provide test panel and field-adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay settings. L. Selectivity:Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated,furnish products as required to achieve selective coordination. M. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: 1. Feed-through lugs. 2. Main breaker. 3. Double lugs. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 24 16 PERMIT SET PANELBOARDS MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 10 2.03 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker type,and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material:Aluminum,suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type:Compression. C. Bussing: 1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material:Aluminum or copper. 2. Ground Bus Material:Copper. D. Circuit Breakers: 1. Provide bolt on type secured with locking mechanical restraints. 2. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated. E. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures as indicated. 2. Fronts: Provide trims to cover access to load terminals,wiring gutters,and other live parts,with exposed access to overcurrent protective device handles. 2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit breaker type,and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material:Aluminum,suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type:Compression. C. Bussing: 1. Phase Bus Connections:Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices. 2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material:Aluminum or copper. 3. Ground Bus Material:Copper. D. Circuit Breakers:Thermal magnetic bolt-on type. E. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated,20"wide, 5.75' deep. 2. Fronts: Provide hinged door trim that is fastened closed with screws,with hinged cover for access to load terminals and wiring gutters,and separate lockable hinged AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 2416 PERMIT SET PANELBOARDS MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 10 door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts. 3. Provide circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door. 2.05 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Description:Quick-make,quick-break,over center toggle,trip-free,trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489,and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings,configurations,and features as indicated on the drawings. 2. Interrupting Capacity: a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than: 1) 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC. 2) 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC. b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. c. Series Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers listed in combination with upstream devices to provide interrupting rating not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. 3. Conductor Terminations: a. Provide mechanical lugs for circuit breaker frame sizes less than 400 amperes. b. Provide compression lugs for circuit breaker frame sizes 400 amperes and above. c. Lug Material:Aluminum,suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers:For each pole,furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection. a. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 225 amperes and larger. b. Provide interchangeable trip units for circuit breaker frame sizes 400 amperes and larger. 5. For air conditioning equipment branch circuits provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR. 6. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles. 7. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated: a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter(GFCI)Circuit Breakers:Listed as complying with UL 943,class A for protection of personnel. b. Ground Fault Equipment Protection Circuit Breakers: Designed to trip at 30 mA for protection of equipment. c. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter(AFCI)Circuit Breakers:Combination type listed as complying with UL 1699. Provide where required by code. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 2416 PERMIT SET PANELBOARDS MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 10 8. Provide listed switching duty rated circuit breakers with SWD marking for all branch circuits serving lighting. 9. Provide listed high intensity discharge lighting rated circuit breakers with HID marking for all branch circuits serving HID lighting. 10. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. 11. Do not use handle ties in lieu of multi-pole circuit breakers. 12. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: a. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator. b. Handle Pad-Lock Provision: For locking circuit breaker handle in OFF position. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install panelboards securely,in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 407(panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29. E. Install panelboards plumb. F. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered. G. Mount panelboards such that the top of panelboard is 6 feet 6 inches above the floor or working platform. Install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above the floor. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 24 16 PERMIT SET PANELBOARDS MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF 10 H. Mount floor-mounted power distribution panelboards on properly sized 3 inch or 4 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00. I. Provide six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling. 1. 1 empty 1 inch for every 6 spare breaker pole spaces and spare breakers. �. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. 1. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only.Do not terminate on isolated/insulated ground bus. 2. Terminate branch circuit isolated grounding conductors on isolated/insulated ground bus only.Do not terminate on solidly bonded equipment ground bus. K. Install all field-installed branch devices,components,and accessories. L. Multi-Wire Branch Circuits:Group grounded and ungrounded conductors together in the panelboard as required by NFPA 70. M. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as required. N. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as required. O. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards. P. Provide circuit breaker lock-on devices to prevent unauthorized personnel from de- energizing essential loads where indicated.Also provide for the following: 1. Emergency and night lighting circuits. 2. Fire detection and alarm circuits. 3. Communications equipment circuits. 4. Intrusion detection and access control system circuits. 5. Video surveillance system circuits. Q. Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 26 05 53. R. Provide computer-generated circuit directory for each lighting and appliance panelboard and each power distribution panelboard provided with a door,clearly and specifically indicating the loads served.Identify spares and spaces. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspection,testing,and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS,except Section 4. C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers.Tests listed as optional are not required, except for the following: 1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. 2. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 24 16 PERMIT SET PANELBOARDS MARCH2013 PAGE 10OF10 D. Ground Fault Protection Systems:Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as required by NFPA 70. 1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS,Section 7.14.The insulation- resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is not required. E. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation. F. Test AFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation. G. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation. H. Procure services of a qualified manufacturer's representative to observe installation and assist in inspection,testing,and adjusting. Include manufacturer's reports with field quality control submittals. • I. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts. C. Load Balancing: For each panelboard,rearrange circuits such that the difference between each measured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directories accordingly. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 27 17 PERMIT SET EQUIPMENT WIRING MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 26 27 17 EQUIPMENT WIRING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 19- Building Wire and Cable. B. Section 26 05 34-Conduit. C. Section 26 05 37- Boxes. D. Section 26 27 26-Wiring Devices. E. Section 26 28 18- Enclosed Switches. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA WD 1 -General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999(R 2005). B. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2002(R2008). C. . NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections or furnished by Owner. 2. Determine connection locations and requirements for each item of equipment prior to roughing in.Check the voltage and phase of each item of equipment before connecting. Motor connections shall be made for the proper direction of rotation. Exposed motor wiring shall be jacketed liquidtight metallic flex. 3. Conduit,wire and circuit breaker sizes for mechanical equipment and equipment furnished under other Divisions are based on the equipment ratings of one manufacturer.The equipment actually furnished may have different electrical characteristics.Conduit,wire,and circuit breakers shall not be ordered or installed until exact electrical requirements are obtained. Responsibility for this coordination shall rest with the Contractor. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 27 17 PERMIT SET EQUIPMENT WIRING MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 3 4. Verify special purpose outlet NEMA configuration and ampere rating with equipment supplier prior to ordering devices and coverplates. B. Sequencing: 1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required. 2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data:Provide wiring device manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation,and installation of product. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. 1. Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1. 2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70,Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor,suitable for use in damp locations. 3. Size:Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. B. Enclosed Switches:As specified in Section 26 28 18. C. Wiring Devices:As specified in Section 26 27 26. D. Flexible Conduit:As specified in Section 26 05 34. E. Wire and Cable:As specified in Section 26 05 19. F. Boxes:As specified in Section 26 05 37. 2.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. As indicated on Drawings. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 27 17 PERMIT SET EQUIPMENT WIRING MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection,wiring, and energization. 3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using minimum 1/2 inch flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required. F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches,controllers, control stations,and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. j. Coolers and Freezers:Cut and seal conduit openings in freezer and cooler walls,floor, and ceilings. K. All equipment is to be grounded with equipment grounding conductor per NEC requirements. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 27 26 PERMIT SET WIRING DEVICES MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 13 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Wall dimmers. C. Receptacles. D. Wall plates. E. Occupancy sensors. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 35-Surface Raceways:Surface raceway systems,including multioutiet assemblies. B. Section 26 05 37-Boxes. C. Section 26 05 53-Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D. Section 26 27 17-Equipment Wiring:Cords and plugs for equipment. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-596-Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification; Revision G,2001. B. FS W-S-896-Switches,Toggle(Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted(General Specification); Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999. C. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. D. NECA 130-Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. E. NEMA WD 1 -General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999(R 2005). F. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Device-- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2002(R2008). G. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 27 26 PERMIT SET WIRING DEVICES MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 13 H. UL 20-General-Use Snap Switches;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 498-Attachment Plugs and Receptacles;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 514D-Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 943-Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 1472-Solid-State Dimming Controls;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork,furniture,equipment,etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings. 4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces,such as split face block,to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices. 5. Coordinate the core drilling of holes for poke-through assemblies with the work covered under other sections. 6. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 1. Wall Dimmers: Include derating information for ganged multiple devices. C. Samples:One for each type and color of device and wall plate specified, if requested. D. Field Quality Control Test Reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Wall Dimmers: Include information on operation and setting of presets. 2. GFI Receptacles: Include information on status indicators and testing procedures and intervals. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of wiring devices. • G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements,for additional provisions. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 27 26 PERMIT SET WIRING DEVICES MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 13 2. Screwdrivers for Tamper-Resistant Screws:Two for each type of screw. 3. Extra Keys for Locking Switches: Five of each type. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications:Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND PROTECTION • A. Store in a clean,dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell Incorporated:www.hubbell-wiring.com. Part numbers indicated are Hubbell; equals by other manufacturers are acceptable, unless otherwise noted. B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc:www.leviton.com. C. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc:www.lutron.com. D. Pass&Seymour,a brand of Legrand North America, Inc:www.legrand.us E. Cooper Wiring Devices:www.cooperwiringdevices.com. F. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. G. Source Limitations:Where possible,for each type of wiring device furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit. C. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations. D. Provide tamper resistant receptacles for all receptacles installed in dwelling units. E. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 27 26 PERMIT SET WIRING DEVICES MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 13 F. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles installed to serve the countertop surfaces in residential kitchens and all 15A and 20A, 125V receptacles in non-dwelling type kitchens. G. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles serving electric drinking fountains. H. Provide isolated ground receptacles for receptacles indicated on the drawings. I. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices. J. For flush floor service fittings, use tile rings for installations in tile floors. K. For flush floor service fittings, use carpet flanges for installations in carpeted floors. 2.03 ALL WIRING DEVICES A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Finishes: 1. All Wiring Devices:Color as selected by Architect with wall plate as specified in wall plates section, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces:Color as selected by Architect with wall plate as specified in wall plates section, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Color as selected by Architect with wall plate as specified in wall plates section,unless otherwise indicated. 4. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations:Color as selected by Architect, with specified weatherproof cover unless otherwise indicated. 5. Isolated Ground Convenience Receptacles:Orange with isolated ground triangle mark on device face. 6. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power: Red with wall plate as specified for wiring devices connected to normal power, but engraved"Emergency". 7. Clock Hanger Receptacles: Brown with wall plate as specified in wall plates section, unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated:www.hubbell-wiring.com. Part numbers indicated are Hubbell;equals by other manufacturers are acceptable, unless otherwise noted. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc:www.leviton.com. 3. Pass&Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc:www.legrand.us 4. Cooper Wiring Devices:www.cooperwiringdevices.com. 5. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. All Wall Switches:AC only, quiet operating,general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts,complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6,and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896;types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions:Terminal screws for side and back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER • 26 27 26 PERMIT SET WIRING DEVICES MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 13 C. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade,20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; switch type as indicated on the drawings. 1. Products: a. Hubbell 1221 Series. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. D. Residential Wall Switches:Commercial specification grade, 20A, 120V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts;switch type as indicated on the drawings. 1. Products: a. Hubbell CSB120 Series. b. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. E. Residential Wall Switches:Commercial specification grade,20A, 120V with decorator style rocker type switch actuator and maintained contacts;switch type as indicated on the drawings. 1. Products: a. Hubbell DS120 Series. b. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. F. Pilot Light Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with red illuminated standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load on; switch type as indicated on the drawings. 1. Products: a. Hubbell 1221 Series. b. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. G. Locking Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with lever type keyed switch actuator and maintained contacts;all switches keyed alike;switch type as indicated on the drawings. 1. Products: a. Hubbell 1221 Series. b. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. H. Momentary Contact Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade,20 A, 120/277 V with toggle type three position switch actuator and momentary contacts;single pole double throw,off with switch actuator in center position. 1. Products: a. Hubbell 1557 Series. b. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. Locking Momentary Contact Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with lever type keyed three position switch actuator and momentary contacts; all switches keyed alike;single pole double throw,off with switch actuator in center position. 1. Products: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER' 26 27 26 PERMIT SET WIRING DEVICES MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 13 a. Hubbell 1557 Series. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.05 WALL DIMMERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc:www.leviton.com. 2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc:www.lutron.com. Part numbers indicated are Lutron;equals by other manufacturers are acceptable,unless otherwise noted. 3. Pass&Seymour,a brand of Legrand North America, Inc:www.legrand.us 4. Hubbell Incorporated:www.hubbell-wiring.com. 5. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. All Wall Dimmers:Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset memory,air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate,complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6,and listed as complying with UL 1472;types and ratings suitable for load controlled as indicated on the drawings. C. Incandescent Wall Dimmers: 120 V AC,slide control type with separate on/off switch; single pole or three way as indicated on the drawings. 1. Power Rating:Match load indicated on the drawings; 1000 watts minimum. 2. Provide locator light, illuminated with load off. 3. Products: a. Lutron Skylark Series. b. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. D. Magnetic Low-Voltage Wall Dimmers: 120 V AC,slide control type with separate on/off switch; single pole or three way as indicated on the drawings. 1. Power Rating: Match load indicated on the drawings; 1000 VA minimum. 2. Provide locator light, illuminated with load off. 3. Products: a. Lutron Skylark Series. b. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. E. Electronic Low-Voltage Wall Dimmers: 120 V AC,slide control type with separate on/off switch;single pole or three way as indicated on the drawings. 1. Power Rating:Match load indicated on the drawings;450 watts minimum. 2. Provide locator light, illuminated with load off. 3. Products: a. Lutron Skylark Series. b. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. F. Fluorescent Wall Dimmers:Voltage as indicated on the drawings,slide control type with separate on/off switch,compatible with dimming ballast controlled;single pole or three way as indicated on the drawings. 1. Power Rating:Match load indicated on the drawings; 1000 VA minimum. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 27 26 PERMIT SET WIRING DEVICES MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 13 2. Provide locator light, illuminated with load off. 3. Products: a. Lutron Skylark Series. b. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. G. Provide accessory wall switches to match dimmer appearance when installed adjacent to each other. 2.06 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated:www.hubbell-wiring.com. Part numbers indicated are Hubbell; equals by other manufacturers are acceptable, unless otherwise noted. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc:www.leviton.com. 3. Pass&Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc:www.legrand.us 4. Cooper Wiring Devices:www.cooperwiringdevices.com. 5. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. All Receptacles:Self-grounding,complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498,and where applicable,FS W-C-596;types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions:Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. C. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade,20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R;type as indicated on the drawings. a. Products: 1) Hubbell 5362(20A). 2) Hubbell 5262(15A). 3) Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2. Standard Convenience Receptacles in Commercial Areas: Industrial specification grade,20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R;type as indicated on the drawings. a. Products: 1) Hubbell 5362(20A). 2) Hubbell 5262(15A). 3) Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 3. Standard Convenience Receptacles in Residential Areas:Commercial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A,125V, NEMA 5-15R, rectangular decorator style;type as indicated on the drawings. a. Products: 1) Hubbell DR20 Series(20A). 2) Hubbell DR15 Series(15A). 3) Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 27 26 PERMIT SET WIRING DEVICES MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 13 4. Isolated Ground Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R,with ground contacts isolated from mounting strap;type as indicated on the drawings. a. Products: 1) Hubbell IG5362(20A). 2) Hubbell IG5262(15A). • 3) Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 5. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R„ listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations;type as indicated on the drawings. a. Products: 1) Hubbell 5362WR(20A). 2) Hubbell 5262WR(15A). 3) Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 6. Tamper Resistant Convenience Receptacles:Commercial specification grade,20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R„ listed and labeled as tamper resistant type;type as indicated on the drawings. a. Products: 1) Hubbell BR20 Series(20A). 2) Hubbell BR15 Series(15A). 3) Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 7. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles:Commercial specification grade,20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R„ listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations;type as indicated on the drawings. a. Products: 1) Hubbell BR20 Series(20A). 2) Hubbell BR15 Series(15A). 3) Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. D. GFI Receptacles: 1. All GFI Receptacles: Provide with feed-through protection, light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection,and list as complying with UL 943, class A. a. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device. 2. Standard GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade,duplex, 20A,125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R. a. Products: 1) Hubbell GFR5362(20A). 2) Hubbell GFR5262(15A). 3) Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 27 26 PERMIT SET WIRING DEVICES MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF 13 3. Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex,20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. a. Products: 1) Hubbell GFR5362 Series(20A). 2) Hubbell GFR5262 Series(15A). 3) Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 4. Tamper Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade,duplex,20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type. a. Products: 1) Hubbell GFTR20(20A). 2) Hubbell GFTR15(15A). 3) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 5. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade,duplex,20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. a. Products: 1) Hubbell GFTR20 Series(20A). 2) Hubbell GFTR15 Series(15A). 3) Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. E. Locking Receptacles: Industrial specification grade,configuration as indicated on the drawings. 1. Standard Locking Convenience Receptacles:Single,20A, 125V, NEMA L5-20R. a. Products: 1) Hubbell 2310 Series. 2) Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.07 WALL PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated:www.hubbell-wiring.com. Part numbers indicated are Hubbell; equals by other manufacturers are acceptable,unless otherwise noted. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc:www.leviton.com. 3. Pass&Seymour,a brand of Legrand North America, Inc:www.legrand.us 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D. 1. Configuration:One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices. 2. Size:Standard. 3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 27 26 PERMIT SET WIRING DEVICES MARCH 2013 PAGE 10 OF 13 4. Provide screwless wallplates with concealed mounting hardware where indicated. C. Nylon Wall Plates:Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic.Hubbell NP Series. D. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish,Type 302 stainless steel. Hubbell SS Series. E. Brass Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish,factory-coated to inhibit oxidation. Hubbell SB Series. F. Aluminum Wall Plates:Smooth satin finish, clear anodized,factory-coated to inhibit oxidation. Hubbell SA Series. G. Chrome Wall Plates:Smooth finish,chrome plated steel. Hubbell SCH Series. H. Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges,with corrosion resistant screws. I. Premarked Wall Plates: Factory labeled as indicated; hot stamped for nylon wall plates and engraved for metal wall plates. ). Weatherproof Covers for Wet or Damp Locations:Gasketed,cast aluminum,with hinged lockable cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected. Hubbell WP26M Series. 2.08 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Wattstopper:www.wattstopper.com. Part numbers indicated are Wattstopper; equals by other manufacturers are acceptable, unless otherwise noted. 2. Hubbell Incorporated:www.hubbell-wiring.com. 3. Sensor Switch:www.sensorswitch.com. 4. Greengate:www.cooperindustries.com. 5. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc:www.lutron.com. 6. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc:www.leviton.com. 7. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. B. Sensors to be dual technology type with integral 24-volt dry contact for use with energy management system, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sensors to have manual-on operation. D. Sensors to be provided with coverage pattern and mounting as shown on drawings. E. The drawings show approximate locations of sensors and are diagrammatic only. Exact locations of detectors are to be field verified with the factory representative prior to mounting. F. Provide power pack as required for low voltage occupancy sensors.Wattstopper BZ-150 Series. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 27 26 PERMIT SET WIRING DEVICES MARCH 2013 PAGE 11 OF 13 G. Wall Switch: 1. Dual Technology:Wattstopper DW-100 Series. a. Coverage area up to 1,000 sq.ft.with 180 degrees field of view. H. Ceiling Mount(360 degrees): 1. Dual Technology:Wattstopper DT-300 Series. a. Coverage area up to 1,000 sq.ft.with 360 degrees field of view. I. Ceiling/Wall Mount(Directional): 1. Dual Technology:Wattstopper DT-200 Series. a. Coverage area up to 2,000 sq.ft.. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly. F. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed,tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. G. Verify that core drilled holes for poke-through assemblies are in proper locations. H. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations. I. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and,where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. 1. Mounting Heights:As indicated on the drawings. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 27 26 PERMIT SET WIRING DEVICES MARCH 2013 PAGE 12 OF 13 2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Where multiple receptacles,wall switches,or wall dimmers are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height,gang devices together under a common wall plate. 4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame.Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. S. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. E. Where required,connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal or inserting conductor screw-actuated in binding clamp and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer.Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding. G. Unless otherwise indicated,connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. H. For isolated ground receptacles,connect wiring device grounding terminal only to identified branch circuit isolated equipment grounding conductor. Do not connect grounding terminal to outlet box or normal branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. I. Provide GFI receptacles with integral GFI protection at each location indicated. Do not use feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices. J. Where split-wired duplex receptacles are indicated, remove tabs connecting top and bottom receptacles. K. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. L. Install wall switches with OFF position down. M. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. N. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers. O. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on bottom and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on right. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 27 26 PERMIT SET WIRING DEVICES MARCH 2013 PAGE 13 OF 13 P. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate.Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. Q. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use. R. Identify wiring devices in accordance with Section 26 05 53. S. Install poke-through closure plugs in all unused core holes to maintain fire rating of floor. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection,testing,and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects. C. Operate each wall switch,wall dimmer,and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verify proper operation. D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions. F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. B. Adjust presets for wall dimmers according to manufacturer's instructions as directed by Architect. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 13 PERMIT SET FUSES MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 3 SECTION 26 2813 FUSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fuses. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 53-Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. B. Section 26 2413-Switchboards: Fusible switches. C. Section 26 28 18- Enclosed Switches:Fusible switches. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002(R2007). B. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. UL 248-1 - Low-Voltage Fuses- Part 1:General Requirements;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. D. UL 248-4- Low-Voltage Fuses- Part 4:Class CC Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 248-8- Low-Voltage Fuses-Part 8:Class J Fuses;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 248-10-Low-Voltage Fuses- Part 10: Class L Fuses;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 248-12-Low-Voltage Fuses- Part 12:Class R Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for compatibility with indicated fuses. a. Fusible Switches for Switchboards:See Section 26 24 13. b. Fusible Enclosed Switches:See Section 26 28 18. 2. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for actual equipment to be installed. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 13 PERMIT SET FUSES MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 3 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current ratings, interrupting ratings,time-current curves,and current limitation curves. C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements,for additional provisions. 2. Extra Fuses:One set(s)of three for each type and size installed. 3. Fuse Pullers:One set(s)compatible with each type and size installed. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications:Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cooper Bussmann,a division of Cooper Industries:www.cooperindustries.com. B. Mersen(formerly Ferraz Shawmut):ferrazshawmut.mersen.com. C. Littelfuse, Inc:www.littelfuse.com. D. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Service Entrance: 1. Fusible Switches up to 600 Amperes: Class RK1,time-delay. 2. Fusible Switches Larger Than 600 Amperes:Class L,time-delay. B. Feeders: 1. Fusible Switches up to 600 Amperes:Class RK1,time-delay;Class J,time-delay. 2. Fusible Switches Larger Than 600 Amperes:Class L,time-delay. C. General Purpose Branch Circuits: Class RK1,time-delay;Class J,time-delay. D. Individual Motor Branch Circuits:Class RK1,time-delay. E. In-Line Protection for Pole-Mounted Luminaires:Class CC,time-delay. F. Primary Protection for Control Transformers:Class CC,time-delay. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 13 PERMIT SET FUSES MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 3 2.03 FUSES A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.as suitable for the purpose indicated. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required for a complete operating system. C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating,and manufacturer within the same switch. D. Comply with UL 248-1. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1,Class and ratings as indicated. F. Voltage Rating:Suitable for circuit voltage. G. Class R Fuses:Comply with UL 248-12. H. Class} Fuses:Comply with UL 248-8. I. Class L Fuses:Comply with UL 248-10. J. Class CC Fuses:Comply with UL 248-4. K. Selectivity:Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated,furnish products as required to achieve selective coordination. L. Provide the following accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: 1. Fuseholders: Compatible with indicated fuses. 2. Fuse Reducers: For adapting indicated fuses to permit installation in switch designed for fuses with larger ampere ratings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for equipment. B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized. B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer,type,and size are easily read. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 17 PERMIT SET ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 7 SECTION 26 28 17 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Enclosed circuit breakers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 26-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 05 29-Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 05 53-Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-375-Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification; Revision D,2006. B. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association;2010. C. NEMA 250- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum);2008. D. NETA STD ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association;2009. E. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. F. UL 50- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 50E- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 489- Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 869A-Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 943-Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition,Including All Revisions. K. UL 1053-Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 17 PERMIT SET ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 7 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate work with other trades. Do not place ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within dedicated equipment spaces and within working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted enclosed circuit breakers where indicated. 4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for circuit breakers, enclosures, and other installed components and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions,voltage and current ratings,short circuit current ratings,conduit entry locations,conductor terminal information,and installed features and accessories. D. Field Quality Control Test Reports. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation, installation,and starting of product. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of enclosed circuit breakers. G. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 17 PERMIT SET ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 7 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,water,construction debris, and traffic. B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to enclosed circuit breaker internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperature between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F during and after installation of enclosed circuit breakers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products:www.eaton.com. B. General Electric Company:www.geindustrial.com. C. Schneider Electric;Square D Products:www.schneider-electric.us. D. Siemens:www.sea.siemens.com. E. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. F. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed circuit breakers and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Description:Units consisting of molded case circuit breakers individually mounted in enclosures. B. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.as suitable for the purpose indicated. C. Unless otherwise indicated,provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F. D. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide enclosed circuit breakers with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location. 2. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by NFPA 70. E. Enclosed Circuit Breakers Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 17 PERMIT SET ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 7 F. Conductor Terminations:Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. G. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers for 480 volt circuit breaker frame sizes less than 1000 amperes and all 250 volt circuit breakers. H. Provide electronic trip circuit breakers for 480 volt circuit breaker frame sizes 1000 amperes and above. I. Provide insulated,groundable fully rated solid neutral assembly where a neutral connection is required,with a suitable lug for terminating each neutral conductor. J. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed circuit breaker,with a suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor. K. Enclosures:Comply with NEMA 250,and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250:Unless otherwise indicated,as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations:Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations:Type 3R. c. Hose Down Areas:Type 4X. 2. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard,factory applied grey unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated. L. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position. M. Ground Fault Protection:Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed and labeled as complying with UL 1053. 1. Where electronic circuit breakers equipped with integral ground fault protection are used, provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable. 2. Where accessory ground fault sensing and relaying equipment is used,equip companion circuit breakers with ground-fault shunt trips. a. Use zero sequence ground fault detection method unless otherwise indicated. b. Provide test panel and field-adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay settings. N. Selectivity:Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated,furnish products as required to achieve selective coordination. 2.03 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Description:Quick-make,quick-break,over center toggle,trip-free,trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489,and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations,and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Interrupting Capacity: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 17 PERMIT SET ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 7 1. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated,but not less than: a. 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC. b. 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC. 2. Series Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers listed in combination with upstream devices to provide interrupting rating not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. C. Conductor Terminations: 1. Provide mechanical lugs for circuit breaker frame sizes less than 400 amperes. 2. Provide compression lugs for circuit breaker frame sizes 400 amperes and above. 3. Lug Material:Aluminum,suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. D. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole,furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection. 1. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 250 amperes and larger. 2. Provide interchangeable trip units for circuit breaker frame sizes 250 amperes and larger. E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based,true rms sensing trip units. 1. Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings: a. Long time pickup,adjustable by setting dial. b. Long time delay. c. Short time pickup and delay. d. Instantaneous pickup. e. Ground fault pickup and delay where ground fault protection is indicated. F. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles. G. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated: 1. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter(GFCI)Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with UL 943, class A for protection of personnel. 2. Ground Fault Equipment Protection Circuit Breakers: Designed to trip at 30 mA for protection of equipment. H. Provide listed switching duty rated circuit breakers with SWD marking for all branch circuits serving lighting. I. Provide listed high intensity discharge lighting rated circuit breakers with HID marking for all branch circuits serving HID lighting. J. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 17 PERMIT SET ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 7 1. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed circuit breakers are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed circuit breakers. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed circuit breakers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install enclosed circuit breakers securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29. E. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb. F. Install flush-mounted enclosed circuit breakers so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered. G. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply,mount enclosed circuit breakers such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. I. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as required. J. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as required. K. Identify enclosed circuit breakers in accordance with Section 26 05 53. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspection,testing,and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Inspect and test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 17 PERMIT SET ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 7 C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS,Section 7.6.1.1 for circuit breakers larger than 800 amperes.Tests listed as optional are not required,except for the following: 1. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection. D. Ground Fault Protection Systems:Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as required by NFPA70. 1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS,Section 7.14.The insulation- resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is not required. E. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation. F. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation. G. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed circuit breakers. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from circuit breaker enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 18 PERMIT SET ENCLOSED SWITCHES MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 6 SECTION 26 2818 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Enclosed safety switches. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 26-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 05 29- Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 05 53-Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D. Section 26 28 13-Fuses. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. B. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum);2008. C. ANSI;American National Standards Institute. D. ASME;American Society of Mechanical Engineers. E. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches(600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2001 (R2006). F. NETA STD ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association;2009. G. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. H. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2010. I. UL 50- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 50E- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 98- Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches;Current Edition,Including All Revisions. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 18 PERMIT SET ENCLOSED SWITCHES MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 6 L. UL 869A- Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades. Do not place ductwork, piping,equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and within working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for enclosed switches and other installed components and accessories. Indicate voltage and current ratings. C. Field Quality Control Test Reports. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation, installation,and starting of product. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches. F. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements,for additional provisions. 2. See Section 26 28 13 for requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 18 PERMIT SET ENCLOSED SWITCHES MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 6 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store in a clean,dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,water,construction debris,and traffic. B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to enclosed switch internal components,enclosure, and finish. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperature between-22 degrees F and 104 degrees F during and after installation of enclosed switches. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fusible/Nonfusible Switches: 1. Eaton Corporation;Cutler-Hammer Products:www.eaton.com. 2. General Electric Company:www.geindustrial.com. 3. Schneider Electric;Square D Products:www.schneider-electric.us. 4. Siemens:www.sea.siemens.com. B. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed switches and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES A. Description:Quick-make, quick-break,enclosed safety switches complying with NEMA KS 1,type HD(heavy duty),and listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; ratings, configurations,and features as required. B. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: Between-22 degrees F and 104 degrees F. D. Horsepower Rating:Suitable for connected load. E. Voltage Rating:Suitable for circuit voltage. F. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide enclosed safety switches,when protected by the fuses or supply side overcurrent protective devices to be installed,with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location. 2. Minimum Ratings: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 18 PERMIT SET ENCLOSED SWITCHES MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 6 a. Heavy Duty Single Throw Switches Protected by Class R Fuses:200,000 rms symmetrical amperes. G. Enclosed Safety Switches Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A. H. Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open. I. Fuse Clips for Fusible Switches:As required to accept fuses indicated. 1. Where NEMA Class R fuses are installed, provide rejection feature to prevent installation of fuses other than Class R. J. Conductor Terminations:Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. K. Provide insulated,groundable fully rated solid neutral assembly where a neutral connection is required,with a suitable lug for terminating each neutral conductor. L. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch,with a suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor. M. Enclosures:Comply with NEMA KS 1 and NEMA 250,and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated,as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations:Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations:Type 3R. c. Hose Down Areas:Type 4X. 2. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard,factory applied grey unless otherwise indicated. N. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes. O. Heavy Duty Switches: 1. Conductor Terminations: a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated. b. Provide compression Tugs where indicated. c. Lug Material:Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 2. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position, capable of accepting three padlocks. a. Provide means for locking handle in the ON position. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 18 PERMIT SET ENCLOSED SWITCHES MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 6 B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed switches are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed safety switches. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install enclosed switches securely,in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29. E. Install enclosed switches plumb. F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. H. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 28 13 for fusible switches as indicated or as required by equipment manufacturer's recommendations. I. Identify enclosed switches in accordance with Section 26 05 53. J. Furnish and install an enclosed switch at each motor and resistance heating equipment location. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection,testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS,except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5.1.1. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed safety switches or associated components. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 28 18 PERMIT SET ENCLOSED SWITCHES MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 6 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from switch enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 51 00 PERMIT SET LIGHTING MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 12 SECTION 26 51 00 LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires. B. Ballasts. C. Fluorescent emergency power supply units. D. Lamps. E. Luminaire accessories. F. Poles. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 26-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. Q. Section 26 05 37- Boxes. C. Section 26 05 53- Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D. Section 26 27 26-Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C82.4-American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps(Multiple-Supply Type);2002. B. ANSI C82.11 -American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts- High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts-Supplements;Consolidated-2002. C. IEEE C62.41.2- Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less)AC Power Circuits;2002(R2008). D. IESNA LM-63-ANSI Approved Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and Related Information;2002. E. IESNA RP-8-American National Standard Practice for Roadway Lighting; Illuminating Engineering Society of North America;2000(R2005)(ANSI/IES RP8). F. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association;2010. G. NECA/IESNA 500-Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association;2006. H. NECA/IESNA 501 - Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems;2006. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 51 00 PERMIT SET LIGHTING MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 12 I. NECA/IESNA 502-Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association;2006. J. NEMA 410- Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2011. K. NEMA LE 4- Recessed Luminaires,Ceiling Compatibility; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2006. L. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. M. NFPA 101 -Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association;2012. N. UL 844- Luminaires for Use in Hazardous(Classified)Locations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 924- Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 935- Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q. UL 1029- High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. R. UL 1598- Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. S. UL 8750- Light Emitting Diode(LED)Equipment for Use in Lighting Products;Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other sections or by others.Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors,etc. required for mounting.Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations. 2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members,ductwork, piping, equipment, diffusers,fire suppression system components,and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. • AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 51 00 PERMIT SET LIGHTING MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 12 2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request. C. Certificates for Dimming Ballasts: Manufacturer's documentation of compatibility with dimming controls to be installed. D. Coefficients of Utilization by an approved testing laboratory. E. Lamp and ballast type for each fixture. F. Groups of fixtures with the same lamp and ballast type may reference a single set of submittal documents. G. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and any associated remote components. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications:Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND PROTECTION A. Receive, handle,and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500(commercial lighting), NECA/IESNA 502(industrial lighting),and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all linear fluorescent ballasts. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598,where applicable. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 51 00 PERMIT SET LIGHTING MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 12 C. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. D. Provide accessories and fittings as recommended by manufacturer to properly and completely install and wire fixtures. E. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings. F. Provide the complete system of lighting fixtures and lamps as shown on the drawings and specified herein.The requirements of all other sections of the specification are equally applicable to the work to be performed under this section. G. The fixture catalog numbers listed on the drawing indicate manufacturer,fixture design, appearance,etc.,desired.These fixtures shall be modified if necessary to comply with the specification herein. Lighting fixtures specified will be the basis for comparison in the consideration of fixtures of other manufacturers. H. All fixture component parts shall be manufactured and/or assembled at the manufacturing plant for shipment in one or more packages.The shipment from the fixture manufacturer shall include integrally-mounted and/or remote-mounted ballasts where ballasts are required for the proper operation of the fixture lamps. I. Recessed Luminaires: 1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4. 2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC-rated,suitable for direct contact with insulation and combustible materials. 3. Luminaires Recessed in Sloped Ceilings: Provide suitable sloped ceiling adapters. ). Hazardous(Classified) Location Luminaires: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 844 for the classification of the installed location. K. Fixtures-General: 1. Finish shall be white baked enamel, unless otherwise specified with a minimum average reflectance of 85%on all exposed and light reflecting surfaces.Steel components shall be prepared for finishing with a 5-step zinc phosphating process. 2. All surface mounted fluorescent lighting fixtures shall have low density label. 3. All recessed fluorescent lighting fixtures installed in fire rated ceiling shall be provided with fire-rated protective covers. 4. All fixtures mounted outdoors or in unheated spaces shall have 0 degree F ballasts. L. If fixtures specified herein are discontinued at the time the work is executed,provide suitable substitute fixtures,without additional cost, as directed by the engineer. M. Fluorescent Luminaires: 1. Provide ballast disconnecting means complying with NFPA 70 where required. 2. Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled by Occupancy Sensors: Provide programmed start ballasts. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 51 00 PERMIT SET LIGHTING MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 12 3. Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled by Dual-Level Switching: Provide with two ballasts. a. Luminaires with Two Lamps: Each ballast controls one lamp. b. Luminaires with Three Lamps:One ballast controls two outer lamps and one ballast controls inner lamp. c. Luminaires with Four Lamps:One ballast controls two outer lamps and one ballast controls two inner lamps. N. HID Luminaires: 1. HID High Bay Luminaires: Provide safety chain or power hook unless otherwise indicated. 2. HID Luminaires with Quartz Restrike Systems: Factory-installed supplementary quartz lamp automatically switches on when power interruption causes primary HID lamp to drop out or during cold startup. O. LED Luminaires: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 8750. P. Track Lighting Systems: Provide track compatible with specified track heads,with all connectors,power feed fittings,dead ends, hangers and canopies as necessary to complete installation. Q. Luminaires Mounted in Continuous Rows: Provide quantity of units required for length indicated,with all accessories required for joining and aligning. R. Electrical Characteristics: 120 volts, 60 Hz, unless otherwise specified. S. Substitutions, Unless Otherwise Indicated:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. 2.02 BALLASTS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting:www.gelighting.com. 2. Osram Sylvania:www.sylvania.com. 3. Philips Lighting Electronics/Advance:www.advance.phllips.com. 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 5. Manufacturer Limitations:Where possible,for each type of luminaire provide ballasts produced by a single manufacturer. 6. Where a specific manufacturer or model is indicated elsewhere in the luminaire schedule or on the drawings,substitutions are not permitted unless explicitly indicated. B. All Ballasts: 1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls(PCBs). 2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards. C. Fluorescent Ballasts: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 51 00 PERMIT SET LIGHTING MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 12 1. All Fluorescent Ballasts:Unless otherwise indicated, provide high frequency electronic ballasts complying with ANSI C82.11 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 935. a. Inrush Current: Not exceeding peak currents specified in NEMA 410. b. Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source,with variation tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent. c. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 10 percent. d. Power Factor: Not less than 0.95. e. Ballast Factor: 1) Normal ballast factor between 0.85 and 1.15. 2) High ballast factor greater than 1.15. 3) Low ballast factor between 0.75 and 0.85. f. Thermal Protection: Listed and labeled as UL Class P,with automatic reset for integral thermal protectors. g. Sound Rating:Class A,suitable for average ambient noise level of 20 to 24 decibels. h. Lamp Compatibility:Specifically designed for use with the specified lamp, with no visible flicker. Lamp Operating Frequency:Greater than 40 kHz. j. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Not greater than 1.7. k. Provide automatic restart capability to restart replaced lamp(s)without requiring resetting of power. Provide end of lamp life automatic shut down circuitry for compact fluorescent T5 and smaller diameter lamp ballasts. m. Surge Tolerance: Capable of withstanding characteristic surges according to IEEE C62.41.2,location category A. n. Provide high efficiency T8 lamp ballasts certified as NEMA premium. o. Ballast Marking: Include wiring diagrams with lamp connections. 2. Non-Dimming Fluorescent Ballasts: a. Lamp Starting Method: 1) T8 Lamp Ballasts: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated. 2) T5 Lamp Ballasts: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated. 3) Compact Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated. b. Lamp Starting Temperature:Capable of starting standard lamp(s)at a minimum of 50 degrees F, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Dimming Fluorescent Ballasts: a. Dimming Range:Continuous dimming from 100 percent to 5, 10, or 1 percent relative light output unless dimming capability to lower level is indicated,without flicker and with even tracking across multiple lamps. b. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed. 1) Wall Dimmers:See Section 26 27 26. c. Lamp Starting Method: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 51 00 PERMIT SET LIGHTING MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 12 d. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting lamp(s)at a minimum of 50 degrees F. e. Dimmed Lamp Starting: Capable of starting lamp(s)at any dimmed preset without transitioning first to full light output. D. High Intensity Discharge(HID)Ballasts:Complying with ANSI C82.4 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1029. 1. Electronic Metal Halide Ballasts: a. All Electronic Metal Halide Ballasts: 1) Input Voltage:Suitable for operation at voltage of connected source,with variation tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent. 2) Total Harmonic Distortion:Not greater than 15 percent. 3) Power Factor: Not less than 0.90. 4) Provide thermal protection with automatic reset. 5) Sound Rating: Class A,suitable for average ambient noise level of 20 to 24 decibels. 6) Lamp Operating Frequency: Less than 200 Hz or as required to avoid acoustic resonance in lamp arc tube. 7) Lamp Current Crest Factor: Not greater than 1.5. 8) Lamp Starting Temperature:Capable of starting standard lamp(s)at a minimum of-22 degrees F. 9) Provide end of lamp life automatic shut down circuitry. 10) Surge Tolerance:Capable of withstanding characteristic surges according to IEEE C62.41.2,location category A. 11) Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI)Limits:Comply with FCC requirements of CFR,Title 47, Part 18,for Class A, non-consumer application. 2.03 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Philips Emergency Lighting/Bodine:www.bodine.com. 2. Lithonia Lighting:www.lithonia.com. 3. Iota Engineering, LLC:www.iotaengineering.com. 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 5. Manufacturer Limitations:Where possible,for each type of luminaire provide fluorescent emergency power supply units produced by a single manufacturer. 6. Where a specific manufacturer or model is indicated elsewhere in the luminaire schedule or on the drawings,substitutions are not permitted unless explicitly indicated. B. Description: Self-contained fluorescent emergency power supply units suitable for use with indicated luminaires, complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes,and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. C. Compatibility: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 51 00 PERMIT SET LIGHTING MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 12 1. Ballasts:Compatible with electronic,standard magnetic,energy saving, and dimming AC ballasts, including those with end of lamp life shutdown circuits. 2. Lamps:Compatible with low-mercury lamps. D. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source,solid-state control automatically switches connected lamp(s)to the fluorescent emergency power supply for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination,and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. E. Battery:Sealed maintenance-free high-temperature nickel cadmium unless otherwise indicated. F. Minimum Emergency Illumination Output: Fixture Lumens F32T8 1,350 F28T5 1,325 F54T5HO 1,250 FT40W 900 FT50W 900 . CFM42W 1,250 CFM32W 1,250 CFM26W 700 CFQ26W 700 G. Diagnostics: Provide accessible and visible multi-chromatic combination test switch/indicator light to display charge,test,and diagnostic status and to manually activate emergency operation. H. Self-Diagnostics: Provide units that self-monitor functionality and automatically perform testing required by NFPA 101 where indicated; provide indicator light(s)to report test and diagnostic status and field selectable audible alert. I. Operating Temperature: From 32 degrees F to 122 degrees F unless otherwise indicated or required for the installed location. J. Accessories: 1. Provide compatible accessory remote combination test switch/indicator light where indicated. 2.04 LAMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting:www.gelighting.com. 2. Osram Sylvania:www.sylvania.com. 3. Philips Lighting Company:www.lighting.philips.com. 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 51 00 PERMIT SET LIGHTING MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF 12 5. Manufacturer Limitations:Where possible,provide lamps produced by a single manufacturer. 6. Where a specific manufacturer or model is indicated elsewhere in the luminaire schedule or on the drawings, substitutions are not permitted unless explicitly indicated. B. All Lamps: 1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new,compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire. 2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed.Where lamps are not specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Minimum Efficiency:Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp efficiency standards. 4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated,for each type of lamp furnish products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined by the Architect to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature. C. Incandescent Lamps:Wattage and bulb type as indicated,with base type as required for lighting fixture; 130 V rated. 1. Reflector Type Incandescent Lamps: Beam pattern as indicated. 2. Non-Reflector Type Incandescent Lamps: Inside frosted lamp finish unless otherwise indicated. D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps:Wattage and bulb type as indicated,with base type as required for luminaire. 1. Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure(TCLP)test for characteristic hazardous waste. 2. Correlated Color Temperature(CCT):3,500 K unless otherwise indicated. 3. Color Rendering Index(CRI): Not less than 80. 4. Average Rated Life: Not less than 10,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours per start. E. Linear Fluorescent Lamps:Wattage and bulb type as indicated,with base type as required for luminaire. 1. Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure(TCLP)test for characteristic hazardous waste. 2. T5 Linear Fluorescent Lamps: a. Correlated Color Temperature(CCT):3,500 K unless otherwise indicated. b. Color Rendering Index(CRI): Not less than 80. c. Average Rated Life: Not less than 20,000 hours for an operating cycle of three hours per start. d. 28WT5 min.2,900 lumens.54WT5H0 min. 5,000 lumens. F. High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lamps:Wattage as indicated,with bulb type, burning position, and base type as required for luminaire. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 51 00 PERMIT SET LIGHTING MARCH 2013 PAGE 10 OF 12 1. Metal Halide Lamps: a. Non-Reflector Type Metal Halide Lamps: Phosphor coated lamp finish for indoor and clear lamp finish for outdoor,unless otherwise indicated. b. Provide ANSI type 0-rated protected metal halide lamps where required for open luminaires provided with compatible exclusionary sockets. c. Ceramic Metal Halide Lamps: 1) Correlated Color Temperature(CCT):3,000 K unless otherwise indicated. 2) Color Rendering Index(CRI): Not less than 80. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Provide accessories such as plaster frames,stem,canopies, cords,toggle bolts,etc., necessary to mount fixture in a proper and approved method. 2.06 POLES A. Install lighting poles at locations indicated. Bond luminaires, metal accessories and pole to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. B. Mount poles plumb.Provide shims to adjust plumb. Grout around pole bases. Provide steel or aluminum bolt covers. C. Furnish bolt templates and pole mounting accessories to installer of pole foundations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required. D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed,tested, and ready for connection to luminaires. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt,debris, plaster,and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section. B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 51 00 PERMIT SET LIGHTING MARCH 2013 PAGE 11 OF 12 C. Install luminaires securely,in a neat and workmanlike manner,as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 500(commercial lighting),and NECA 502(industrial lighting).Coordinate with architectural reflected ceiling plans and mechanical plans. D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. E. Square and rectangular fixtures shall be mounted with sides parallel to building lines and parallel with ceiling lines. F. Properly support and align fixtures and provide all necessary steel shapes for support of the fixtures. Recessed fluorescent fixtures shall be supported at opposite corners by steel wire connected to building structure per IBC requirements.Coordinate complete fixture installation with the facility construction. G. Surface Mounted Fluorescent Fixtures:Where fixtures are indicated for installation on low density ceiling material, mount on ceiling spacers as recommended by manufacturer unless UL approved for mounting directly to ceiling material. H. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. I. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. J. Fluorescent Emergency Power Supply Units: 1. Install inside luminaire unless otherwise indicated.Where installation inside luminaire is not possible, install in remote location not exceeding manufacturer's recommended maximum conductor length to luminaire. 2. Unless otherwise indicated,connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal ballast(s)in luminaire. Bypass local switches,contactors, or other lighting controls. 3. Install lock-on device on branch circuit breaker serving units. K. Remote Ballasts: Install in accessible location as indicated or as required to complete installation, using conductors per manufacturer's recommendations not exceeding manufacturer's recommended maximum conductor length to luminaire. L. Identify luminaires connected to emergency power system in accordance with Section 26 05 53. M. Install lamps in each luminaire. N. Lamp Burn-In:Operate lamps at full output for prescribed period per manufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in. O. Verify all ceiling systems and coordinate fixture type and accessories prior to ordering fixtures. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 26 51 00 PERMIT SET LIGHTING MARCH 2013 PAGE 12 OF 12 P. Install fluorescent fixtures as recommended by the manufacturer or as necessary to provide exact horizontal alignment, preventing horizontal or vertical deflection,or angular jointing of fixtures installed in continuous rows. Q. All lighting fixtures shall be furnished complete with lamps, ballast and all accessories necessary to provide a complete operable fixture. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements,for additional requirements. B. inspect each product for damage and defects. C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. D. Test fluorescent emergency power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply. E. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect.Secure locking fittings in place. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500(commercial lighting), NECA 502(industrial lighting),and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt,fingerprints, paint,or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish. 107 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for closeout submittals. B. See Section 01 79 00- Demonstration and Training,for additional requirements. C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect,and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed. D. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION AM-3533 L) JV1510V 27 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 10 05 PERMIT SET LOW-VOLTAGE CABLING PATHWAYS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 4 SECTION 27 10 05 LOW-VOLTAGE CABLING PATHWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Telecommunications service entrance to building(s). B. Pathways inside building(s). C. Pathways connecting building(s). D. Enclosures, backboards,and outlet boxes. E. Grounding and bonding the telecommunications distribution system. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00- Firestopping. B. Section 26 05 26-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 05 34-Conduit. D. Section 26 05 37- Boxes. E. Section 26 27 26-Wiring Devices. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 23 00-Alternatives,for product alternatives affecting this section. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. EIA-310-Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Electronic Industries Association; Revision D, 1992. B. CEA-310-Cabinets, Racks,Panels,and Associated Equipment; Consumer Electronics Association; Revision E, 2005. C. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. TIA/EIA-568-C.1 -Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements; Rev C, 2012;Addenda 1-7. E. TIA/EIA-568-C.2-Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components; Rev C,2012;Addenda 1-11. F. TIA/EIA-568-C.3-Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard- Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard,and Addendum 1 -Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 50/125 um Optical Fiber Cables; Rev C,2012;Addendum 1. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 10 05 PERMIT SET LOW-VOLTAGE CABLING PATHWAYS MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 4 G. TIA/EIA-606-Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure; Rev B, 2012. H. ANSI/J-STD-607-Commercial Building Grounding(Earthing)and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications; Rev A,2002. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Keep stored products clean and dry. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a 1 year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Provide a complete permanent system of cable pathways for voice and data communications, including conduits and wireways, pull wires,support structures, enclosures and cabinets, rough-in boxes,and conduit sleeves. 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568 and TIA/EIA-569, latest editions. 2. Provide pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and ANSI/J-STD-607 and are UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified. 3. In this project,the term plenum is defined as return air spaces above ceilings, inside ducts, under raised floors,and other air-handling spaces. 2.02 PATHWAYS A. Conduit:As specified in Section 26 05 34;provide pull cords in all conduit. B. Underground Service Entrance:4"conduit, minimum one per serving utility,coordinate with utility. 2.03 ENCLOSURES/BACKBOARDS A. Backboards: Interior grade plywood without voids, 3/4 inch thick; UL-labeled fire- retardant. 1. Panel Size:48 inches wide by 96 inches high. Provide minimum of one panel or quantity as necessary to accomplish coverage shown on drawings. 2. Provide minimum of one 20 Amp four-plex AC outlet. 3. Do not paint over UL label. 4. Provide ground bus bar and#6 AWG CU ground conductor to service ground,as specified in Section 26 05 26. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 10 05 PERMIT SET LOW-VOLTAGE CABLING PATHWAYS MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 4 2.04 OUTLET BOXES A. For flush mounting in walls;depth as required to accommodate cable manufacturer's recommended minimum conductor bend radius. 1. Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. 2. Wall-Mounted Telephones:4 inches high by 2 inches wide by 2-1/8 inches deep. 3. Wall Plates: Material and finish to match wiring device and wall plate finishes specified in Section 26 27 26, complying with system design standards and UL 514C. 4. Provide minimum one 1 inch conduit for Cat 5E cable, 1-1/4 inch conduit for Cat 6 cable,from outlet box to accessible ceiling.See drawings for additional or different requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Comply with latest editions and addenda of TIA/EIA-568,TIA/EIA-569,ANSI/J-STD-607, NFPA 70, and SYSTEM DESIGN as specified in PART 2. • 3.02 PATHWAYS A. Underground Service Entrance: Install conduit at least 24 inches below finish grade. B. Install with minimum clearances per Section 26 05 34. C. Conduit: 1. Do not install more than three(3)90 degree bends in a single horizontal cable run. 2. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially installed. 3. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors except where specifically indicated to be exposed. a. Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms,electrical rooms,and telecommunications rooms. b. Treat conduit in crawl spaces and under floor slabs as if exposed to view. c. Where exposed to view,install parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. d. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches,minimum, below vapor retarder;seal penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit. 4. See Section 26 05 34 for additional requirements. D. Outlet Boxes: 1. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of telecommunications outlets provided under this section. a. Mounting Heights:Unless otherwise indicated,as follows: 1) Telephone and Data Outlets: 18 inches above finished floor. 2) Telephone Outlets for Side-Reach Wall-Mounted Telephones: 54 inches above finished floor to top of telephone. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 10 05 PERMIT SET LOW-VOLTAGE CABLING PATHWAYS MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 4 3) Telephone Outlets for Forward-Reach Wall-Mounted Telephones:48 inches above finished floor to top of telephone. b. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated. c. Provide minimum of 24 inches horizontal separation between flush mounted outlet boxes installed on opposite sides of fire rated walls. d. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate outlet boxes for line voltage and low voltage devices. e. Locate outlet boxes so that wall plate does not span different building finishes. f. Locate outlet boxes so that wall plate does not cross masonry joints. E. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with Section 26 05 26 and ANSI/J-STD- 607 and NFPA 70. F. Firestopping: Seal openings around pathway penetrations through fire-rated walls, partitions, floors,and ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 13 43 PERMIT SET STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 13 SECTION 2713 43 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Telecommunications service entrance to building(s). B. Cabling and pathways inside building(s). C. Cabling and pathways connecting building(s). D. Distribution frames, cross-connection equipment, enclosures,and outlets. E. Grounding and bonding the telecommunications distribution system. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00-Firestopping. B. Section 26 05 26-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 05 34-Conduit. D. Section 26 05 37- Boxes 1.03 SCOPE A. This section describes the products and execution requirements relating to furnishing and installation of telecommunications cabling and termination components and related sub-systems as part of a structured cabling system.Vertical(backbone)and horizontal (station)cabling comprised of both copper and fiber optic cabling are covered under this document. B. The horizontal(station)cabling system is based on the installation of Category 6,4-pair Unshielded Twisted Pair(UTP)for both data and voice copper cables.The cables to be installed from the Telecommunications Outlet to the Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF)lrelecommunications Closet(TC), Main Distribution Frame(MDF), or Equipment Room(ER)serving that area and terminated as specified in this document.This may be supplemented with cabling in selected areas. C. Station cables to be installed in conduit,and/or free-air.Telecommunications Outlets to be mounted flush. D. Backbone copper and fiber optic cables to be installed in conduit in building riser pathways and/or free-air as determined by the Project Coordinator or identified on the drawings. Backbone intra-building fiber optic cabling to be installed via inner duct conduit. Refer to the sub-section below which details inner duct requirements. Provide plenum rated cable when routing in plenum spaces. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 13 43 PERMIT SET STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 13 E. Provide labor and materials necessary to construct the system as described herein and on the drawings.This includes, but is not limited to,furnishing and installing cable,cable supports, inner duct, racking and termination components,termination,testing, labeling and documentation. Installed system shall be fully functional and ready for use. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. BICSI TDM Manual-Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual; Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc.;2009. B. EIA-310-Cabinets, Racks, Panels,and Associated Equipment; Electronic Industries Association; Revision D, 1992. C. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. TIA-455-21 -FOTP-21 - Mating Durability of Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices; Rev A, 1988(R 2002). E. TIA-492AAAA-B-Detail Specification for 62.5-urn Core Diameter/125-urn Cladding Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers; 2009. F. TIA-492AAAB-A-Detail Specification for 50-urn Core Diameter/125-urn Cladding Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers;2009. G. TIA-526-7-OFSTP-7- Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant;2002. H. TIA-526-14-OFSTP-14-Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant;Rev A, 1998(R2003). I. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 -Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard- Part 1: General Requirements; Rev B, 2001;Addenda 1-7. J. TIA/EIA-568-B.2-Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard- Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components; Rev B,2001; Addenda 1-11. K. TIA/EIA-568-B.3-Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard- Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard,and Addendum 1 -Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 50/125 urn Optical Fiber Cables; Rev B,2000;Addendum 1. L. TIA-569-Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces; 2009. M. TIA/EIA-606-Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure; Rev A, 2002. N. ANSI/J-STD-607-Commercial Building Grounding(Earthing)and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications; Rev A,2002. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 13 43 PERMIT SET STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 13 O. UL 444-Communications Cables;2002. P. UL 497-Standard for Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communications Circuits;2001. Q. UL 514C-Standard for Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes,and Covers; 1996. R. UL 1581 -Reference Standard for Electrical Wires,Cables,and Flexible Cords;2001. S. UL 1863-Standard for Communications-Circuit Accessories;2004. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used,including: 1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 2. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings:Show compliance with requirements on isometric schematic diagram of network layout,showing cable routings,telecommunication closets, rack and enclosure layouts and locations,service entrance,and grounding. D. Manufacturer Qualifications. E. Installer Qualifications. F. Test Plan:Complete and detailed plan,with list of test equipment and procedures for inspection and testing;submit at least 60 days prior to intended test date. G. Field Test Reports: Provide one copy to Owner and one copy to engineer of record two weeks prior to final commissioning/observations. H. Project Record Documents:Provide two sets,one for Owner and one for engineer of record of 1/8 inch= 1'0"scale drawings. 1. Record actual locations of outlet boxes and distribution frames. 2. Show as-installed color coding, pair assignment, polarization,and cross-connect layout. 3. Identify distribution frames and equipment rooms by room number on contract drawings. 4. Identify all telecommunications locations per labeling in 3.03, F. I. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers,sources of supply,and operation and maintenance instructions; include copy of project record documents and shop drawings. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications:At least 3 years experience manufacturing products of the type specified. B. Installer Qualifications:A company having at least 3 years experience in the installation and testing of the type of system specified, and: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 13 43 PERMIT SET STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 13 1. Supervisors and installers factory certified by manufacturers of products to be installed. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. In addition,cable must be stored in a location protected from vandalism and weather. If cable is stored outside, it must be covered with opaque plastic or canvas with provision for ventilation to prevent condensation and for protection from weather. If air temperature at cable storage location will be below 40 degrees F,the cable to be moved to a heated(50 degrees F minimum)location. B. Keep stored products clean and dry. If necessary,cable to be stored off site at the Contractor's expense. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. The Contractor shall provide a system warranty covering the installed cabling system against defects in workmanship, components,and performance,and follow-on support after project completion. C. The Contractor shall warrant the cabling system against defects in workmanship for a period of one year from the date of system acceptance.The warranty shall cover all labor and materials necessary to correct a failed portion of the system and to demonstrate performance within the original installation specifications after repairs are accomplished. This warranty shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The Contractor shall facilitate a minimum 20-year system performance warranty between the manufacturer and the Owner.An extended component warranty shall be provided which warrants functionality of all components used in the system for a minimum of 20 years from the date of acceptance.The performance warranty shall warrant the installed 250 MHz horizontal copper,and both the horizontal and the backbone optical fiber portions of the cabling system. Copper links shall be warranted against the link performance minimum expected results defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 (latest draft). Fiber optic links shall be warranted against the link and segment performance minimum expected results defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1. E. The Contractor shall furnish an hourly rate with the proposal submittal which shall be valid for a period of one year from the date of acceptance.This rate will be used when cabling support is required to affect moves,adds,and changes to the system(MACs). MACs shall not void the Contractor's nor manufacturer's warranty. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 13 43 PERMIT SET STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 13 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. These specifications use a single manufacturer's name,model,or catalog number herein for the purpose of establishing a product set.An equivalent for the specified product set may be used upon approval by the architect or engineer of record. B. Approved manufacturers: 1. Panduit/General Cable:www.panduit.com/www.generalcable.com. 2. Commscope Systimax:www.commscope.com/systimax. 3. Hubbell/Draka Comteq:www.hubbell-premise.com/www.drakacomteq.us. 2.02 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Provide a complete permanent system of cable and pathways for voice and data communications, including conduits and wireways, pull wires, support structures, enclosures and cabinets,rough-in boxes,and conduit sleeves. 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568 and TIA/EIA-569, latest editions. 2. Provide fixed cables and pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and ANSI/J-STD-607 and are UL listed. 3. Provide connection devices that are rated for operation under conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F at relative humidity of 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing. 4. In this project,the term plenum is defined as return air spaces above ceilings, inside ducts,under raised floors,and other air-handling spaces. 5. Capacity:As required to terminate all cables plus minimum 25 percent spare space. 2.03 PATHWAYS A. As specified in Section 27 10 05-Low-Voltage Cabling Pathways. 2.04 BACKBONE CABLE A. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Intra-building(premises cable): a. 6-strand fiber,multimode 50/125 urn and multimode 62.5/125 urn;covered with orange cable jacket. 1) In locations other than in plenums, provide NFPA 70 type OFNR nonconductive-riser-rated or type OFNP nonconductive-plenum- . rated cable. 2) In plenums, provide NFPA 70 type OFNP nonconductive-plenum- rated cable. 2. Inter-building(indoor-outdoor cable): a. 6-strand fiber, multimode 50/125 urn and multimode 62.5/125 urn;covered with orange cable jacket. 1) In locations other than in plenums, provide NFPA 70 type OFNR nonconductive-riser-rated or type OFNP nonconductive-plenum- rated cable. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 13 43 PERMIT SET STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 13 2) In plenums, provide NFPA 70 type OFNP nonconductive-plenum- rated cable. B. Copper Cable: 1. Intra-building(voice cable): a. TIA/EIA-568 Category 5 or higher solid conductor unshielded twisted pair (UTP),24 AWG, 100 ohm; 100 pairs; covered with thermoplastic jacket. 1) In locations other than in plenums, provide NFPA 70 type CMR riser- rated or type CMP plenum-rated cable. 2) In plenums, provide NFPA 70 type CMP plenum-rated cable. 3) Color code conductors in accordance with ICEA S-90-661. 2. Inter-building(voice cable): a. TIA/EIA-568 Category 5 or higher solid conductor shielded twisted pair (STP),24 AWG, 100 ohm; 100 pairs; covered with PIC ALPETH jacket. 1) Color code conductors in accordance with ICEA S-90-661. 2.05 HORIZONTAL CABLE A. Copper Cable(voice and data): 1. TIA/EIA-568 Category 6 solid conductor unshielded twisted pair(UTP),24 AWG, individually twisted pairs; covered with blue jacket. a. In locations other than in plenums, provide NFPA 70 type CMG general purpose,CMR riser-rated, or type CMP plenum-rated cable. b. In plenums, provide NFPA 70 type CMP plenum-rated cable. 2.06 TELECOMMUNICATION OUTLETS A. Faceplates: 1. 4 port angled faceplate constructed of ABS moulding compound. Each port shall be provided with an icon to indicate its function. Faceplate shall accommodate two labels and provide a clear polycarbonate cover for each.All unused port positions shall have a blank insert installed. Faceplate ports shall be populated left to right, top to bottom. 2. Color:As selected by Architect. B. Modular jacks: 1. All modular jacks shall be wired to the T568A or T568B wiring pattern. Modular jacks shall be constructed with a housing of polyphenylene oxide,94V-0 rated. Modular jacks shall be terminated using a 110-style pc board connector(made of 94V-0 rated polycarbonate),color-coded for both T568A and T568B wiring.The 110 connector shall terminate 22-24 AWG solid conductors with a maximum insulation diameter of.05 inch.The modular jack contacts shall be plated with a minimum of 50 micro inches of gold in the contact area over a 50 micro inch minimum nickel underplate. Modular jacks shall be UL Listed. 2. Color:As selected by Owner. C. Standard Configurations: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 13 43 PERMIT SET STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA MARCH2013 PAGE7OF13 1. Unless otherwise noted, all locations shall be provided with 3 Category 6 UTP cables terminated on Category 6 modular RJ-45 jacks. 2. Wireless Access Point: a. 1 -Category 6 UTP cable terminated on Category 6 modular RJ-45 jacks. 3. Dedicated Phone: a. 1 -Category 6 UTP cable terminated on Category 6 modular RJ-45 jacks. 2.07 CROSS-CONNECTIONS AND ADAPTORS A. Fiber Optic Terminal Enclosures: 1. Backbone Cable: a. Each fiber optic cable shall be terminated in the building MDF or IDF in appropriately sized rack mount patch enclosures(RMPE),providing protection for the terminated fibers.Contractor shall provide an appropriate number of RMPEs to accommodate project's installed fiber. The MDF enclosure shall accommodate project's installed fiber, plus an allowance for future growth equal to 50 percent of the installed capacity. B. Fiber Optic Adaptors: 1. All fiber optic cable,whether single mode or multi-mode,shall be terminated using fiber optic connectors style to match existing fiber terminations. 2. For multi-mode applications,connectors shall be 50/125 pm or 62.5/125 pm(to match cable)multi-mode connectors,capable of terminating either 250 pm coated or 900 pm buffered fibers.The connectors shall be field-installable, requiring no epoxy or polishing. 3. For single mode applications,fiber shall be terminated using a fan-out kit or pigtail. C. Patch Panels for Fiber Optic Cabling:Sized to fit EIA standard 19 inch wide equipment racks;0.09 inch thick aluminum. 1. Adaptors: Maximum of 24 duplex adaptors per standard panel width. 2. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered consecutively;comply with TIA/EIA-606-A using encoded identifiers. 3. Provide incoming cable strain relief and routing guides on back of panel. 4. Provide rear cable management tray at least 8 inches deep with removable cover. 5. Provide dust covers for unused adaptors. D. Copper Cross-Connection: 1. Voice Connection Blocks: a. Manufacturer:CIRCA or approved equal. b. Voice backbone cables shall be terminated using wall-mounted 110Connect XC wiring blocks located in each IDF.Wiring blocks shall employ field terminated 110Connect XC kits,which include wiring blocks with mounting legs, connecting blocks,and designation strips. Backbone wiring blocks shall employ 5-pair connecting blocks,and wiring blocks shall be marked black every fifth pair.Connecting block terminals shall be constructed of phosphor bronze, plated with a minimum of 150 microinches of tin-lead AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 13 43 PERMIT SET STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 13 over a 50 microinch minimum nickel underplate. Mushroom style wire management spools shall be provided to manage voice circuit cross connections. c. All voice backbone cables routed from building exterior shall be terminated on wall-mounted overvoltage protection blocks immediately upon entering the building to protect telecommunications equipment from destructive transients. Protector blocks shall utilize 110-style connectors on both the input and output side. Protectors shall be solid state type. 2. Patch Panels for Data Cabling: Sized to fit EIA standard 19 inch wide equipment racks;0.09 inch thick aluminum; cabling terminated on Type 110 insulation displacement connectors; printed circuit board interface. a. Jacks: Non-keyed RJ-45,suitable for and complying with same standard as cable to be terminated; maximum 48 ports per standard width panel. b. Capacity: Provide ports sufficient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare. c. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered consecutively;comply with TIA/EIA-606-A using encoded identifiers. E. Patch Cord Assemblies: 1. Patch cords used at the telecommunication rack and at the workstation shall be Category 6.Patch cords shall be factory-assembled by the manufacturer of the cabling system. 2. End user workstations will require a Category 6 patch cord. Provide a sufficient number of 10-foot gray workstation patch cords to equip two thirds of the terminated Cat 6 wires,e.g., 90 terminated wires will require 60 patch cords. 3. 5-foot and 7-foot patch cords shall be provided to cross-connect between the data patch panels and network equipment in the IDF. Provide IDF patch cords equal to the number of workstation patch cords calculated in the previous paragraph.The total quantity of IDF patch cords shall be equally divided between the two assembly lengths.Shielded patch cords shall be provided where required. a. Cat 6 Patch Cable, 5 feet,Gray b. Cat 6 Patch Cable,7 feet,Gray 2.08 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND ENCLOSURES A. Wall Mount(Open): 1. 49"H x 19"W x 25"D. High strength, lightweight aluminum construction. Universal 5/8"-5/8"- 1/2"alternating hole pattern.Swing gate style,opens to right or left. Provide with heavy duty swing gate kit to increase load bearing capacity to 150 lbs. 2. Manufacturer:Chatsworth Products, Inc.; Model 11807-X25/12795-701 (49"H x 19"W x 25"D):www.chatsworth.com. B. Wall Mount(Enclosed): 1. 36"H x 24"W x 30"D. High strength, lightweight aluminum construction. Universal 5/8"-5/8"- 1/2"alternating hole pattern.Swing out wall-mount enclosure system, AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 13 43 PERMIT SET STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA MARCH2013 PAGE9OF13 200 lb.load rating, locking front and rear door as part of a three-section construction. Enclosure to include knock-outs for conduit/cable entry. Front/main access door shall have plexiglass face. Painted finish:black. 2. Provide two keys useable for all cabinets provided. 3. Manufacturer:Chatsworth Products, Inc.; Model 12419-736(36"H x 24"W x 30"D): www.chatsworth.com. C. Wire Management: 1. Provide wire management in the following equipment rack configurations: a. Wall mount(open): 1) Horizontal Wiring Management:Chatsworth Products,Inc. black Universal Horizontal Cable Manager. Provide 19'W x 2U x 5.14"D cable managers(CPI Part#30130-719. D. Ladder Racks: 1. Manufacturer: a. Chatsworth Products, Inc.; Model 10250-718(18"wide rack): www.chatsworth.com. 2. Tubular steel bar type cable racks with 0.065"thick side rails. 1.5"high x 0.375" wide stringers. 1.5"wide x 0.375"high rungs set 12"on center.Widths as noted. 3. Complete with all necessary supports,hangars,connectors, nuts, bolts, etc., necessary for a complete installation. 4. Ladder racks shall be supported a minimum of every 5 feet on center and at the end of every ladder rack run, utilizing trapeze type supports(as recommended by the manufacturer),attached directly to the structure above. Provide wall angle support kits where ladder rack terminates at wall. 5. Provide end-closing kits on all ladder rack ends. 6. Ladder racks shall be installed at 7'0"AFF to underside of ladder,unless otherwise noted. 7. Coordinate placement of ladder racks and supports with duct work, conduits, piping,lighting fixtures,etc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Comply with latest editions and addenda of TIA/EIA-568,TIA/EIA-569,ANSI/J-STD-607, NFPA 70,and SYSTEM DESIGN as specified in PART 2. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND CABLING A. Cabling-General Requirements: 1. Do not install cable into conduits until conduit installation is complete. 2. Do not over-cinch or crush cables. 3. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended cable pull tension and minimum bend radii. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 13 43 PERMIT SET STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA MARCH 2013 PAGE 10 OF 13 4. When installing in conduit, use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer and do not chafe or damage outer jacket. 5. Cable raceways shall not be filled greater than the NEC maximum fill for the particular raceway type. 6. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination(no splices)unless specifically addressed in this document where cable splices are not allowed. 7. Cable shall be supported in conduit or cable tray where applicable. If a j-hook or trapeze system is used to support cable bundles,all horizontal cables shall be supported at a maximum of four-foot intervals.At no point shall cable(s)rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels. 8. Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler and systems and shall not be attached to the system or any ancillary equipment or hardware.The cabling system and support hardware shall be installed so that it does not obscure any valves,fire alarm conduit, boxes,or other control devices. 9. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting support wires.Where light support for drop cable legs is required,the contractor shall install clips to support the cabling. 10. Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters during installation shall be replaced by the contractor prior to final acceptance at no cost to the Owner. 11. All backbone cables shall be installed in the following manner: a. Backbone cables shall be installed separately from horizontal distribution cables. b. Where cables are housed in conduits,the backbone and horizontal cables shall be installed in separate conduits or in separate innerducts within conduits. c. Where cables are installed in an air return plenum,the cable shall be installed in conduit, or plenum cable shall be installed in a plenum innerduct to provide protection to the cable d. Where backbone cables and distribution cables are installed in a cable tray or wireway, backbone cables shall be installed first and bundled separately from the horizontal distribution cables. B. Fiber Optic Cabling: 1. Prepare for pulling by cutting outer jacket for 10 inches from end,leaving strength members exposed.Twist strength members together and attach to pulling eye. 2. Support vertical cable at intervals as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Cable shall be installed in minimum 1 inch corregated style innerduct enclosing the fiber optic cable in its entirety from termination to termination. 4. All strands are to be connected and tested. No strands are to be left'dark'. Manufacturer's specifications for bend radii are to be strictly observed.Any instance where the bend radius of the optical cable must exceed that which is AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 13 43 PERMIT SET STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA MARCH 2013 PAGE 11 OF 13 manufacturer specified or recommended shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Architect. 5. All fiber optic cable(and encasing innerduct)is not to be bound,wrapped,or otherwise secured to the copper twisted pair cable at any point,except as where the copper cable and innerduct may be commonly attached to a wall,and hence commonly supported by a wire hanger,or other approved mechanism. 6. Fiber slack shall be neatly coiled within the fiber termination panel. No slack loops shall be allowed external to the fiber panel(s). 7. Each cable shall be individually attached to the respective termination panel by mechanical means.The cables strength member(s)shall be securely attached the cable strain relief bracket in the panel. 8. Each fiber cable shall be stripped upon entering the termination panel and the individual fibers routed in the termination panel. 9. Each cable shall be clearly labeled at the entrance to the termination panel.Cables labeled within the bundle shall not be acceptable. 10. Dust caps shall be installed on the connectors and couplings at all times unless physically connected. 11. Fiber optic hardware and terminations shall be performed by a technician who has either successfully completed a manufacturer's training course for terminating and maintaining fiber optic cable, or has successfully completed such a training program offered by an authorized distributor of optical cable and termination products. 12. A 20-foot slack loop of fiber optic cable shall be left at the MDF and IDF prior to the cable entering any termination hardware. 13. Splicing:All fiber routed between MDF and IDF is to be one continuous length, without exception. No splices are to be performed. C. Copper Cabling: 1. All outlets shall be installed in the following manner: Cables shall be coiled in the in- wall or surface-mount boxes if adequate space is present to house the cable coil without exceeding the manufacturer's bend radius. In hollow wall installations where box-eliminators are used, excess wire can be stored in the wall. No more than 12 inches of slack shall be stored in an in-wall box, modular furniture raceway, or insulated walls. Excess slack may be neatly coiled and stored in the ceiling above each drop location when there is not enough space present in the outlet box to store slack cable. 2. Enough slack shall be stored in ceiling space for outlet to be relocated to furthest location in the room from the feeding IDF. 3. In addition, each cable type shall be terminated as indicated below: a. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A or ANSIITIA/EIA-568-B document, manufacturer's recommendations,and/or best industry practices. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 13 43 PERMIT SET STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA MARCH 2013 PAGE 12 OF 13 b. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 0.25 inch for Category 6 connecting hardware. c. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point. 4. Horizontal distribution cables shall be bundled in groups of not greater than 40 cables.Cable bundle quantities in excess of 40 cables may cause deformation of the bottom cables within the bundle. 5. UTP cable shall be installed so that there are no bends less than four times the outside diameter(4 x cable O.D.)at any point in the run. FTP cable shall be installed so that there are no bends less than 8 times the outside diameter(8 x cable O.D.)at any point in the run. D. Equipment Racks and Enclosures: 1. Racks shall be placed in a manner that will allow a minimum of 3 feet of clearance from the front and rear mounting surfaces and on one side. If one mounting rail of the rack is placed against a wall,the mounting rail shall be no closer than 7 inches to the wall to allow room for vertical wire management hardware.Where more than one rack is to be installed,the racks shall be ganged with vertical wire management hardware to provide inter-bay management.Ganged rack frames will be placed in a manner that will allow a minimum of 3 feet of clearance from the front and rear mounting surfaces and on one side of the ganged assembly. 2. Racks shall be securely attached to the concrete floor using 3/8 inch hardware. 3. All racks shall be grounded to the telecommunications ground bus bar. 4. Rack mount screws(#12-24)not used for installing panels and other hardware shall be bagged and left with the rack upon completion of the installation. 5. All installed racks shall comply with regional seismic requirements and I.B.C. 6. Wall mount racks shall be mounted on plywood backboard per Section 2710 05. E. Field-Installed Labels:Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A using encoded identifiers. 1. Contractor shall submit for approval by Owner a proposed labeling system based on the above standard. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Visual Inspection: 1. Inspect cable jackets for certification markings. 2. Inspect cable terminations for color coded labels of proper type. 3. Inspect outlet plates and patch panels for complete labels. 4. Inspect patch cords for complete labels. 5. Inspect cable termination to validate that cables were dressed and terminated in accordance with ANSIITIA/EIA specifications for jacket removal and pair untwist, compliance with manufacturer's minimum bend radius,and that cable ends are dressed in a neat and orderly fashion. B. Testing- Fiber Optic Cabling: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 27 13 43 PERMIT SET STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA MARCH 2013 PAGE 13 OF 13 1. Backbone: Perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation test using an optical time domain reflectometer(OTDR)and manufacturer's recommended test procedures; perform verification acceptance tests and factory reel tests. Post-installation tests shall be per ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.3 Standard. 2. Multimode Backbone: Perform tests in accordance with TIA/EIA-526-14 Method B. 3. Single Mode Backbone: Perform tests in accordance with TIA-526-7 Method B. 4. Links: Perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation tests and field reel tests. C. Testing-Copper Cabling and Associated Equipment: 1. Testing will be completed per Industry Standard for cable type to be tested. TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 (Category 6), ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2nd Edition(classes D, E and F). 2. Test backbone cables after termination but before cross-connection. 3. Test backbone cables for DC loop resistance,shorts,opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between connectors and between conductors and shield, if cable has overall shield. 4. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. 5. Category 3 Backbone:Perform attenuation test. 6. Category 3 Links:Test each pair for short circuit continuity,short to ground, crosses, reversed polarity,operational and ring-back,and dial tone. 7. Category 6 Backbone: Perform near end cross talk(NEXT)and attenuation tests. 8. Category 6 Links: Perform tests for wire map, length,attenuation, NEXT,and propagation delay. D. Testing-Documentation: 1. The Contractor shall compile test results into forms that contain all applicable test data.All forms shall be neatly completed and legible when submitted. Hard copy optical traces shall be neatly and securely attached to the test results where indicated.Computer disks containing trace files will be submitted at the same time. E. Test Verification: 1. Upon receipt of the test documentation,The Owner reserves the right to perform spot testing of a representative sample of the cabling system to validate test results provided in the test document.Owner testing will use the same method employed by the Contractor, and minor variations will be allowed to account for differences in test equipment. If significant discrepancies are found,the Contractor will be notified for resolution. F. Final Inspection: 1. Upon completion of the project,The Owner's Technical Representative will perform a final inspection of the installed cabling system with the Contractor's Project Foreman.The final inspection will be performed to validate that all horizontal and backbone cables were installed as defined in the drawing package,and that the installation meets the aesthetic expectations of the Owner. END OF SECTION AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 28 31 00 PERMIT SET FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 OF 13 SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire alarm system design and installation,including all components,wiring,and conduit. B. Transmitters for communication with supervising station. C. Maintenance of fire alarm system under contract for specified warranty period. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 84 00- Firestopping: Materials and methods for work to be performed by this installer. B. Section 08 71 00- Door Hardware: Electrically operated locks and door holder devices to be monitored and released by fire alarm system. C. Section 23 33 00-Air Duct Accessories:Smoke dampers monitored and controlled by fire alarm system. 1.03 REFERENCES A. IEEE C62.41.2- Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less)AC Power Circuits; 2002(R2008). B. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. NFPA 72-National Fire Alarm Code and Signaling Code;2010. D. NFPA 101 -Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; 2009. E. NFPA 601 -Standard for Security Services in Fire Loss Prevention; 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Proposal Documents:Submit the following with cost/time proposal: 1. NFPA 72"Record of Completion",filled out to the extent known at the time. 2. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each control unit, initiating device,and notification appliance. 3. Certification by Contractor that the system design will comply with the contract documents. 4. Proposed maintenance contract. C. Drawings must be prepared using AutoCAD Release 2005(or later). AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 28 31 00 PERMIT SET FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 OF 13 1. Owner will provide floor plan drawings for Contractor's use;verify all dimensions on Owner-provided drawings. D. Evidence of designer qualifications. E. Design Documents:Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by authorities having jurisdiction,including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams,and description of operation: 1. Copy(if any)of list of data required by authority having jurisdiction. 2. NFPA 72"Record of Completion",filled out to the extent known at the time. 3. Clear and concise description of operation,with input/output matrix similar to that shown in NFPA 72 Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software required. 4. System zone boundaries and interfaces to fire safety systems. 5. Location of all components,circuits,and raceways; mark components with identifiers used in control unit programming. 6. Circuit layouts; number, size,and type of raceways and conductors;spare capacity calculations; notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculations. 7. List of all devices on each signaling line circuit,with spare capacity indicated. 8. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each component,including wiring diagrams, installation instructions, and circuit length limitations. 9. Description of power supplies; if secondary power is by battery include calculations demonstrating adequate battery power. 10. Certification by either the manufacturer of the control unit or by the manufacturer of each other component that the components are compatible with the control unit. 11. Certification by Contractor that the system design complies with the contract documents. 12. Do not show existing components to be removed. 13. Shop drawings will need to be stamped by a NICET Level III certified fire alarm technician. F. Evidence of installer qualifications. G. Evidence of instructor qualifications;training lesson plan outline. H. Evidence of maintenance contractor qualifications, if different from installer. Inspection and Test Reports: 1. Submit inspection and test plan prior to closeout demonstration. 2. Submit documentation of satisfactory inspections and tests. 3. Submit NFPA 72"Inspection and Test Form,"filled out. �. Operating and Maintenance Data:See Section 01 78 00 for additional requirements; revise and resubmit until acceptable; have one set available during closeout demonstration: 1. Complete set of specified design documents,as approved by authority having jurisdiction. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 28 31 00 PERMIT SET FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 OF 13 2. Additional printed set of project record documents and closeout documents, bound or filed in same manuals. 3. Contact information for firm that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble call-back service. 4. List of recommended spare parts,tools,and instruments for testing. 5. Replacement parts list with current prices,and source of supply. 6. Detailed troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix. 7. Preventive maintenance, inspection,and testing schedule complying with NFPA 72; provide printed copy and computer format acceptable to Owner. 8. Detailed but easy to read explanation of procedures to be taken by non-technical administrative personnel in the event of system trouble,when routine testing is being conducted,for fire drills,and when entering into contracts for remodeling. K. Project Record Documents:See Section 01 78 00 for additional requirements; have one set available during closeout demonstration: 1. Complete set of floor plans showing actual installed locations of components, conduit,and zones. 2. "As installed"wiring and schematic diagrams,with final terminal identifications. 3. "As programmed"operating sequences, including control events by device, updated input/output chart,and voice messages by event. L. Closeout Documents: 1. Certification by manufacturer that the system has been installed in compliance with his installation requirements, is complete,and is in satisfactory operating condition. 2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion",filled out completely and signed by installer and authorized representative of authority having jurisdiction. 3. Certificate of Occupancy. 4. Written warranty. 5. Report on training results. M. Maintenance Materials,Tools, and Software: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements,for additional provisions. 2. Furnish spare parts of same manufacturer and model as those installed; deliver in original packaging, labeled in same manner as in operating and maintenance data and place in spare parts cabinet. 3. In addition to the items in quantities indicated in PART 2,furnish the following: a. All tools,software,and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm system using Owner's personnel; minimum modification capability to include addition and deletion of devices, circuits, and zones,and changes to system description,operation,and evacuation and instructional messages. b. Two copies,on CD-ROM,of all software not resident in read-only-memory. c. Extra Fuses:Two for each installed fuse; store inside applicable control cabinet. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 28 31 00 PERMIT SET FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 OF 13 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Copies of Design Criteria Documents:Maintain at the project site for the duration of the project, bound together,an original copy of NFPA 72,the relevant portions of applicable codes,and instructions and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction; deliver to Owner upon completion. B. Designer Qualifications: NICET Level III or IV(3 or 4)certified fire alarm technician or registered fire protection engineer,employed by fire alarm control panel manufacturer, Contractor,or installer,with experience designing fire alarm systems in the jurisdictional area of the authorities having jurisdiction. C. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 5 years documented experience installing fire alarm systems of the specified type and providing contract maintenance service as a regular part of their business. 1. Authorized representative of control unit manufacturer;submit manufacturer's certification that installer is authorized; include name and title of manufacturer's representative making certification. 2. Installer Personnel:At least 2 years of experience installing fire alarm systems. 3. Supervisor: NICET level Ill or IV(3 or 4)certified fire alarm technician;furnish name and address. 4. Contract maintenance office located within 50 miles of project site. 5. Certified in Oregon as fire alarm installer. D. Instructor Qualifications: Experienced in technical instruction, understanding fire alarm theory, and able to provide the required training;trained by fire alarm control unit manufacturer. E. Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a SINGLE fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.(UL),and shall bear the"UL" label.All control equipment shall be listed under UL category UOJZ as a single control unit. Partial listing shall NOT be acceptable. F. All control equipment must have transient protection devices to comply with UL864 requirements. G. In addition to the UL UOJZ requirement mentioned above,the system controls shall be UL listed for Power Limited Applications per NEC 760.All circuits must be marked in accordance with NEC article 760 23. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide control panel manufacturer's warranty that system components other than wire and conduit are free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date of Substantial Completion. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 28 31 00 PERMIT SET FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 OF 13 C. Provide installer's warranty that the installation is free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date of Substantial Completion and certified test. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Alarm Control Units- Basis of Design: 1. Honeywell Security& Fire Solutions; Fire Control Instruments, Inc: www.firecontrolinstruments.com. 2. Honeywell Security&Fire Solutions; Notifier:www.notifier.com. 3. SimplexGrinnell 4010 Series:www.simplexgrinnell.com. 4. GE Security; EST Series:www.gesecurity.com. B. Fire Alarm Control Units-Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Provided their products meet or exceed the performance of the basis of design product,products of the following are acceptable: 1. Honeywell Security&Fire Solutions; Fire Control Instruments, Inc: www.firecontrolinstruments.com. 2. Honeywell Security&Fire Solutions; Notifier:www.notifier.com. 3. SimplexGrinnell:www.simplexgrinnell.com. 4. GE Security:www.gesecurity.com. 5. Provide all control units made by the same manufacturer. C. Initiating Devices,and Notification Appliances: 1. Honeywell Security& Fire Solutions/Fire Control Instruments, Inc: www.firecontrolinstruments.com. 2. Honeywell Security&Fire Solutions/Notifier:www.notifier.com. 3. SimplexGrinnell:www.simplexgrinnell.com. Part numbers indicated are Simplex; equals by other manufacturers are acceptable,unless otherwise noted. 4. GE Security:www.gesecurity.com. 5. Same manufacturer as control units. 6. Provide all initiating devices and notification appliances made by the same manufacturer. D. Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 1. For other acceptable manufacturers of control units specified,submit product data showing equivalent features and compliance with contract documents prior to bid per Section 01 60 00. 2. For substitution of products by manufacturers not listed,submit product data showing features and certification by Contractor that the design will comply with contract documents. 2.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Fire Alarm System: Provide a new automatic fire detection and alarm system: AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 28 31 00 PERMIT SET FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 6 OF 13 1. Provide all components necessary,regardless of whether shown in the contract documents or not,for a complete and operable system. 2. Comply with the following;where requirements conflict,order of precedence of requirements is as listed: a. The Americans With Disabilities Act(ADA). b. The requirements of the State Fire Marshal. c. The requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. d. Applicable local codes. e. The contract documents(drawings and specifications). f. NFPA 101. g. NFPA 72;where the word"should" is used consider that provision mandatory;where conflicts between requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations clearly on design documents. 3. Evacuation Alarm: Multiple smoke zones;allow for evacuation notification of any individual zone or combination of zones,in addition to general evacuation of entire premises. 4. Voice Notification: Provide emergency voice/alarm communications with multichannel capability; digital. 5. General Evacuation Zones: Each smoke zone is considered a general evacuation zone unless otherwise indicated,with alarm notification in all zones on the same floor,on the floor above,and the floor below. 6. Program notification zones and voice messages as directed by Owner. 7. Hearing Impaired Occupants: Provide visible notification devices in all public areas. 8. Master Control Unit(Panel): New, location indicated on drawings. 9. Combined Systems: Do not combine fire alarm system with other non-fire systems. B. Supervising Stations and Fire Department Connections: 1. Public Fire Department Notification: By remote supervising station. 2. Remote Supervising Station: UL-listed central station under contract to facility. 3. Means of Transmission to Remote Supervising Station:Digital alarm communicator transmitter(DACT), 2 telephone lines. C. Circuits: 1. Initiating Device Circuits(IDC):Class B,Style A. 2. Signaling Line Circuits(SLC)Within Single Building:Class B,Style 4. 3. Signaling Line Circuits(SLC) Between Buildings:Class A,Style 6. 4. Notification Appliance Circuits(NAC)within single building: Class B,Style Y. 5. Notification Appliance Circuits(NAC)between buildings:Class A,Style Z. D. Spare Capacity: 1. Initiating Device Circuits: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity. 2. Notification Appliance Circuits: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity. 3. Speaker Amplifiers: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity. 4. Master Control Unit:Capable of handling all circuits utilized to capacity without requiring additional components other than plug-in control modules. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 28 31 00 PERMIT SET FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 7 OF 13 E. Power Sources: 1. Primary:Dedicated branch circuits of the facility power distribution system. 2. Secondary:Storage batteries. 3. Capacity:Sufficient to operate entire system for period specified by NFPA 72. 4. Each Computer System: Provide uninterruptible power supply(UPS). 2.03 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES A. Supervision: Provide supervisory signals in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following: 1. Sprinkler water control valves. 2. Dry-pipe sprinkler system pressure. 3. Dry-pipe sprinkler valve room low temperature. 4. Sprinkler water storage tank low level. 5. Sprinkler water storage tank low temperature. 6. Fire pump(s). • 7. Elevator shut-down control circuits. 8. Chute interlocks and controls. B. Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following: 1. Sprinkler water flow. 2. Total flooding suppression system activation. 3. Kitchen hood suppression activation;also disconnect fuel source from cooking equipment. 4. Elevator lobby,elevator hoistway,and elevator machine room smoke detectors. 5. Generator room heat detector. 6. Duct smoke detectors. C. HVAC: 1. Duct Smoke Detectors:Close dampers indicated;shut down air handlers indicated. D. Doors: 1. Smoke Barrier Door Magnetic Holders: Release upon activation of smoke detectors in smoke zone on either side of door, upon alarm from manual pull station on same floor,and upon sprinkler activation on same floor. 2. Electromagnetic Door Locks on Egress Doors: Unlock upon activation of any alarm initiating device or suppression system in smoke zone that doors serve as egress from. 3. Overhead Coiling Fire Doors: Release upon activation of smoke detectors in smoke zone on either side of door, upon alarm from manual pull station on same floor, and upon sprinkler activation on same floor. 2.04 COMPONENTS A. General: 1. Provide flush mounted units where installed in finish areas; in unfinished areas, surface mounted unit are acceptable. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 28 31 00 PERMIT SET FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 8 OF 13 2. Provide legible, permanent labels for each control device,using identification used in operation and maintenance data. B. Fire Alarm Control Units, Initiating Devices,and Notification Appliances:Analog, addressable type; listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Master Control Unit:As specified for Basis of Design above,or equivalent. 1. Construction shall be modular with solid state, microprocessor based electronics. An 80 character LCD display shall indicate alarms,supervisory service conditions, and any troubles. Panel shall have 250 addressable points with internal dialer. 2. Expansion Power Supplies: Provide as required for notification appliance circuits. Power supply to provide 8 Amps of power,four signal circuits,and battery standby. a. Simplex 4009 Series or approved. D. Remote Annunciators: Shall be 80 character LCD display and include four programmable control switches,as well as alarm silence,acknowledgment,and system reset switches. 1. Simplex 4606 Series or approved. E. Initiating Devices: 1. Manual Pull Stations:Shall be addressable, single action,and constructed of high impact, red lexan with raised white lettering and a smooth high gloss finish. Stations which utilize screwdrivers,alien wrenches,or other commonly available tools shall not be accepted.Stations shall be keyed alike with the fire alarm control panel.When the station is operated,the handle shall lock in a protruding manner to facilitate quick visual identification of the activated station. a. Simplex 4099 Series or approved. b. Provide 1 extra. c. Provide 50 extra break rods. 2. Smoke Detectors: Photo electric smoke detectors with 4098 Series base. Each smoke detector shall have its own unique address,analog,and with selectable sensitivity. Detectors shall be listed to UL standard 268 and shall be documented compatible with the control equipment to which it is connected. Detectors shall be listed for this purpose by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.The detectors shall obtain their operating power from the fire alarm panel supervised detection loop.The operating voltage shall be 24VDC(nominal). Removal of the detector head shall interrupt the supervisory circuit of the fire alarm detection loop and cause a trouble signal to be generated at the control panel. Each detector shall have a flashing status indicating LED for visual supervision.When the detector is actuated, the flashing LED will latch on steady and at full brilliance.The detector may be reset by actuating the control panel reset switch. Remote LED alarm indicators shall be installed where indicated. a. Simplex 4098 Series or approved. b. Provide 5 extra. 3. Duct Smoke Detectors:Shall be addressable and of the solid state photoelectric type.The detectors shall operate on the light scattering photodiode principle. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 28 31 00 PERMIT SET FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 9 OF 13 Detector design shall provide full solid state construction and compatibility with being separately monitored via a unique address via the twisted shielded pair data loop. a. Simplex 4098 Series or approved. b. Provide 1 extra. 4. Heat Detectors:Automatic heat detectors shall be combination rate-of-rise and fixed-temperature type. Each heat detector shall have its own unique address. a. Simplex 4098 Series or approved. b. Provide 1 extra. 5. Addressable Interface Devices:. a. Simplex 4090 Series or approved. b. Provide 3 extra. F. Notification Appliances: 1. Audible/visible units shall provide a common enclosure for fire alarm audible and visual alarm devices. Models shall be available which provide for horizontal or vertical mounting and with high humidity and strobe synchronization options.The audio/visual combination unit shall provide 4 Wire connection to ensure properly supervised in/out system connection and shall be UL listed for its intended purpose. Device candela shall be rated per current NFPA and ADA requirements. a. Provide 3 extra audible/visible units. b. Simplex 4906 Series or approved. G. Circuit Conductors:Copper; color code and label. H. Surge Protection:In accordance with IEEE C62.41.2 category B combination waveform and NFPA 70; except for optical fiber conductors. 1. Equipment Connected to Alternating Current Circuits: Maximum let through voltage of 350 V(ac), line-to-neutral,and 350 V(ac), line-to-line; do not use fuses. 2. Initiating Device Circuits, Notification Appliance Circuits,and Communications Circuits: Provide surge protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building; rated to protect applicable equipment;for 24 V(dc)maximum dc clamping voltage of 36 V(dc), line-to-ground,and 72 V(dc), line-to-line. 3. Signaling Line Circuits: Provide surge protection at each point where circuit exits or enters a building, rated to protect applicable equipment. Locks and Keys:Deliver keys to Owner. 1. Provide the same standard lock and key for each key operated switch and lockable panel and cabinet; provide 5 keys of each type. ). Instruction Charts: Printed instruction chart for operators, showing steps to be taken when a signal is received(normal,alarm,supervisory,and trouble); easily readable from • normal operator's station. 1. Frame:Stainless steel or aluminum with polycarbonate or glass cover. 2. Provide one for each control unit where operations are to be performed. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 28 31 00 PERMIT SET FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 10 OF 13 3. Obtain approval of Owner prior to mounting; mount in location acceptable to Owner. 4. Provide extra copy with operation and maintenance data submittal. K. Storage Cabinet for Spare Parts and Tools:Steel with baked enamel finish,size appropriate to quantity of parts and tools. 1. Padlock eye and hasp for lock furnished by Owner. 2. Locate as directed by Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications,all applicable codes, and the manufacturer's recommendations.All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC-Article 760 A and C, Power-Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuits or if required may be reclassified as non-power limited and wired in accordance with NEC-Article 760 A and B. Upon completion,the contractor shall so certify in writing to the owner and general contractor.All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labeled"Fire Alarm".Wiring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation. B. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes,and supports where installed in finished areas. C. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation. D. Install instruction cards and labels. E. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors. F. The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm equipment after completion of the installation. G. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide on site supervision of installation. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION A. Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests. B. Owner will provide the services of an independent fire alarm engineer or technician to observe all tests. C. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel. D. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to supervise inspection and testing, correction,and adjustments. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 28 31 00 PERMIT SET FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 11 OF 13 E. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct; perform preliminary tests as required. F. Provide all tools, software, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing. G. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document each inspection and test. H. Correct defective work,adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with contract documents. I. Diagnostic Period:After successful completion of inspections and tests, Operate system in normal mode for at least 14 days without any system or equipment malfunctions. 1. Record all system operations and malfunctions. 2. If a malfunction occurs,start diagnostic period over after correction of malfunction. 3. Owner will provide attendant operator personnel during diagnostic period; schedule training to allow Owner personnel to perform normal duties. 4. At end of successful diagnostic period,fill out and submit NFPA 72"Inspection and Testing Form." 3.03 OWNER PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION A. Provide the following instruction to designated Owner personnel: 1. Hands-On Instruction:On-site,using operational system. 2. Classroom Instruction:Owner furnished classroom, on-site or at other local facility. 3. Factory Instruction:At control unit manufacturer's training facility,as required. B. Provide a total of 16 hours of initial/refresher training to designated Owner personnel covering issues for the topics below. Duration of individual training sessions as determined by Owner, not to exceed total number of required hours. 1. Administrative: Issues necessary for non-technical administrative staff. 2. Basic/Detailed Operation: Issues necessary for attendant personnel,security officers,and engineering staff. 3. Maintenance Technicians: Issues necessary for electrical technicians on programming, maintaining, repairing,and modifying. C. Furnish the services of instructors and teaching aids; have copies of operation and maintenance data available during instruction. D. Provide means of evaluation of trainees suitable to type of training given; report results to Owner. 3.04 CLOSEOUT A. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner. 1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests. 2. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, preliminary copy of project record drawings, input/output matrix,and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 28 31 00 PERMIT SET FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MARCH 2013 PAGE 12 OF 13 3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration. 4. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by authority having jurisdiction; notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration. 5. Repeat demonstration until successful. B. Occupancy of the project will not occur prior to Substantial Completion. C. Substantial Completion of the project cannot be achieved until inspection and testing is successful and: 1. Specified diagnostic period without malfunction has been completed. 2. Approved operating and maintenance data has been delivered. 3. Spare parts, extra materials,and tools have been delivered. 4. All aspects of operation have been demonstrated to Owner. 5. Final acceptance of the fire alarm system has been given by authorities having jurisdiction. 6. Occupancy permit has been granted. 7. Specified pre-closeout instruction is complete. D. Perform post-occupancy instruction within 3 months after Substantial Completion. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. See Section 01 70 00- Execution Requirements,for additional requirements relating to maintenance service. B. Provide to Owner,at no extra cost,a written maintenance contract for entire manufacturer's warranty period,to include the work described below. C. Perform routine inspection,testing,and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72, including: 1. Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm system. 2. Repairs required, unless due to improper use,accidents,or negligence beyond the control of the maintenance contractor. 3. Record keeping required by NFPA72 and authorities having jurisdiction. D. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner: 1. Provide on-site response within 2 hours of notification. 2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to Owner. 3. Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time;include hourly rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contract. E. Provide a complete description of preventive maintenance,systematic examination, adjustment, cleaning, inspection,and testing,with a detailed schedule. AM-3533 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 28 31 00 PERMIT SET FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MARCH2013 PAGE13OF13 F. Maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit,listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit,the condition of the system, nature of the trouble, correction performed,and parts replaced. Submit duplicate of each log entry to Owner's representative upon completion of site visit. G. Comply with Owner's requirements for access to facility and security. END OF SECTION AM-3533 lo (Ao,( s ,o ,ta ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 31 10 00 PERMIT SET SITE CLEARING MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clearing and protection of vegetation. B. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain. C. Clearing and grubbing. D. Topsoil stripping. E. Removing site improvements. F. Removal of existing debris. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain dust permit from governing jurisdiction. B. Herbicides shall be approved by governmental authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Obtain written authorization from owner prior to using herbicides. C. Underground Utilities: 1. Verify location of all underground utility lines including underground storm and sanitary utilities. 2. Notify Underground Utility Provider 48 hours prior to starting clearing and grubbing. 3. Comply with requirements of Governmental Authorities having jurisdiction for capping and sealing existing utilities to be abandoned in place. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Material Ownership: Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or identified to remain the Owner's property,cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. B. Do not close or obstruct adjacent street,drive lanes,utility easements,walks, and exit passageways without permission of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Keep streets and sidewalks clean. C. Protection of persons and property: 1. Barricade open depressions and holes occurring as part of work,and post warning lights on property adjacent to or with public access. 2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required to ensure safety of persons. 3. Protect structures, utilities,sidewalks, pavements,and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining,washout, and other hazards created by operations of this Section. D. Minimize production of dust due to clearing operations;do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding,sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers,or other pollution. E. Maintain access to site at all times. F. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 70 00. Project Number 211280 ST. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 31 10 00 PERMIT SET SITE CLEARING MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 of 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS--NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CLEARING A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 70 00. B. Minimize production of dust due to clearing operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers,or other pollution. 3.02 EXISTING UTILITIES AND BUILT ELEMENTS A. Protect existing reference points, including bench marks and monuments B. Protect adjacent properties and public rights-of-way from sedimentation by placing and maintaining erosion control measures, identified on grading plan. C Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements;obtain required permits. 1. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. D. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. E. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. F. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. G. Remove existing above and below grade improvements,such as slabs, paving, curbs,gutters, and aggregate base,as indicated. 1. Unless full depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw cut existing pavements between sections to remain and portions to be removed. H. Restore damaged site improvements to their original condition. 3.03 VEGETATION A. Scope: Remove trees, shrubs,brush, and stumps in areas to be covered by building structure, paving, playing fields, lawns, and planting beds. 1. Removal includes digging out of stumps, obstructions, and grubbing roots. Obstructions include rock larger than 4 inches. 2. Remove to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade under site improvements,and to a minimum depth of 12 inches in areas of landscaping. 3. Treat remaining roots with herbicide per Manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with governmental regulations. B. Do not begin clearing until vegetation to be relocated has been removed. C. Do not permit vehicles, equipment or foot traffic within drip line of trees to remain. D. Do not excavate within drip line of trees to remain,unless otherwise indicated. E. Do not remove or damage vegetation beyond the following limits: 1. 40 feet outside the building perimeter. 2. 10 feet each side of surface walkways, patios,surface parking, and utility lines less than 12 inches in diameter. 3. 15 feet each side of roadway curbs and main utility trenches. 4. 25 feet outside perimeter of pervious paving areas that must not be compacted by construction traffic. Project Number-211280 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 31 10 00 PERMIT SET SITE CLEARING MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 of 3 F. Install substantial, highly visible fences at least 3 feet high to prevent inadvertent damage to vegetation to remain: 1. At vegetation removal limits. G. In areas where vegetation must be removed but no construction will occur other than pervious paving, remove vegetation with minimum disturbance of the subsoil. H. Vegetation Removed: Do not burn, bury, landfill,or leave on site,except as indicated. 1. Chip, grind, crush, or shred vegetation for mulching,composting, or other purposes; preference should be given to on-site uses. 2. Trees: Sell if marketable; if not,treat as specified for other vegetation removed; remove stumps and roots to depth of 24 inches. 3. Sod: Re-use on site if possible; otherwise sell if marketable, and if not,treat as specified for other vegetation removed. I. Restoration: If vegetation outside removal limits or within specified protective fences is damaged or destroyed due to subsequent construction operations,replace at no cost to Owner. 1. Engage a qualified arborist to propose details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and other vegetation to remain. J. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with soil materials specified in Section 31 23 23- Fill,for fill materials, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Structural fill is required for depressions that occur in areas where site improvements, such as buildings and pavements,are shown. 3.04 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to depth of at 6 inches minimum at areas of site improvements. C. Stockpile topsoil in an area clear of new construction,without intermixing with subsoils. D. Maintain topsoil stockpile in a manner that does not obstruct the natural flow of drainage on the site. 1. Shape stockpile to drain water. 2. Maintain stockpile free from debris and trash. 3. Keep the topsoil damp to prevent dust and drying out. 4. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3.05 DEBRIS A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, demolished material, obstructions, brush, grass, roots, and other debris from the site. 1. Legally dispose of material removed from site. B. Remove debris,junk, and trash from site. C. Do not burn debris at site. D. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. E. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION Project Number-211280 ST. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 31 23 16 PERMIT SET EXCAVATION MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 31 23 16 EXCAVATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating for building volume below grade,footings, slabs-on-grade, paving, site structures, and utilities within the building. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to federal, state and local safety regulations. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. B. Protect bench marks, survey control points,existing structures,fences,sidewalks,paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the work are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels,contours,and datum locations. B. Locate, identify,and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage. 1. If Contractor's operation could cause damage or interference to private,public or municipal utilities, Contractor shall suspend work until arrangements for protection thereof have been made by Contractor. C. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities. D. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain. 1. Contractor shall notify utility offices which are affected by construction operation at least 48 hours in advance of excavation. 2. Do not expose or interrupt any utility without First requesting permission and being granted to do so from affected agency. 3. Once permission from utility has been granted,to locate, if necessary,and exposure of existing underground utilities in advance of trenching operation. 4. Contractor responsible for damages as a result of location of underground utilities being other than that shown on drawings or for existence of underground utilities not shown on drawings. E. Contractor responsible to Owner and utility companies for any damage, expense, or claims of any kind brought because of injuries,damages or delay which may result from carrying out of work to be done under this section. F. If domestic water or other utility services are interrupted as a result of accidental breakage,or as result of being exposed, unsupported, or a lack of coordination, Contractor shall promptly notify Architect and agency involved. 1. Contractor shall cooperate with authority in restoration of service and shall bear costs of repair. Project Number-211280 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 31 23 16 PERMIT SET EXCAVATION MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 of 5 2. Interruption of any water or utility service shall not be allowed outside working hours unless prior approval of Architect or agency involved is granted. 3 03 FIELD RELOCATION A. Minor relocations of lines may be necessary and shall be made only with approval from Architect. 1. Unforeseen obstructions encountered as a result of relocations will not become subject to claims for additional compensation by Contractor that original lump sum of contract or unit price of utility being installed. 3.04 BARRICADES, GUARDS AND SAFETY PROVISIONS A. Protect persons from injury and to avoid property damage, adequate barricades,construction signs,warning lights,and guards as required shall be placed and maintained during progress of work and until it is safe for public use. 1. Watchmen or flag personnel shall be provided as necessary. 2. Rules and regulations of local and Federal authorities regarding safety provisions shall be observed. 3. Contractor responsible for accidents caused by inadequate or insufficient safety provisions. 3.05 PAVEMENT REMOVAL A. Bituminous and concrete pavements shall be saw cut prior to excavation. 1. Width of pavement cut shall be equal to prescribed width of trench at ground surface or as shown on drawings. 2. Pavement removed during excavation shall be piled separately from other excavation materials and removed from site. 3. Pavement shall not be used as backfill material. 3.06 OBSTRUCTIONS A. Obstructions may be encountered and do not require replacement. 1. Obstructions to construction of trench such as tree roots, stumps, abandoned piling, buildings and concrete structures, logs,rubbish,and debris shall be removed without additional compensation from Owner. 2. Architect may make changes in trench alignment to avoid major obstructions, if changes can be made within perpetual easement and right-of-way and without adversely affecting intended function of facility or increase costs to Owner. 3. Sewer and water trenches must be maintained at a minimum specified separation. 3.07 STRUCTURES OR ROADWAYS A. Contractor shall remove, replace and/or repair any damage done by Contractor during construction to fences, buildings, cultivated fields,drainage crossings,and any other properties at his own expense without additional compensation from Owner. 1. Replace or repair structures to a condition as good or better than original condition prior to commencing work. B. Where paved roadways are cut, backfill will be as defined Section 31 23 23. 1. New pavement shall be equal or better than existing paved surface and shall not deviate by more than one-quarter inch from existing finish elevation. C. If Contractor encounters existing structures which will prevent construction and are not adequately shown on drawings, he shall notify Architect before continuing with work in order that Architect may make such field revisions as necessary to avoid conflict with existing conditions. Project Number-211280 ST. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 31 23 16 PERMIT SET EXCAVATION MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 of 5 1. Cost of waiting or"downtime"during such field revisions shall be borne by Contractor without additional cost to owner or liability to Architect. 2. If Contractor fails to so notify Architect when a conflict is encountered, but proceeds with construction despite this interference, he shall do so at his own risk with no additional payment. 3.08 EASEMENTS A. Damage to private property,either inside or outside limits of easements provided by Owner shall be responsibility of Contractor. 1. Before final payment, Contractor will be required to furnish owner with written releases from property owners where special agreements or easements have been obtained by Contractor or where Contractor's operations have not been kept within construction right-of-way obtained by Owner. 2. Special agreements must be in written form and shall not involve Owner or Architect as to liabilities. 3.09 GRADES A. Bottom of trench shall be excavated to lines and grades shown on drawings established by Architect with proper allowance for pipe thickness and required bedding. 1. Trenches excavated below grade shall be returned to grade at Contractors expense, with fine bedding material. 2. Bedding shall be placed over full width of trench, in compact layers as specified in Section 31 23 23. 3. Grades shall be smooth without humps or sags. B. Architect shall be notified in advance,when a section has been excavated and is ready for installation of utility line or structure. 1. Architect to make a determination as to suitability of excavation foundation and will give notice to Contractor to proceed or remove unstable material as covered in article in this section titled"Foundation Stabilization". 3.10 WIDTH OF TRENCH A. Trenches shall be excavated to a width to permit proper installation of piping, conduits or related improvements. 1. Minimum width of trenches shall be 18 inches. 2. Maximum width of trench shall be two feet plus inside diameter of pipe,culvert or conduit. B. Where excessive width of excavation would cause damage to an adjacent structure, trench shall not be excavated in excess of minimum width as specified or detailed on drawings. 3.11 BORING A. Boring may be used in lieu of open trench excavation if approved by Architect. 1. Contractor shall show just cause and furnish Architect with a detailed construction schedule outlining methods,time schedule and proposed safety measures to be incorporated in construction. 2. Contractor will not deviate from his proposed schedule without first obtaining approval of Architect and other respective agencies involved in that portion of work. 3.12 DEWATERING A. Whenever water is encountered in trench or excavation area, Contractor shall pump or otherwise dry bottom trench or excavated area before pipe or conduit installation is commenced. Project Number-211280 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 31 23 16 PERMIT SET EXCAVATION MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 of 5 1. Contractor shall not allow water encountered in trench or excavated area to escape down any pipe or conduit in place unless he first obtains written approval from Architect for this method of dewatering. 2. Contractor responsible for cleaning, and/or flushing as required, pipe,conduit,or structure. 3. Soil, aggregate or other foreign matter in utility prior to acceptance must be removed at Contractor's expense prior to final acceptance of work. 3 13 SHORING AND SHEATHING A. Protection: 1. Use means necessary to maintain safe working conditions and protect adjacent property and structures from damage due to excavation. 2. Conform to federal, state and local regulations governing shoring, sheathing and excavation. 3. When shoring or sheathing is installed, trench width shall be increased accordingly. 4. Shoring or sheathing shall remain in place until utility or structure is backfilled to a point where caving could not damage installation. 5. No payment will be made for shoring or sheathing. 6. Costs involved in placement and removal of shoring and sheathing shall be considered incidental to work. 3.14 LOCATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Contractor shall locate excavated material so as not to block public right-of-way,traveled roadways, public or private;and unless otherwise approved. 1. Roadways shall be kept open to at least one lane of traffic. 2. Store or waste excavated materials only in designated areas unless otherwise approved. 3. Take care to prevent spillage or damage to property adjacent to project. B. Excavated materials unsuitable for backfill or not required to meet original or specified grades shall be removed as soon as possible or at least by completion of backfill. 1. No utilities will be considered for payment until surplus materials have been removed and backfill completed as specified or as otherwise directed by Architect. 2. No additional payment will be made to Contractor for disposal of excess materials. 3.15 FOUNDATION STABILIZATION A. When in opinion of Architect, existing material in bottom of trench or excavated area is unsuitable for supporting pipe, conduit or structure or related appurtenances, excavation below flowline of pipe or base of other structure shall be executed to a suitable depth as directed. 1. Backfill of excavated area shall be performed as specified. 3 16 BEDDING PLACEMENT A. Fine Bedding: Whenever trench grade occurs in formations of solid rock, stones in excess of three-quarters inch in diameter or other material that is, in opinion of Architect,unsuitable for a foundation for pipe or conduit,trench shall be excavated to a depth of four inches below bottom of pipe for full width of trench. 1. Trench bottom shall be brought up to grade with an approved or specified bedding material compacted so as to provide a firm,smooth subgrade suitable to Architect. B. Coarse Bedding: When shown on plans or directed by Architect,coarse bedding shall be placed in trench at depth designated to stabilize foundation. C. Dry or water bedding materials, as required to meet compaction specifications. Project Number-211280 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 31 23 16 PERMIT SET EXCAVATION MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 of 5 3.17 EXCAVATING A. Wet Weather Excavation: 1. Immediately after site grading provide a one foot layer of granular fill with a geotextile fabric over traffic areas. a. Foot/Work Areas: 6 inch structural fill. 2. Excavation to be performed with smooth-bladed tracked backhoe working from areas where materials have not been removed or from already placed structural fill. 3. Work shall be observed by Geotechnical Engineer. B. Underpin adjacent structures that could be damaged by excavating work. C. Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations. D. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. E. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. F. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. G. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. H. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. I. Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surfaces that are disturbed; see Section 31 23 23. J. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. K. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. L. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements,for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Provide for visual inspection of load-bearing excavated surfaces before placement of foundations. 1. During dry season, proof roll exposed subgrade with loaded dump truck. 2. Areas found to be soft, deflecting/rutting more than 1 inch under the truck weight shall be over-excavated and replaced with structural fill per Section 31 23 23. 3.19 PROTECTION A. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability. B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing. END OF SECTION Project Number-211280 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 31 23 23 PERMIT SET FILL MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 31 23 23 FILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Filling, backfilling,and compacting for building volume below grade. B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. C. Filling holes, pits,and excavations generated as a result of removal (demolition)operations. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C136-Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates;2006. B. ASTM D1557-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort(56,000 ft-lbf/ft3(2,700 kN m/m3));2012. C. ASTM D2487-Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes(Unified Soil Classification System);2011. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated. 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BEDDING A. Bedding of pipes,conduits,cables and structures shown on drawings or as directed by Architect shall conform to following classifications. B. Bedding materials shall be placed in maximum eight inch lifts and compacted over full width of trench. C. Samples of proposed materials shall be submitted to Architect for approval. 1. Fine Bedding: Fine bedding material shall be any non-plastic,granular material which will pass 100 percent on a 3/4 inch minus sieve and retain at least 50 percent on a No. 16 sieve,such as pit run gravel or sand, or non-plastic soil excavated from trench. 2. Coarse Bedding: Coarse bedding materials shall be crushed or pit run gravel which will pass 100 percent on a 2-1/2 inch sieve and retain at least 50 percent on a 1/2 inch sieve and shall be non-plastic and not more than 3 percent shall pass on a#200 sieve. Project Number-211280 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 31 23 23 PERMIT SET FILL MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 of 5 2.02 BACKFILL A. Structural Fill shall be used in other locations where a backfill is not designated. B. Material used for General Fill shall be earth, sand,gravel, rock or combinations thereof, free of humus, organic matter, vegetable matter, frozen material,clods, sticks,and debris and containing no stones having a dimension greater than three inches. C. Materials shall predominate in finer sizes and, in place,shall present no voids and no isolated points or areas of larger stones which would cause fracture or denting of utility or structure or subject it to undue stress. D. Backfill material shall have a minimum dry unit weight of 90 pounds per cubic foot in its compacted state. 1. Structural Fill backfill shall be used under paved areas,in trenches parallel to street, other areas subject to wheel traffic, at structures or as designated on drawings. 2. Structural Fill backfill will be placed in eight inch lifts and compacted to 95 percent of optimum density in accordance with ASTM D 1557. 2.03 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site. 1. Graded. 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 3. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL. B. Structural Fill: Imported borrow. 1. Graded. 2. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136,within the following limits: a. 1-112 inch sieve: 100 percent passing. b. 1 inch sieve: 95 percent passing. c. 3/4 inch sieve: 95 to 100 percent passing. d. No. 200: 0 to 5 percent passing. C Granular Fill-Gravel : Angular crushed washed stone;free of shale,clay,friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136,within the following limits: a. 1 inch sieve: 100 percent passing. b. 3/4 inch sieve: 95 to 100 percent passing. c. 5/8 inch sieve: 75 to 100 percent passing. d. No. 200: 0 to 5 percent passing. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable,woven . 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements,for general requirements for testing and analysis of soil material. B. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard,test and analyze samples for compliance . C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. Project Number-211280 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 31 23 23 PERMIT SET FILL MARCH 2013 PAGE 3 of 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Identify required lines, levels,contours,and datum locations. B. See Section 31 22 00 for additional requirements. C. Verify subdrainage,dampproofing,or waterproofing installation has been inspected. D. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support imposed loads by the fill. E. Verify underground tanks are anchored to their own foundations to avoid flotation after backfilling. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Scarify subgrade surface to a depth of 8 inches to identify soft spots. B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. C. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. D. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.03 FILLING A. Fill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. C. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous,wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. E. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth. F. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth. G. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. H. Correct areas that are over-excavated. 1. Load-bearing foundation surfaces: Use structural fill,flush to required elevation, compacted to 100 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Other areas: Use structural fill,flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97 percent of maximum dry density. I. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: 1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade,and similar construction: 95 percent of maximum dry density. J. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Structural Fill: 1. Use structural fill. 2. Fill up to subgrade elevations. Project Number-211280 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 31 23 23 PERMIT SET FILL MARCH 2013 PAGE 4 of 5 3. Maximum depth per lift: 8 inches,compacted. 4. Compact to minimum 95 percent of maximum dry density. B. Under Interior Slabs-On-Grade: 1. Use structural fill. 2. Depth: 6 inches deep. 3. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 4. Cover with clean 3/4 inch-1/4 inch gravel. a. Depth: 2 inches. b. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. C. At Foundation Walls and Footings: 1. Use Structural Fill. 2. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 3. Compact each lift to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 4. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls. D. Over Buried Utility Piping and Conduits in Trenches: 1. Bedding: Use granular fill. 2. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 3. Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density. E. At Lawn Areas: 1. Use general fill. 2. Fill up to 6 inches below finish grade elevations. 3. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 4. See Section 31 22 00 for topsoil placement. F. At Planting Areas Other Than Lawns: 1. Use general fill. 2. Fill up to 12 inches below finish grade elevations. 3. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 4. See Section 31 22 00 for topsoil placement. G. Under Pavers Set on Sand Leveling Bed: 1. Use granular fill. 2. Fill up to bottom of sand leveling bed. 3. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 4. See unit pavers section for leveling bed placement. H. Under Monolithic Paving : 1. Compact subsoil to 95 percent of its maximum dry density before placing fill. 2. Use Structural Fill. 3. Place geotextile fabric over subsoil prior to placing fill. 4. Fill up to 12 inches below finish paving elevation. 5. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 6. Maximum compacted depth of each lift: 8 inches. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements,for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 1557("modified Proctor"). Protect Number-211280 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 31 23 23 PERMIT SET FILL MARCH 2013 PAGE 5 of 5 C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work,replace and retest. 3.07 CLEANING A. Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile. B. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. C. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water. END OF SECTION Project Number-211280 Divi‘sl‘oli LJ . ST. ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 32 17 13 PERMIT SET PARKING BUMPERS MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 of 1 SECTION 32 17 13 PARKING BUMPERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Precast concrete parking bumpers and anchorage. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A615/A615M-Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement;2012. B. ASTM C33/C33M-Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates;2011a. C. ASTM C150/C150M- Standard Specification for Portland Cement;2012. D. ASTM C260-Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete;2010a. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide unit configuration, dimensions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Parking Bumpers: Precast concrete,conforming to the following: 1. Nominal Size: 6 inches high, 6 inches wide, by length as indicated on drawings. 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Cement: ASTM C150, Portland Type I- Normal;white color. 4. Concrete Materials: ASTM C 33 aggregate,water,and sand. 5. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M,deformed steel bars; unfinished finish,strength and size commensurate with precast unit design. 6. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260. 7. Concrete Mix: Minimum 5000 psi, 28 day strength, air entrained to 5 to 7 percent. 8. Use rigid molds,constructed to maintain precast units uniform in shape,size and finish. Maintain consistent quality during manufacture. 9. Embed reinforcing steel,and drill or sleeve for two dowels. 10. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking. 11. Minor patching in plant is acceptable, providing appearance of units is not impaired. B. Dowels: Cut reinforcing steel, 1/2 inch diameter, 18 inch long,pointed tip. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged units. B. Install units in alignment with adjacent work. C. Fasten units in place with 2 dowels per unit. END OF SECTION Project Number-211280 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 32 31 13 PERMIT SET CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES MARCH 2013 PAGE 1 of 2 SECTION 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fence framework, fabric, and accessories. B. Excavation for post bases;concrete foundation for posts. C. Manual gates and related hardware. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A1011/A1011 M -Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,and Ultra-High Strength; 2012a B. ASTM F567- Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence;2011. C. ASTM F668-Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)and Other Organic Polymer-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric;2011. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts,accessories,fittings and hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, and schedule of components. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Posts, Rails,and Frames: ASTM F 1083 Schedule 40 hot-dipped galvanized steel pipe, welded construction, minimum yield strength of 25 ksi. B. Wire Fabric: ASTM F668 polymer-coated steel chain link fabric. C. Concrete: Type specified in Section 03 30 00. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Gate Posts: 3.5 inch diameter. B. Gate Frame: 1.66 inch diameter for welded fabrication. C. Fabric: 2 inch diamond mesh interwoven wire, 6 gage thick,top selvage knuckle end closed, bottom selvage twisted tight. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fittings: Sleeves,bands, clips, rail ends,tension bars,fasteners and fittings;steel. B. Hardware for Double Swinging Gates: 180 degree hinges,2 for gates up to 60 inches high, 3 for taller gates;drop bolt on inactive leaf engaging socket stop set in concrete, active leaf latched to inactive leaf preventing raising of drop bolt, padlock hasp; keepers to hold gate in fully open position and gate rollers. C. Privacy Slats: Vinyl strips,sized to fit fabric weave. Project Number-211280 ST.ANTHONY COMMUNITY CENTER 32 31 13 PERMIT SET CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES MARCH 2013 PAGE 2 of 2 2.04 FINISHES A. Components and Fabric: Vinyl coated over coating of 1.8 oz/sq ft galvanizing. B. Accessories: Same finish as framing. C. Color(s): Black. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install framework,fabric,accessories and gates in accordance with ASTM F 567. B. Place fabric on outside of posts and rails. C. Corner,Gate and Terminal Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade: ASTM F 567. D. Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail and diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail one bay from end and gate posts. E. Attach fabric to end,corner,and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips. F. Do not attach the hinged side of gate to building wall; provide gate posts. G. Install gate with fabric to match fence. Install hardware. H. Provide concrete center drop to footing depth and drop rod retainers at center of double gate openings. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1 inch. C. Components shall not infringe adjacent property lines. END OF SECTION Project Number-211280